Home

Kentrox AI296 User's Manual

1. Operating Support System Al296 Asynchronous NE Figure 1 5 Asynchronous to TCP IP Application 1 11 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Product Description Typical Applications The following events occur in Figure 1 5 e The OSS sends TCP IP calls to Al296 e Al296 routes the TCP IP calls to an asynchronous NE using an asynchronous port IP Over X 25 Networks Figure 1 6 illustrates a common IP over X 25 application SNMP i e L Manager a PON M X 25 Packet eee S a ocod Network example a Or Al 98 oe Bee On IP Network nf DiRe A1296 Al296 Al296 IP Over Ethernet ee ees IP Over Ethernet Figure 1 6 IP Over X 25 Network In Figure 1 6 Al296 is used to tunnel IP traffic through an X 25 network Al296 can be configured to encapsulate IP packets making it possible to achieve IP connectivity across a legacy X 25 network The most common application for this functionality is to transport SNMP management information across an X 25 network Important IP X 25 transport works only over SVCs J 1 09 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Product Description Typical Applications Figure 1 6 on page 1 12 illustrates the following events e The SNMP Network Manager for example AppliedView sends TCP IP calls over an IP Ethernet network to Alswitch Al296 e Al296 encap
2. Source Destination Menu ltem Information Async X 25 SVC Alias name ASY ink_number Called The following options are available address X25 ink_number called_address 6 X25 ink_number caller_address call_user_data Note ca ed address must be a valid X 121 address Async X 25 PVC Alias name ASY ink_number Called PVC address Call data X25 ink_ number Icn Async TCP Alias name ASY ink_number Called ip_address tcp_ port number address 8 21 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Source Destination Protocol Tables Table 8 10 Asynchronous Source With Breaks Al296 Source Destination Menu Item Information Async X 25 SVC Alias name ASY ink_ number Async with X 29 TL1 break Called The following options are available Async address 6 X25 ink_number called_address packetized e X25 ink_number caller_address onaCR call_user_data or 02 s idle time Note ca ed_address must be a valid X 121 address Caller s The following options are available protocol e Async leave blank e Async TL1 TL1 Refer to TL1 on page 8 33 e Async packetized PKT P13 12 Refer to PKT on page 8 32 Called PAD Refer to PAD on page 8 30 protocol Async X 25 PVC Alias name ASY ink_ number Async with X 29 TL1 break Called PVC Async address packetized S ona CB Call data X25 ink_ number lc
3. New X 25 Link Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the Link Menu 2 ForlLink Description enter a description associated with the link Maximum length is 30 characters J 6 28 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration General Link Properties Configuration This example displays Link Description setto New X 25 Link X 25 Link Menu Link TO Configure sexs woa Bo a Oh a be Ee ae e 3 H State ee Ge tee A ARA AAA eH Up Down Link Type Async X 25 HDLC Bridge SyncPPP AsyncPPP MLT IOterbace TYPE s a a at a A A dodo A Ys RS 232 RS 530 V 35 Link Description DAA New X 25 Link Link Mode Description This menu item defines the mode of operation for an X 25 link as normal passive or extended e Normal mode is used for normal X 25 service e Passive mode allows Al296 to operate with the SCCS application of the AT amp T 5ESS The SCCS application requires redundant links at the 5ESS These links are called SCCOB and SCC1B Only one link is active at a time The 5ESS constantly tries to bring up whichever link is idle If the 5ESS has SCCOB active it will try to bring up SCC1B If SCC1B comes up the 5ESS will drop SCCOB and send information on SCC1B Passive mode ensures that either SCCOB or SCC1B will be up but not simultaneously e Extended mode supports passive link capability to the 5ESS over a TCP IP network Extended mode ensures
4. ee 034 16 R28 registration retransmission count 0 2551 052 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the X 25 Link Menu 2 Select x 25 Parameters Menu The X 25 Parameters Menu appears 3 Forr20 restart count enter the counter value The default is 1 4 FOrR22 reset transmission count enter the counter value The default is 1 5 For R23 clear retransmission count enter the counter value The default is 1 6 79 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration X 25 Parameters Configuration 6 Forr28 registration retransmission count enter the counter value The default is 1 This example displays O R20 restart count set to150 R22 reset transmission count Setto 25 R23 clear retransmission count Set to 34 R28 registration retransmission count Setto52 X 25 Parameters Menu Lik being d 5 16H d a oc s s pon A wk ok ke Ob a be Boe Bom BY wean 03 X25 Facilities Negotiation 2 Enabled Disabled a EA a cy hh a odo Bh kB ahd we g 128 256 512 Packet Wadow SIZE a po or AY Gi oa Ee GR Gh Gp Ue aw Se de a o a A X121 Local Address EE SAA A ee apa eee ae T20 Resta rt TEMO som coo e ee ee eo a a 150000 121 Gall Timer s a scada ss sa a a e 0000 00 T22 Reset TIMET 2 a R a a a o a a e 2 000000 123 Clear TRT s aoi eke a Yow a a a dee Se R R a a ira OO T24 Window Timer soe s o w ada ag doa 235600000 T25 Data Retransmission Timer oo a a
5. Async X 25 PVC 01 ASY ink_number 04 PVC 08 X25 ink_number cn Async TCP 01 ASY ink_number 04 ip_address tcp_port_ number 8 13 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Source Destination Protocol Tables Table 8 2 Asynchronous Source With Breaks Al198 Source Destination Menu Item Information Async X 25 SVC 01 ASY ink_ number Async with X 29 TL1 break 04 The following options are available Async e X25 ink_number called_address packetized 6 X25 ink_number caller_address ona CR ca _user_data or 02 s idle time Note ca ed address must be a valid X 121 address 11 The following options are available e Async leave blank e Async TL1 TL1 Refer to TL1 on page 8 33 e Async packetized PKT P13 12 Refer to PKT on page 8 32 10 PAD Refer to PAD on page 8 30 Async X 25 PVC 01 ASY ink_ number Async with X 29 TL1 break 04 PVC Async packetized 08 X25 ink_number lcn on a CR 11 The following options are available Aco e Async leave blank e Async TL1 TL1 Refer to TL1 on page 8 33 e Async packetized PKT P13 12 Refer to PKT on page 8 32 10 PAD Refer to PAD on page 8 30 Async TCP with 01 ASY ink_number telnet break 04 ip_address tcp_port_number 10 TN Refer to TN on page 8 35 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Source Destination
6. RTS State Configuration Description RTS is an RS 232 signal that is sent from a transmitting terminal to a receiving terminal to request permission to transmit It is configured using the following menu items RTS connect state Sets the RTS connect state to one of the following options e 0n Sets RTS to on when the link is connecting or connected e off Sets RTS to off when the link is connecting or connected 6 FlowControl Enables RTS to follow the hardware flow control convention I 6 72 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration RTS DTR Lead Control Configuration RTS disconnect state Sets the RTS disconnect state to one of the following options e n Sets RTS to on when the link disconnects e off Sets RTS to off when the link disconnects Toggl e Makes RTS pulse when the link disconnects The pulse polarity is opposite to the sense specified for the connected state Menu Item Type Toggle Link Type Availability Async and AsyncPPP and SyncPPP Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Foran asynchronous or asynchronous PPP link access menu 4 2 11 12 13 2 FOr03 RTS connect state enter 3 to select on OFF Or FLOW CONTROL The default is on 3 Foro4 rts disconnect state enter 4 to select on 0FF or TOGGLE The default is off This example displays 03 RTS connect state Set tO FLOW CONTROL and 04 RTS disconnect state Set tO TOGGLE gt 4 Menu 4 2 11 12 13 O1 DTR
7. Active Passive Other Frame Window Size ic Ra a ds aa a el Max Packet SIZE seo cecece wow Aa 128 256 512 Packet Window Size A T oo ee KIZI Local E 5 0 e or lee a an ae RRA RR AA es DRA Number Of PVCS eos woe ao o e A a e a A PVC Configuration Settings Description PVCs are configured using four menu items e pvc type Defines the PVC type as Active Connect on activity Or Passive e Acti ve Specifies that the PVC attempts to connect as soon as a link goes up If an immediate connection is not made the PVC continues trying to connect at a specified time interval This time interval is established by the call timer setting e Connect on activity Specifies that the PVC connects when data is received This PVC remains dormant until it receives a data packet from the network 6 Passive Specifies that PVCs make no attempt to connect LCN ow Defines the minimum logical channel number for the PVCs you want to configure e LCN hi gh Defines the maximum logical channel number for the PVCs you want to configure e Timer interval Defines the timer interval The timer interval type depends on the PVC type The following timer intervals are available e Call timer interval Defines the time interval in seconds at which an active PVC will attempt to establish a connection to a destination Inactivity timer interval Defines the amount of time in seconds after a connect on activity PVC is started
8. 11 optional For 11 caller s protocol enter11 and the caller s protocol 12 Save your changes Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide TID Multiplexing TID Multiplexing Configuration Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System Note To configure aliases in the Al296 local menu system Al296 must be in standalone mode 1 Log in to the Al296 Main Menu 2 From the Al296 Main Menu select Alias Menu The Alias Summary Menu appears 3 From the Alias Summary Menu select Add Alias The Alias Edit Menu appears Alias Edit Menu Alias Name DESTINATION e wowi GE awk ange A BRR IRL FA dd dt Ni Gal et TR Add esis a wid GO a a dP abel pe heart eel bebe bain Called ATOE Sit ye a i aud eye a ea Ook dea er Eon dd ote ie o mn a Ca Dad e 5 oo ae 2 pew a RARER en oe owe ee oe ee ye va eee Ee ita E Gal eS POR an ri a a tartar A EAA eS Cal lid POT T i aia e dd WG ok eee LR aa ek we mane AD PCat RON SEEING a a R toner aes dedo Aa aed Sem eae ARG wae RR ae a a Al ter Waite ROUTE w a a tuica o AAA Gee ACHE Set A AA dat ab all DeESer PON de wad a anea A RAR Rd Gh aad o eee eae E Display Alias in Destination Menu 0 Yes No Alas LOCA LION iom ds ba a Ge Be y E oe Beginning End Alias Test Menu Range 255 characters lt Fl gt Help lt F2 gt Send lt F4 gt Close lt Ctrl R gt Return to Main Menu 4 Foralias Name enter the alias name for the call coming from t
9. 8 51 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Alias Configuration Examples This example displays the menu items used to configure the MLT host alias shown in Figure 8 5 on page 8 51 10 AEPN L 01 Alias name MLT 3 02 Simple alias translation 03 Destination 04 Called address 192 168 1 140 1001 05 This alias is visible in the destination menu NO 06 Link number is 1 16 07 Caller s address 08 Ca data 09 App string 10 Called protocol AEPN L 11 Caller s protocol 12 Alternate routing alias 14 Test macros 15 Show entire alias 16 Show the first entry in the alias translation table 17 Show the previous entry in the alias translation table 18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table 19 Delete the above alias translation entry 20 Save the changes made 20b to the beginning 20e to the end 21 Exit this menu with no changes Enter item number and optional value then push lt CR gt key gt This example displays the menu items used to configure the MLT network element alias shown in Figure 8 5 on page 8 51 gt 11 AEPN L Menu 8 01 Alias name eee eee eee ee eee eee eee 192 168 1 140 1001 02 Simple alias translation 03 Destination 04 Called address 05 This alias is visible in the destination Menu NO 06 Link number is 1 16 07 Caller s add
10. Rx BSY buffers exhausted Displays the number of times all receive buffers were used but more were required Rx frames missed Displays the number of frames that were supposed to be received but were missed Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands diag info Display Item Description Rx frames received Displays the number of frames received on the connection Rx bytes received Displays the number of bytes received on the connection Tx RL retry limit exceeded Displays the number of times transmitted frames exceeded the retry limit Tx RC collisions Displays the number of transmit collisions This is the number of times the Ethernet device goes to transmit but cannot because someone else is already transmitting Tx UN underruns This displays the number of times the transmitter has run out of data due to the system being busy Tx LC late collisions Displays the number of late collisions on transmitted frames Tx CSL carrier sense lost Displays the number of times that the carrier sense was lost Tx queued buffers Displays the number of queued buffers Tx frames sent Displays the number of frames that were transmitted Tx bytes sent Displays the number of bytes that were transmitted Unexpected interrupts Displays the number of times that the transfer of frames was unexpectedly interrupted J 9 42 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide A
11. 0 Nor mal Passive Extended Passive Link with Clocking 2 2 0 Enabled Disabled Frame Level Disconnect Active Passive Other Frame Window Size Max Packet Sit da a da ca Sb oh Moe Row ROR OR OR bo amp Ge amp amp 128 256 512 Packet Widow Sire uo c wro e ay ere aa ah a a GD a oe a ar we 2 XIZI Local Address 2 oaos a ela a kothok bob e a AA ed Number 0f 1 sor ke ew Se ee a ok eo dw ch ok we a e PVC Menu SVG EOW 7 ca ae ae Sd eh th Gee A ee Ge a es OR Oe te SP ae oe ee ee ee 5 SVC RIO 25 a oem Gt aed ar Ge Ft ay ee ws TE a cae ee da J 6 02 KENT TID Multiplexing This chapter provides information on configuring TID multiplexing Guide to this Chapter Overview TID Multiplexing Configuration TID Multiplexing Troubleshooting Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide TID Multiplexing Overview Overview Al296 supports TID multiplexing which enables a single call from an OSS to fan out into multiple calls to various NEs The initiating call may be X 25 asynchronous or TCP but cannot originate from a destination menu Refer to Figure 7 1 for an illustration of TID multiplexing TID1 TID2 TID3 TID1 TID2 X 25 Packet Switched TID3 Network TID4 Al296 TID5 TID6 TID5 ane T1D4 TID6 TID5 Figure 7 1 TID Multiplexing Overv
12. 01 IP Address 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 254 e eee ee eee 000 000 000 000 To enter an IP address of 172 016 002 043 enter the following 1 172 016 002 043 The menu re appears with the entered IP address 01 IP Address 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 254 eee eee ee eee 172 016 002 043 To change configuration data that has been entered for a menu item enter the menu item number followed by a comma and the new data Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Using the Al198 Menu System Navigating the Menu System Tip To change a typed entry use BACKSPACE to back up to the desired position in the text and retype the changes However once the user presses ENTER changes can be made only by selecting that menu item and re entering the data Functions Menu item functions appear at the bottom of each menu This example displays menu items that can appear and Table 2 1 describes them 17 18 19 20 21 Display first page Next page Delete entry Save the changes made Exit this menu with no changes Enter item number and optional value then push lt CR gt key gt Table 2 1 Menu Item Descriptions Menu Item Description 17 Displays the first page of a menu 18 Displays additional pages of a menu 19 Deletes information for a specified entry 20 Saves the entered information and re displays the previous related menu Important Configura
13. Front Panel Components Figure 1 1 displays the Al296 front panel components 0 LINKS O 13 15 LINKS 5 8 Figure 1 1 Al296 DC OK LED FAULT LED LINKS 5 8 Connector LINKS 13 16 Connector LINKS 1 4 Connector LINKS 9 12 Connector ACT LED LINK LED COL LED 10BASET Connector Illuminates green when 5 Volts are present Illuminates red if the card fails Provides four asynchronous HDLC Bridge PPP or X 25 ports Provides four asynchronous HDLC Bridge PPP or X 25 ports Provides four asynchronous HDLC Bridge PPP or X 25 ports Provides four asynchronous HDLC Bridge PPP or X 25 ports llluminates green when the card is transmitting or receiving packets Illuminates green when valid link integrity pulses are being received Illuminates red when collisions are detected Specifies the external 10BaseT port connector Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Product Description Technical Specifications Technical Specifications Table 1 1 lists the Al296 technical specifications Table 1 1 Technical Specifications Component Description UO Ports 16 asynchronous HDLC Bridge PPP or X 25 selectable per port during configuration nn Note Individual ports are derived by using a CAB257 cable assembly for each connector or by using the Model DP196 distribution panel Port Speed 300 bps to 128 Kbps or external clocking selectable per
14. Command Types shell Formats user Examples This example displays all currently configured Al296 users with associated profile names and destinations In this case pubs is the only configured user 296 users User Name Profile Name Destination puss supervisor 296 9 121 who Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands who Description This command displays the users currently logged into Al296 It displays the user name time of login user ID the source of the connection and command currently being used by each user The destination is shown only if the user has connected to an alias with the destination menu Important Do not use the ID displayed with this command to break a connection Command Type shell Formats who Examples This example displays all the users currently logged in to the Al296 In this case pubs is the only logged in user 296 who Login Time Command gt Destination J 9 122 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands xve AVC Description This command displays information about a specific X 25 logical channel Command Types shell and winslc Formats For the Al296 system command xve ink circuit For the winslc command winslc baseport xve link circuit Parameters baseport Defines the baseport number for Al296 link Defines a number from 1 to 16 circuit Defines a valid logical channel number Examples This
15. Disconnect inactivity ti mer Defines an inactivity timer value This value establishes a timeout interval after which the link will automatically disconnect if no data has been sent or received for the specified number of seconds This value only applies to incoming calls on links that have a retry interval timer setting of 0 and a link application setting of LoGI N Or ALIAS AppAlias Note The Disconnect inactivity timer Option must be set to a value greater than O for the inactivity timer to function Inactivity timer enabled when link receives call Enables or disables the disconnect inactivity timer when the link receives a call Inactivity timer resets on incoming characters from destination When enabled incoming characters count as activity on a link the inactivity timer resets When disabled they do not count the inactivity timer does not reset Menu Item Type Data for disconnect inactivity timer Toggle for Inactivity timer enabled when link receives call and Inactivity timer resets on incoming characters from destination Link Type Availability Async Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 12 2 Foro4 Disconnect inactivity timer enter 4 and the timer value The default is 0 J sas Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Disconnect Options Configuration 3 Foro5 inactivity Timer enabled when link receives call enter 5 to Select on or OFF The def
16. Fourth column Defines the MuxID which is an internal number used by developers to describe which data stream is used for the connection Fifth column Defines the file descriptor which is an integer value used by developers to describe which data stream is used for the connection Sixth column Defines the flag which gives a code that indicates the purpose of the data stream 9 81 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands reset reset Description This command resets Al296 CAUTION All call processing will stop and all connections will be lost during the reboot process Command Type shell Formats reset Examples This example displays the resetting of Al296 296 reset Are you SURE you want to reset the system y n y Resetting system J 9 82 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands rz rz Description This command allows Al296 to receive files from a PC using the Zmodem file transfer protocol This command can be executed from any asynchronous port or Telnet connection Note After issuing the rz command if the sending PC does not begin the file transfer within 40 seconds the system returns to the prompt Command Type shell Formats rz Examples This example displays Al296 receiving two files from a PC 296 rz Ready to receive Start your upload now B01000400654a92 2 files received 296 9 83 Al29
17. 296 diag eth filter list Filters currently being used by diag eth protocol tcp dst 00 40 72 00 d2 d9 src 00 40 72 00 d2 d9 dst 172 16 2 9 src 172 16 2 9 protocol tcp This example displays the deletion of filter protocol tcp 296 diag eth filter delete protocol tcp Filter protocol tcp has been deleted This example displays the deletion of all filters 296 diag eth filter delete al Filter dst 00 40 72 00 d2 d9 has been deleted Filter sre 00 40 72 00 d2 d9 has been deleted Filter dst 172 16 2 9 has been deleted Filter src 172 16 2 9 has been deleted J 9 36 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands diag info diag info Description This command displays diagnostic information for WAN asynchronous Ethernet and TCP connections as well as for memory Different screens of information can be viewed depending on the command option that is entered The screens display the state of serial links and system updates once per second The available display options are w m A E and T They display the following information e Option w displays WAN diagnostic information w is the default display e Option m displays the STREAMS allocation and memory information e Option a displays asynchronous information e Option E displays Ethernet information e Option Tt displays TCP data Note Type X to exit the command display Command Type shell Form
18. 296 profile Usage profile n o list profile names profile I lt profile name gt o list all commands associated with a given profile profile c lt existing profile name gt lt new profile name gt o create a new profile from an existing profile profile a lt profile name gt commands w 0 add commands to a profile and possibly add write permission profile d lt profile name gt commands o delete commands froma profile profile remove lt profile name gt o completely remove a profile 296 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands pvcedit pvcedit Description This command allows a change to occur on a PVC without bringing down bouncing the entire link This command can also be used to reset the PVC without resetting the entire link If no options are specified the PVC is simply reset This command also has the following constraints e Only asynchronous and X 25 PVCs are to be used e Asynchronous PVCs can be reset only e X 25 PVCs can be reset and altered Command Types shell and winslc Formats For the Al296 system command pvcedit asy ink_number cn a call_timer c inactivity_timer p x25 ink_number cn a call_timer c inactivity_timer p For the winslc command winslc baseport pvcedit asy ink_number cn a call_timer c inactivity_timer p X25 ink_number cn a call_timer c inactivity_timer p Parameters a
19. Examples This example displays the link and cable status information for links 1 to 5 296 staslc 1 5 Link Current status Speed Act Pmax Rx CRC Rx Abt Rx Ovr Tx Und Intf 1 Asy Link n 8 1 9600 0 0 0 0 RS 232 2 DCE Dcd Frm Pkt 9600 0 128 0 0 0 0 RS 232 3 DCE Dcd Frm Pkt 9600 0 128 0 0 0 0 RS 232 4 DCE Dcd Frm Pkt 9600 0 128 0 0 0 0 RS 232 5 DCE Dcd Frm Pkt 9600 0 128 0 0 0 0 RS 232 296 Note Not all links are displayed here Entering the command with no additional parameters would show all 16 links Column Description Link Displays the number of the link Status Displays the link status as dataxfer data is being transfered idle Or disabled Appl Displays the application specified for the link Alias Login or Destination DTR RTS CTS DSR DCD Displays the status of the control signals means the signal is asserted and means the signal is negated Format Displays the baud rate number of data bits parity none odd Or even and number of stop bits specified for the link Parity Displays the number of parity errors Frame Displays the number of framing errors Overun Displays the number of overrun errors Underun Displays the number of underrun errors 9 93 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands syncflash syncflash Note This command is only available when Al296 is in standalone mode Descripti
20. J A10 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 System Codes Kentrox Technical Support Kentrox Technical Support Some alarm conditions and crash codes reveal serious problems for which you should contact Kentrox Technical Support If one of these alarm conditions or crashes should occur record relevant information associated with the problem and contact Kentrox Technical Support Phone Kentrox Technical Support 866 480 3571 Kentrox Operator toll 800 247 9482 free Kentrox Operator 614 798 2000 international Email Kentrox Technical techsupport aiinet com Support When you send email to Kentrox be sure to include your name company name and telephone number att Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 System Codes Kentrox Technical Support J a12 KENT Standalone Mode and Switch Mode This appendix provides information about standalone and switch mode for Al296 Guide to this Appendix Standalone Mode Switch Mode 8 1 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Standalone Mode and Switch Mode Standalone Mode Standalone Mode Standalone mode refers to the mode where Al296 stores its configuration locally to flash or on a TFTP server The CLC might be used as the TFTP server in some cases This lets the card operate as a self contained unit When operating in standalone mode Al296 has a local menu system that is used instead of the Al198 menu system for tasks such as
21. Note The communication server is not a PAD e X 29 Specifies a protocol for setting the X 3 parameters via a network connection XXX PAD calls can be made from Al296 with a PAD shell command or by defining an alias that routes a call to the destination XXX PAD call An XXX PAD destination is defined like an X 25 SVC destination with the addition of XXX as the called protocol When XXX is used as a Call protocol it can take arguments to set the X 3 parameters similar to the set Command used within the pad shell command 8 31 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Protocol Processing Modules PKT The packetizing module holds data as it arrives until Al296 receives specified characters such as new lines Once the packetizing character is received all of the data that has been held is passed on as a single packet This module also allows data to be packetized on a timer which you can set It also allows you to specify which characters if any to be filtered out of the data stream PKT works on all protocols Defaults Sets no packetizing timer Sets no idle packetizing timer Sets no filter characters Passes the break upstream Passes the break downstream Discards unpacketized data when passing the break upstream Optional Parameters Td Sets the packetizing timer to y hundredths of a second It packetizes d hundredths of a second after the last time it was packetized By setting d
22. alias4 ove Delete alias2 ove Delete aliasl ove Delete alias3 ove Delete Range 255 characters lt F1 gt Help lt F4 gt Close lt Ctrl R gt Return to Main Menu s o fj Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Call Routing 2 From the Alias Summary Menu select one of the following options e Select sort to sort the aliases alphabetically e Select Move next to the desired alias and move it to the top or bottom of the list or up or down in the list 3 Select lt F4 gt Close to exit the Alias Summary Menu Configuring an Alias with X 25 Keep Alive Some devices will go to sleep if no data is received within a certain timeframe You can prevent that by sending a receive ready RR frame periodically on a virtual circuit VC You can customize the time period by configuring the application string of the Alias menu 1 Access the Alias Edit Menu For information about accessing the Alias Edit Menu refer to Configuring an Alias in the Al296 Menu System on page 8 7 Alias Edit Menu Alas NAME i os aw Ae RAR behead dia koi aca oa a a X 25 4 1 AA O ahh cs shah ca cect ta otis Seem nace toh aT tongs eae Gal vers AMO A a e Be Gee Baba bend Gal led RATES 2 a Jae died Mee added tt al Sa le Baa iw alba 10 39 3 89 7 Ca PEH TTT A NS A Called PENOSA Baia Siar 4 Ap pL Ga 5 P SETI NO r aen aiaa i ii die A eh aM a a aia ee ee A X25KA s 20 Alternate Route
23. 296 traceroute 10 40 57 10 traceroute to 10 40 57 10 10 40 57 10 30 hops max 40 byte packets 1 10 40 57 10 296 J o4 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands type type Description This command displays the text of any file other than a code image or configuration file Note This command has the same functionality as command cat Command Types shell Formats type p filename Parameters p Displays text from the file one page at a time filename Defines the file for which you want to view the contents Examples This example displays the first page of contents for file og txt 296 type p log txt Configuration has chang 06 20 11 060600 Sev F User pubs from 10 40 35 06 20 20 060600 Sev F User pubs from 10 40 5 06 21 01 060600 Sev 0 Configuration has chang 06 21 04 060600 Sev 0 Configuration has chang 06 21 04 060600 Sev F User pubs from 10 40 5 06 21 07 060600 Sev F User pubs from 10 40 5 04 40 49 060700 Sev F User pubs from 10 40 5 04 40 51 060700 Sev F ed sg 20 1436 sg 20 1436 sg ed sg ed sg 20 1436 sg 20 1436 sg 20 2729 sg has has has has has User pubs from 10 40 5 20 2729 has Press Space for more or q to quit exited the shell entered the shell exited the shell logged out of the Destination Menu logged into the Destination Menu entered the sh
24. 9 39 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands diag info Column Description USED_HWM Displays the highest number of bytes allocated since the card was last rebooted UNIT_SIZE Displays the size in bytes of the memory units that can be allocated This example displays diagnostic information for asynchronous connections which is accessed by typing a ASYNC DIAG INFO LINK STATE BYTES_IN BYTES_OUT LINK STATE BYTES_IN BYTES_OUT 1 1 0 0 16 0 0 0 2 1 0 0 17 0 0 0 3 1 0 0 18 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 19 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 20 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 21 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 22 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 23 0 0 0 9 0 0 0 24 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 25 0 0 0 11 0 0 0 26 0 0 0 12 0 0 0 27 0 0 0 13 0 0 0 28 0 0 0 14 0 0 0 29 0 0 0 15 0 0 0 30 0 0 0 16 0 0 0 31 0 0 0 17 0 0 0 32 0 0 0 Enter M emory A sync E thernet T cp or Q uit Column Description LINK Displays the link number STATE Displays the state of the driver Two states are available e 0 specifies that the link is not established e 1 specifies that the link is enabled The link does not have to have a connection to be enabled BYTE_IN Displays the number of bytes coming into the link BYTE_OUT Displays the number of bytes going out of the link J 9 10 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands diag info This example displays diagnostic information for the front panel Ethernet interface which is accessed by typi
25. Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands aaa Associates a custom profile with a privilege level or range of privilege levels The following rules apply e TACACS privilege levels range from 0 to 15 e Custom profiles can be associated with privilege levels 2 through 14 e Privilege levels 2 through 14 default to the management system profile e Privilege levels 0 1 and 15 are reserved for the Status Management and Supervisor system profiles respectively Note For information on creating custom profiles refer to command profile on page 9 76 Privilege levels are used only if the authorization method is set to priv lvl The only exception to this occurs under all of the following conditions 1 The authentication server returns a privilege level 2 The authorization server cannot be reached 3 The authorization is set to per command and fallback is enabled Note For information on configuring the authorization method refer to command aaa author The following parameters are accepted e def aul t Removes the association between a range of privilege levels and a profile e priv_range Defines the range of privilege levels that will be associated with the profile Individual values are separated by commas and hyphens For example 1 4 6 specifies privilege levels 1 4 5 and 6 e profile name Specifies the name of an existing profile Configures the number of consecutive connection atte
26. Beginning End Alias Test Menu Range 255 characters lt Fl gt Help lt F2 gt Send lt F4 gt Close lt Ctrl R gt Return to Main Menu J 7 12 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide TID Multiplexing TID Multiplexing Configuration These examples display two of the child alias configurations in the Al198 menu system gt 11 Menu 8 01 Alias name eee eee ee eee eee eee ee eee ee ee eee eee TL1DM 1 02 Simple alias translation 03 Destination 04 Called address e eee ee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee X25 1 123456789012 05 This alias is visible in the destination menu eeeeeee YES 06 Link number is 1 16 07 Caller s address 08 Ca data 09 App string TID NE OH COLUMBUS 1 TID NE OH COLUMBUS 2 TID NE OH COLUMBUS 3 10 Called protoco 11 Caller s protocol 12 Alternate routing alias 14 Test macros 15 Show entire alias 16 Show the first entry in the alias translation table 17 Show the previous entry in the alias translation table 18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table 19 Delete the above alias translation entry 20 Save the changes made 20b to the beginning 20e to the end 21 Exit this menu with no changes Enter item number and optional value then push lt CR gt key gt gt 11 Menu 8 01 Alias name ee ee eee eee eee eee eee ee eee ee eee TL1DM 2 02 Simple alias translation 03 Destination
27. Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the RAS Configuration Menu located under the System Menu 2 FOrRADIUS Primary Server Status SelectEnabled OF Disabled 3 Forli address enter an IP address The default is 0 0 0 0 4 ForPort Number enter a port number The default is 1812 for RADIUS servers 5 Forsecret enter a password The default is applied 6 Repeat steps 2 through 5 for the secondary RADIUS server This example displays RADIUS Primary Server Status Set tO Enabled IP Address Set to12 33 57 2 Port Number setto 122 Secret Set tO newone RAS Configuration Menu RADIUS Primary Server Status Enabled Disabled IP Address 12 33 57 2 Port Number 122 A EE newone 4 15 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide System Configuration RADIUS Configuration Shell FTP Options Description This item sets the Shell FTP option for RADIUS as one of the following 6 amp nabl ed Enables RADIUS login e Disabled Disables RADIUS login e Local fall back Enables RADIUS login but resorts to local login if the RADIUS login fails L Note RADIUS and TACACS cannot both be configured at the same time Attempting to do this generates an error Menu Item Type Toggle Configuration in the Al198 Menu System To configure the shell FTP RADIUS option 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 2 2 2 Foro9 Shell FTP Radius Option enter 9 to select ENABLED DISABLED OF LOCAL FALL
28. Weight approximately 2 5 Ib 1 12 kg Size Height 4 in 10 16 cm Width 19 in 48 26cm 23in 58 42 cm Depth 1 12 in 2 84 cm Cable CAB162 Connects one connector 4 ports on Al296 to the distribution panel Each distribution panel requires four cables Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Product Description Individual Port Access DB 25 Connectors Table 1 3 displays pin assignments for the DB 25 connectors on the DP196 19 23 distribution panel Pin 1 Pin 14 Pin 13 Pikes lo L 900000000009 9 Figure 1 3 DB 25 connector Pin Assignments Table 1 3 displays the DP196 19 23 pin assignment specifications Table 1 3 DP196 19 23 Pin Assignment Specifications Pin Signal Direction 2 TXD Output 3 RXD Input 4 RTS Output 5 CTS Input 7 Signal GND vore 8 DCD Input 9 RXC Input 10 DCD Input 12 TXC Either 13 CTS Input 14 TXD Output 15 TXC Either 16 RXD Input 17 RXC Input Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Product Description Individual Port Access Table 1 3 DP196 19 23 Pin Assignment Specifications Continued Pin Signal Direction 19 RTS Output 20 DTR Output 23 DTR Output The following characteristics apply to pin assignments Any pin assignment not referenced on a connector is not connected Signals with a sign after them are used wh
29. e Alias Macro Components e Alias Macro Configuration Alias Macro Components This section discusses the components in an alias macro including e Start Symbols e Comments e Constants e Variables e Wildcard Symbols e Operators e Functions Start Symbols The start symbol for an alias macro is an equal sign lt is followed by one or more alias macro components Comments Comments are added at the programmer s discretion to explain macro functionality Comments can be entered either on a blank line or at the end of a line containing a macro To enter a comment on a blank line it must begin with two forward slashes To enter a comment in a field with a macro it must begin with a pound sign at the end of a macro J 3 38 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Alias Macros This example displays a comment on its own line in the Application String field anda comment after a macro in the Alternate Route field Ap placiaticOn SP PONG a anna ra awe dea we H een ee wh a links 1 4 Alternate ROUTE 2 oa 6145550384 4from OH Note The pound sign can be entered as part of the macro string if it is enclosed in either single or double quotes The pound sign may be either directly enclosed A D C or the string that the pound sign resides in may be enclosed 198 127 1 4 23 Constants Macro constants are either fixed alphanumeric characters enclosed in
30. menu_route write Provides write access to the Static route menu menu_system Provides read access to the System menu menu_system write Provides write access to the System menu Note Keyword write is treated as an argument c 3 fj Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Commands for Al296 TACACS Server Enhancements FTP Sessions FTP Sessions The following Al296 keywords apply to FTP access ftplogin Provides FTP read access ftpwrite Provides FTP write access fos
31. 0 eee 24 35 132 67 Local IP Subnet Mask Description This menu item configures the local IXE doorway IP subnet mask Menu Item Type Data Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 13 This menu displays a list of all the configured IP over X 25 subnets From Menu 4 2 11 13 enter a value 02 through 11 associated with the IP over X 25 subnet to be configured Menu 4 2 11 13 1 appears For 02 Local IP Mask for this subnet enter the subnet IP subnet mask value The default is 255 255 255 252 This example displays 02 Local IP Mask for this subnet setto 255 255 0 0 gt 2 255 255 0 0 Menu 4 2 11 13 1 01 Local IP address for this subnet 024 035 132 067 02 Local IP Mask for this subnet 255 255 000 000 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 2 Access the IP Over X 25 Subnet Menu From the IP Over X 25 Subnet Menu select ada The IP Over X 25 Subnet Edit Menu appears For Local IP Mask for this Subnet enter the subnet IP subnet mask value The default is 255 255 255 252 This example displays Local IP Mask for this Subnet Set to 255 255 0 0 IP Over X 25 Subnet Edit Menu Local IP Address for this Subnet i ao 0 eee ee 0 Local IP Mask for this Subnet 2 2 1 1 0 cee 255 25 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide IP Over X 25 Subnet Configuration Local Settings Local X 2
32. 2 S ttO10 65 32 5 SNMP Manager 3 setto 10 65 32 6 SNMP Manager 4 S ttO10 65 32 7 SNMP Manager 5 setto 10 65 32 8 SNMP Menu Contact person for this managed node See ee Rs Node MAME s a Sk BBG Re RO a A BORON Fe Gada tales Node TOCAT ON e se cee ee a a ue ee WR ee a AAA Send authentication traps o oa On Of f SNMP Manager El o s foe oa doa ao a Bom BR Gods ea a RES 10 65 32 4 SNMP Manager 2 s c sos Goi oaa t e a a e aR a e e i e Aat 10 65 32 5 SNMP Manager 63 10 65 32 6 SNMP Manager 1 10 65 32 7 SNMP Manager Ed ce ae eo ae ae ee a BOS A he He A ch SS 10 65 32 8 J 4 26 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide System Configuration Static Route Configuration Static Route Configuration Al296 allows for the configuration of static routes using both the Al198 and Al296 menu systems IP Address Settings Description Static routes are configured with a destination and next hop IP address The destination IP address defines the static IP route you want to configure The next hop IP address defines the IP address of the router you want the system to use when trying to reach the destination IP address Menu Item Types Data Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 14 2 From Menu 4 2 11 14 enter a value from 3 to 11 Menu 4 2 11 14 1 appears 3 Forol Destination P enter an IP address value 4 Foro2 Next Hop 1P enter an IP address value
33. 6 dle R RR ERE adn Sc Ba id ew kde Aa ew haa Re ec Gaile Od SACO IMCS ON Ca Daba 4 5 a A OMG K ak Whe bs UREE Waele Cal ers Protocol a sac O hace ve ee Rede beacm thw a nak deahd dr iiot Called PROEOCO a s ira deta a ies a Sid oe enw aa Aa We hah ed hh ad APPLECAELOA SING y Garrard te aed i d G A aa AOE Mate ROURE oo a aopa piunga aiai Pak AAA mada ab e noe do A a Aad elaine DESCOMPEROM de a oa a cama wh Rae eek ae ae OE Oe ee ea a doh arin gaara Display Alias in Destination Menu a 0 Yes No Alias Locarn ami a a a eg chap a a RW SW Be ye ae Beginning End Alias Test Menu Range 255 characters lt Fl gt Help lt F2 gt Send lt F4 gt Close lt Ctrl R gt Return to Main Menu 5 Foralias Name enter the alias name for the incoming source call Al296 translates the alias name into a call of the type defined in the remaining alias menu items Note The alias name may include leading trailing or embedded wildcard matching characters You may enter an asterisk which replaces zero or more characters a question mark which replaces one character or an alias macro that starts with an equal sign For information on acceptable alias naming elements and conventions refer to section Source Destination Protocol Tables for the Al296 Menu System on page 8 20 6 optional If you are routing calls between two Al296 cards enter the IP address of the remote Al296 in the destina
34. Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 11 2 For01 Link Application enter 1 to select LOGIN DESTI NATI ON Or ALIAS The default is LOGIN This example displays 01 Link Application Set tO DESTI NATI ON gt 1 Menu 4 2 11 12 11 01 Link Application Login Destination Alias DESTI NATI ON J s6 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Connect Options Configuration Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the Async Link Menu 2 Select connect Options Menu The Connect Options Menu appears 3 Forlink Application Select Login Destination Or AppAlias The default is Login This example displays Link Application Set tO Destination Connect Options Menu Link being Comf igure e ca Fk ok ae bo k ba woe Won wwe 1 Link Application 44 Login Destination AppAlias 6 17 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Disconnect Options Configuration Disconnect Options Configuration Disconnect options configure the parameters that are used when Al296 disconnects These options are available for asynchronous and asynchronous PPP links The following configuration items are available e Disconnect Inactivity Timer Settings e Disconnect Settings e Disconnect String Disconnect Inactivity Timer Settings Description The disconnect inactivity timer settings are configured using three menu items
35. Crash Codes Table A 8 Al296 Crash Codes Continued Error Code Error Code Baseriniion Hexadecimal Decimal p OOAA 170 Specifies a serious memory error unable to allocate system memory OOAC 172 Specifies that a serial communication controller is not responding O0AD 173 Specifies a software download This is normal to see when doing a software update to Al296 System Failure Crash Reports Crash codes report to the log port when a card crashes and you receive an Alswitch fault message This message indicates that the system has detected a serious hardware or software fault A message similar to the following appears SLC has CRASHED registers to follow Crash Code 000000ad PC 00000000 SP 00000000 MMR 00000000 MSR 00000000 GPROO 00000000 GPRO1 00000000 GRP02 00000000 GPRO3 00000000 GPRO4 00000000 GRP05 00000000 GPRO6 00000000 GPRO7 00000000 GRP08 00000000 GPRO9 00000000 GPR10 00000000 GRP11 00000000 GPR12 00000000 GPR13 00000000 GRP14 00000000 GPR15 00000000 GPR16 00000000 GRP17 00000000 GPR18 00000000 GPR19 00000000 GRP20 00000000 GPR21 00000000 GPR22 00000000 GRP23 00000000 GPR24 00000000 GPR25 00000000 GRP26 00000000 GPR27 00000000 GPR28 00000000 GRP29 00000000 GPR30 00000000 GPR31 00000000 CR 00000000 LR 00000000 PVR 00500000 SSR0 00000000 XER 00000000 PS0S1 00000000 SSR1 00000000 CTR 00000000 PS0S2 00000000 PSOS3 00000000
36. Modem Option Configuration PPP Authentication Configuration Quick X 25 Configuration RTS DTR Lead Control Configuration X 25 Parameters Configuration Virtual Circuit Configuration Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Al296 Link Types AI296 Link Types Al296 has six configurable link types e Asynchronous e Asynchronous PPP e HDLC Bridge e MLT e Synchronous PPP eo X25 Asynchronous Asynchronous links use asynchronous transmission and support multiple baud rates parity types stop bits and software flow or hardware control See Also e Connect Options Configuration e Disconnect Options Configuration e General Link Properties Configuration e Modem Option Configuration e RTS DTR Lead Control Configuration Asynchronous PPP Asynchronous PPP links use PPP point to point protocol and asynchronous transmission They support PAP and CHAP for authentication and can be set as bridged BCP or routed IPCP interfaces See Also e Connect Options Configuration e Disconnect Options Configuration e General Link Properties Configuration e General PPP Properties Configuration e Modem Option Configuration e PPP Authentication Configuration e RTS DTR Lead Control Configuration Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Al296 Link Types HDLC Bridge HDLC Bridge links run with an HDLC link layer protocol in Asynchronous Balanced Mode and bridge Ethernet frames HDLC Bridge links can pro
37. Table A 8 displays crash codes that are specific to Al296 Contact Kentrox Technical Support to report any of the following crash codes Table A 8 Al296 Crash Codes Error Code Error Code Description Hexadecimal Decimal 0020 32 Specifies a failure to free resource streams 0021 33 Specifies a failure to free memory system 0022 34 Specifies a failure of resource allocation streams 0023 35 Specifies a failure of memory allocation 0024 36 Specifies a checksum error 0025 37 Specifies that a panic message has been printed 0026 38 Specifies an attempt to boot while up 0027 39 This code is not used 0028 40 Specifies that Al296 has been halted by Central Switch command This code is seen when you enter command st psl c for a card 0030 48 Specifies a crash in the shell 0031 49 Specifies a crash in transport layer multiplexing 0032 50 Specifies a crash in association daemon 0033 51 Specifies a crash in bootp 0034 52 Specifies a crash in X 25 0035 53 Specifies a crash in an asynchronous driver 0036 54 Specifies a crash in the PVC daemon 0037 55 Specifies a crash in the config daemon 0038 56 Specifies a generic stream error 0039 57 Specifies a crash in the AEP or AEPN protocol processing option 003A 58 Specifies a crash in the pktmod or TL1mod protocol processing option ao Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 System Codes
38. The following example displays the configuration of destination address 84 238 45 2 and next hop address 23 51 93 5 gt 2 023 051 093 005 Menu 4 2 11 14 1 01 Destination P 2s ee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 084 238 045 002 02 Next Hop P LLK 023 051 093 005 Al296 Local Menu Item Configuration 1 Access the Static Route Menu 2 Select Add The IP Static Route Edit Menu appears 3 For destination IP Address enter an IP address value The default is 1 1 1 1 4 ForNext Hop IP Address enter an IP address value The default is 1 1 1 1 The following example displays the configuration of destination IP address 12 240 54 3 and next hop IP address 12 240 54 4 IP Static Route Edit Menu Destination IP Address 0 0 0 0 e e 12 240 54 3 Next Hop P Address o so w w a a ow we me ee a 22405 544 4 27 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide System Configuration TID to Modem Mux Configuration TID to Modem Mux Configuration The following are available e Inactivity Timeout e Initialization String e Port Bit Settings e TID to Route Inactivity Timeout Description This menu item defines the amount of time in seconds the Modem Mux connection must be inactive before it times out Menu Item Types Data Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 14 2 6 2 From Menu 4 2 14 2 6 enter a value from 2 to 11 Menu 4 2
39. This example displays the result of a boot when the BOOTP server is on the net but the TFTP server is not available 296 Usage 296 tf t Displays Waiting BOOTP Response P TFT TFTP File 296v950b002 cnf Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Router 10 48 0 1 pboot tpboot abort BOOTP TFTP status or aborts retry attempts or a response fromthe TFTP server Address 10 48 60 11 P Server 10 48 60 1 This example displays the result of a reboot with a successful BOOTP TFTP session Usage 296 296 tftpboot tftpboot abort Displays BOOTP TFTP status or aborts retry attempts BOOTP TFTP is finished 9 109 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands timezone timezone Note This command is only available when Al296 is in standalone mode Description This command displays or changes the time zone or adjusts the time to reflect daylight savings Command Type shell Formats timezone dstoff hh mm dston hh mm Parameters dston Enables daylight savings time for Al296 The following parameters are accepted e Specifies that the value is east of UTC e Specifies that the value is west of UTC e hh Defines the number of hours from UTC Universal Coordinated Time or Greenwich Mean Time e mm Defines the number of minutes from UTC Universal Coordinated Time or Greenwich Mean Time dstoff Disables daylight sav
40. Using the Al198 Menu System Navigating the Menu System Submenus Submenus go to deeper levels in the menu hierarchy They provide additional configuration menus Menu items that contain submenus have a plus sign next to their menu item number In this example menu item 02 will display a submenu 02 Configure as Al232 network interface card Some submenus require a selection from a list and then re display the previous menu showing the selection Other submenus have their own submenus that request additional information After saving the entries the top level menu re appears Toggles Toggles display two or more values that can be selected for a parameter Toggles have an asterisk next to their menu item number Entering the menu item number toggles to the next selection In this example menu items 06 and 07 are toggles O6 TCP Default Window Size 200 512 1024 20181 200 O7 TCP Send Ahead OFF For 06 TCP Default Window Size the user can toggle between values 200 512 1024 and 2048 For 07 TCP Send Ahead the user can toggle between on and or Data Data menu items request text entries such as destination names and card descriptions or numeric values such as port numbers and IP addresses To enter information in a data menu item enter the menu item number followed by a comma or a space and the configuration information In this example the menu item requires an IP address entry
41. zoa a a a RS 232 RS 530 V 35 Port speed in bits per second 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 57 6K 115 2K Autobaud Port data Di ES a ay sh ae ta ad oh ou han at a Be So a A Seven Ei ght Pott Stop E 5 sae Gh as aca ok kok e cae A ae ws ee e One Two Sync Port Encoding Description This menu item sets the binary encoding on a port Menu Item Type Toggle Link Type Availability MLT Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 2 Foro07 Sync Port Encoding enter 7 to select naz or NRZI The default is NRZ This example displays 07 Sync Port Encoding Set to NRZI gt 7 Menu 4 2 11 12 01 Link number 1 16 ee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee ee ee eee eee eee 01 02 Link Type Async X25 HDLC SyncPPP AsyncPPP MLT MLT 03 Link Description Async link 1 04 Link state Enabled Disabled LL Enabled 05 Port speed 0 128000 bps 0 is external Clock hg 009600 06 Hardware Interface RS232 RS530 V 35 e ee eee eee ee eee eee eee RS232 07 Sync Port Encoding NRZ NRZI 22 2 e ee eee eee eee ee eee eee NRZI 6 39 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration General Link Properties Configuration Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the MLT Link Menu 2 Forsync Port Encoding Select NRZ Or NRZI The default is NRZ This example disp
42. 0 143 Jun 1 22 52 boot ini TTT 10 0 2175720 Aug 15 10 05 boot img TW r rf 10 0 22061 Jun 1 00 00 log txt TW feere 10 0 4342 Aug 15 08 21 core txt TW T T 10 0 7092 Jun 13 22 46 primary conf 296 J 9 66 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands menu menu Description This command accesses the Al296 main menu system Command Type shell Formats menu Examples This example displays the Al296 Main Menu Al296 Main Menu Link Menu System Menu IP Over X 25 Subnet Menu Static Route Menu Select the desired menu option using the UP or DOWN arrow key Then press ENTER or RETURN to continue lt F1 gt Help lt F4 gt Close A CAUTION The following message appears in the shell when the user exits the main menu and has the last login port disabled There are no login ports currently configured for this system Please take necessary precautions to prevent lockout This message is only seen when the system is running in standalone mode 9 67 more Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands more Description This command prints the content of a file to the current shell session one page ata time Note You cannot use this command to view code image files or configuration files img and cnf extensions Command Type shell Formats more filename Examples This example displays the contents of file og txt one page at a time 296 more
43. 0 3200000ms eee ee eee eee 1000000 07 T22 reset timer 0 3200000ms e eee eee ee eee eee eeee 0020000 08 T23 clear timer 0 3200000ms eee eee eee eee ee ee eee 0180000 09 T24 window timer 0 3200000ms e eee eee eee 2356000 10 T25 data retransmission timer 0 3200000ms 1650000 11 T26 interrupt timer 0 3200000ms eee eee eee eee eeee 2300000 12 T28 registration timer 0 3200000ms 0090000 J 6 82 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration X 25 Parameters Configuration Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the X 25 Link Menu 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Select x 25 Parameters Menu The X 25 Parameters Menu appears For T20 Restart Timer enter the timer value The default is 180000 For T21 Call Timer enter the timer value The default is 200000 For T22 Reset Timer enter the timer value The default is 10000 Fort23 Clear Timer enter the timer value The default is 180000 For T24 Window Timer enter the timer value The default is 75000 ForT25 Data Retransmission Timer enter the timer value The default is 150000 ForT26 Interrupt Timer enter the timer value The default is 180000 10 ForT28 Registration Timer enter the timer value The default is 180000 This example displays e 7120 Re
44. 072204 User pubs from 10 40 5 20 1565 has exited the shell 17 44 18 072204 User pubs from 10 40 5 20 1565 has logged out of the Destinat gt ion Menu 09 15 28 072304 User pubs from 10 40 5 20 1205 has logged into the Destinatio n Menu 09 15 29 072304 User pubs from 10 40 5 20 1205 has entered the shell 296 9 103 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands tcpoutconn tcpoutconn Description This command controls how long outgoing TCP connections wait for a connection to be established before failing Command Type shell and winslc Formats For the shell command tcpoutconn timeout For the winslc command winslc baseport tcpoutconn timeout Parameters timeout Defines the length of the timeout The range is 2 to 360 seconds The default is 75 baseport Defines the baseport number for Al296 Note In standalone mode resetting Al296 resets the timeout to the default of 75 Examples This example displays the configuration of the TCP outgoing connection timer to 30 seconds 296 tcpoutconn 30 TCP Outgoing Connection Timer Value 30 296 J 9 104 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands tftp Note This command is only available when Al296 is in standalone mode Description This command downloads a file from the Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP server to Al296 or uploads a file to the TFTP server from Al296 The following rul
45. 1 Atthe prompt enter di ag eth 2 Entertimestamp to toggle between enabling and disabling the display of the timestamp Using Promiscuous Mode Promiscuous mode can be enabled or disabled during Ethernet diagnostic sessions By disabling promiscuous mode only packets traveling on the network that are destined for your Ethernet card appear By enabling promiscuous mode all the packets traveling on the network appear To enable and disable promiscuous mode 1 Atthe prompt enter diag eth 2 Enter promiscuous to toggle between enabling and disabling promiscuous mode 9 29 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands diag eth Note Operating Al296 in the promiscuous mode can reduce performance The default setting is disabled promiscuous mode Al296 automatically returns to the default setting promiscuous mode disabled when the user quits the di ag et h command Using the Help Option To obtain command help 1 At the prompt enter diag eth 2 Enter hel n The diag eth help screen appears Configuring Filters While using the di ag et h command various filters can be defined to display specific or general diagnostic information Y Tip There is help associated with the f i ter command To view this help enter filter after you enter diag eth Thefilter help screen appears Important If you are connecting to Al296 using Telnet remember to filter out the traffic associated with the telnet connect
46. 3 Atthe FTP prompt open Al198 open jp address ip_address Specifies the Al198 IP address The FTP utility prompts you for a user name and password 4 Putthe FTP utility in binary mode binary Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Standalone Mode and Switch Mode Switch Mode 5 Transfer the software image to Al198 put filepath imagename i mg filepath Defines the path to the software image file imagename Defines the software image file name Note Wait for a completion message after entering this command 6 Exit the FTP utility 7 Log into Al198 8 At the command prompt update Al296 with the new software image winslc baseport update baseport Defines the baseport of Al296 Note You can watch the download process by entering CTRL L 9 Wait for the completion message Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Standalone Mode and Switch Mode Switch Mode les KENT Commands for Al296 TACACS Server Enhancements This appendix provides a list of commands that users need when configuring a TACACS server to utilize Al296 s authorization enhancements Guide to this Appendix Al296 Commands Al296 Menu Aliases FTP Sessions Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Commands for Al296 TACACS Server Enhancements Al296 Commands Al296 Commands Important To authorize a command with no additional arguments remember to enter permit in the argument list The following Al296 commands can be i
47. 57 6K 115 2K Autobaud Port Stop Bits Description This menu item defines the number of stop bits A stop bit is an extra bit at the end of an asynchronous character that helps the receiver recognize the end of the character Menu Item Type Toggle Link Type Availability Async and AsyncPPP Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 2 Foro7 Port Stop Bits enter 7 to select 1 or 2 The default is 1 This example displays 07 Port Stop Bits setto 2 gt 7 Menu 4 2 11 12 01 Link Number 11 16 e 01 02 Link Type Async X25 HDLC SyncPPP AsyncPPP MLT Async 03 Link Description Async link 1 04 Link state Enabled Disabled eee eee eee Enabled O5 Port speed rere eee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee 9600 06 Port Data Bits 7 Bjorn 8 O7 Port Stop Bits 1 2 ee eee eee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 2 J 6 38 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration General Link Properties Configuration Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu 2 ForPort stop bits select One Or Two The default is one This example displays Port stop bits setto Two Async Link Menu HANA A A A ee ee ae a CITE SEAL 22 4 a afm cr A ld e oe te Se a Up Down Link Type Async X 25 HDLC Bridge SyncPPP AsyncPPP MLT Interface Type
48. Access the Link Menu 2 Forinterface Type Select RS 232 RS 530 OF V 35 This example displays Interface Type setto v 35 Async Link Menu Link Eo CONTI OUre sss scs a p p Be ee ee e e OR a K 2 Link state ow cat epee a a A oe OG Up Down Link Type Async X 25 HDLC Bridge SyncPPP AsyncPPP MLT Interface Type RS 232 RS 530 V 35 I 6 26 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration General Link Properties Configuration Interface Mode Description This menu item configures the interface mode as either DTE or DCE DTE is used for a communications device typically a terminal or computer that is the source or destination of signals on a network DCE is used for a device typically the modem that establishes maintains and terminates a session on a network It may also convert signals for transmission Menu Item Type Toggle Link Type Availability MLT and X 25 Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access menu 4 2 11 12 8 for MLT or menu 4 2 11 12 7 for X 25 2 Foroi interface mode enter 1 to select pce or prt The default is pce This example displays 01 Interface mode Set to DTE for an MLT link gt 1 Menu 4 2 11 12 8 01 Interface mode DTE or DCE gt lt lt DTE Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System For MLT links 1 Access the MLT Link Menu 2 Forinterface Mode Select DcE or oTE The default is DCE This example displays Interface M
49. Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 14 2 Forol Modem string enter 1 and the modem string Maximum length is 80 characters This example displays 01 Modem string Set to 6145553003 gt 1 6145553003 Menu 4 2 11 12 14 01 Modem String 6145553003 J 6 52 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Modem Option Configuration Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu 2 Select Modem Setup Menu The Modem Setup Menu appears 3 For modem string enter the modem string This example displays modem string Set to 6145552002 Modem Setup Menu Link being CONFIGURO oc s r A A ewe IR 3 Modem string pee eee 6145552002 Dialing Time out Interval Description This menu item configures the amount of time in seconds that the modem waits before redialing a call when connection is not initially established Menu Item Type Data Link Type Availability Async and AsyncPPP Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 14 2 For02 Dialing time out enter2 and the timeout value The default is 30 This example displays 02 Dialing time out setto 10 gt 2 10 Menu 4 2 11 12 14 01 Modem String 6145553003 02 Dialing time out 5 300 Sl eee eee ee eee ee eee eee eee eee eee 010 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu 2 Selec
50. CCITT Diagnostic Codes e Kentrox Specific Diagnostic Codes Standard Reset Indication Cause Codes Reset indication cause codes apply to reset packets Table A 1 lists the standard reset indication cause codes in hexadecimal format and their meanings Table A 1 Standard Reset Indication Cause Codes Cause Code Description 0x00 Remote DTE originated reset 0x01 Reset out of order 0X03 Reset due to remote procedure error 0X05 Reset due to local procedure error 0X07 Reset due to network congestion 0X09 Reset due to remote DTE operational OXOF Reset due to network operational 0X11 Reset due to incompatible destination Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 System Codes X 25 Cause Codes and Diagnostic Codes Table A 1 Standard Reset Indication Cause Codes Continued Cause Code Description 0X1D Reset due to network out of order Kentrox Specific Reset Indication Cause Codes Reset indication cause codes apply to reset packets and are specific to Kentrox equipment Table A 2 lists the Kentrox specific reset indication cause codes in hexadecimal format and their meanings Table A 2 Kentrox Specific Reset Indication Cause Codes Cause Code Description Ox9B Remote DTE originated reset Standard Clear Indication Cause Codes Clear indication cause codes apply to clear packets Table A 3 lists the standard clear indication cause codes and their meanin
51. Configuration 3 ForPort speed enter the baud rate The default is 9600 This example displays Port speed set to 128000 Quick X 25 Menu D peking A s r a de p be ah a RE Ge a 4 8 a ot tm 02 OLEG Mode s kon eraan Ae oc oh ok hk oe ke ke ae a DTE DCE Port speed Q external clocking 1 ee ee 4 128000 SVC Settings Description SVCs are network connections that are established when transmission is required and are disconnected when the session is complete The SVC settings in the Quick X 25 menu are configured using two menu items e svc low Defines the minimum LCN used for SVCs e svc high Defines the maximum LCN used for SVCs Menu ltem Type Data Link Type Availability X 25 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the X 25 Link Menu 2 Select Quick X 25 Menu The Quick X 25 Menu appears 3 Forsvc Low enter the minimum LCN used for SVCs This number must be higher than the number of PVCs The default is 1 4 Forsvc High enter the maximum LCN used for SVCs This number must be higher than the svc Low value The default is 1 J 6 68 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Quick X 25 Configuration This example displays svc Low set to 250 and svc High Set to 3149 Quick X 25 Menu Lik being Configured s s a p pop wwe deck teh Gee a ee on 02 lntertiace Mod s s e ek ko ee Yb eee ee we eee Re a DTE DCE Port speed O external cloc
52. Description Continued Wrong Header Session ID Displays the number of packets received from the TACACS server that had an invalid session ID Wrong Body Length Displays the number of packets received from the TACACS server that had a body length attribute that did not match the actual length of body received Write Errors Displays the number of errors that occurred when Al296 attempted to send a packet to the TACACS server Read Errors Displays the number of errors that occurred when Al296 attempted to read a packet from the TACACS server Short Header Received Displays the number of incomplete headers that were received when Al296 attempted to read a packet from the TACACS server Short Body Received Displays the number of packets with incomplete bodies that were received when Al296 attempted to read them from the TACACS server Ti med out waiting for response Displays the number of times Al296 timed out while waiting for a response from the TACACS server For information about configuring the time out value refer to command aaa on page 9 6 J 9 08 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands tacacs server tacacs server Description This command enables disables or removes the configuration for specified TACACS servers Command Type shell Formats config tacacs server server_range disable enable default ip server_rang
53. Disconnect when a break character is received Set to OFF gt 3 Menu 4 2 11 12 12 01 Disconnect when DSR off ee ree eee eee eee eee ee ee eee eee ee N A 02 Disconnect when DCD 0fT eee eee eee eee ee eee ee eee ee eee eee ON 03 Disconnect when a break character is received OFF Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the Async Link Menu 2 Select Disconnect Options Menu The Disconnect Options Menu appears 3 For disconnect when DCD is off Select on or off The default is oft 4 For Disconnect when a Break character is received Select On or off The default is On J 6 20 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Disconnect Options Configuration This example displays Disconnect when DCD is off setto on and Disconnect when a Break character is received Set to off for an async link Disconnect Options Menu Lik DEDO COMTI GUE vs a a p a ara a ee Ue Re A 4 Disconnect when DCD is off 1 4 On Of f Disconnect when a Break character is received On Off Disconnect String Description This menu item configures the string the link sends before the link disconnects The following character values apply e lt b gt sends a break signal e lt n gt represents the decimal value of an ASCII character Valid values are O to 255 e text represents the text value in the string e lt p gt
54. Geek Al ew RR a a oe Ub eS 02 Member tai Mode cs eca soe eR a ec eae e ae wa DTE DCE Port speed O external clocking 0 9600 X25 Passive Link Mode Nor mal Passive Extended Passive Link with Clocking 2 Enabled Disabled Frame Level Disconnect Active Passive Ot her Frame Window Size aaa e 4 Interface Mode Description This menu item configures the interface mode as either DTE or DCE DTE is used for a communications device typically a terminal or computer that is the source or destination of signals on a network DCE is used for a device typically the modem that establishes maintains and terminates a session on a network It may also convert signals for transmission 6 63 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Quick X 25 Configuration Menu Item Type Toggle Link Type Availability X 25 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the X 25 Link Menu 2 Select quick X 25 Menu The Quick X 25 Menu appears 3 Forinterface Mode Select DcE or oTE The default is prt This example displays Interface Mode Set tO DTE Quick X 25 Menu Link Deine configured 4 4 a a aca ck ce a oe ww 02 Interface Mode aaa a DTE DCE Number of PVCs Description This menu defines the number of PVCs being configured A PVC is a virtual circuit that is permanently available PVCs differ
55. Kentrox products such as jumpers switches and cable connectors Note messages emphasize or supplement important Note points of the main text Important Important messages provide information that is essential to the completion of a task Y Tip Tip messages provide information that assists users in operating equipment more effectively Table 1 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide About this Document Document Conventions Document Conventions Continued Convention Meaning CAUTION Caution messages indicate that failure to take a specified action could result in loss of data and or harm to the software or hardware WARNING Warning messages indicate that failure to take a specified action could result in physical harm to the user Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide About this Document Cautions and Warnings Cautions and Warnings Electrostatic Discharge Caution CAUTION Kentrox equipment and its peripherals contain electrostatic sensitive components Proper handling shipping and storage precautions must be exercised Ground Caution A You must remove and install cards in a static free environment Wear an antistatic wrist strap that is plugged into the Kentrox equipment so you are grounded at the same point as the equipment Do not remove cards from their antistatic plastic bags until you are ready to install them into the chassis Immedia
56. Menu 2 Select Disconnect Options Menu The Disconnect Options Menu appears 3 ForDisconnect String enter the disconnect string This example displays Disconnect String Set tO lt b gt newString lt 33 gt lt p 15 gt lt b gt Disconnect Options Menu bink being Configured s a aoe aoga taa wow ea aS oa ae de wee 4 3 Disconnect when DCD is off ee On Of f Disconnect when a Break character is received On Off Disconnect inactivity timer 0 327675 0 disabled 367 Inactivity Timer enabled when link receives Call On Of f Inactivity Timer resets on incoming characters from destination On off Disconnect String c s e voaot wo r Bed eed we eee lt b gt newString lt 33 gt lt p 15 gt lt b gt 6 2 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration General Link Properties Configuration General Link Properties Configuration General link properties are configurable using menus accessed directly from the link configuration menu The following configuration items are available e Auto Disable Error Limit e Link Type e Flow Control e Passive Link with Clocking e Hardware Interface Interface Type e Port Data Bits e Interface Mode e Port Parity e Link Description e Port Speed e Link Mode e Port Stop Bits e Link Number e Sync Port Encoding e Link State e Xon Repeat Interval Auto Disable Error Limit Description This menu item disables a link when the rate
57. Negotiation Setto Enabled X 25 Parameters Menu Link beig configured w y woe be eee RP Rae ee mw YR Yk wow ew 03 X25 Facilities Negotiation eeu Enabled Disabled X 25 Timer Settings Description The X 25 timer settings are configured using eight menu items T20 restart ti mer Defines the amount of time allowed for receipt of a restart confirmation or restart indication after a restart request T21 call ti mer Defines the amount of time allowed for receipt of call connected clear indication or incoming after a call request T22 reset timer Defines the amount of time allowed for receipt of a reset confirmation or reset indication after a reset request T23 clear ti mer Defines the amount of time allowed for receipt of a clear confirmation or clear indication after a restart request T24 window ti mer Defines the amount of time allowed for window status transmission T25 data retransmission ti mer Defines the amount of time allowed for T25 data retransmission T26 interrupt ti mer Defines the amount of time allowed for receipt of an interrupt confirmation after an interrupt is sent T28 registration timer Defines the amount of time allowed for receipt of a registration confirmation after a registration request 6 81 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration X 25 Parameters Configuration Menu Item Type Data Link Type Availability X 25 Config
58. Number 1 16 eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee eee 01 02 Link Type Async X25 HDLC SyncPPP AsyncPPP MLT Async 03 Link Description Async link 1 04 Link state Enabled Disabled ee eee eee eee eee Disabled Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the Link Menu 2 ForLink state select Up Or Down The default is Down 6 31 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration General Link Properties Configuration This example displays Link state Set tO Down X 25 Link Menu Link DO CONTI OUrE ss w a 8 EO Ne eh eR we we oe ae od oe NET SRA wi a A ee a a ao E Up Down Link Type Description This menu item defines the type of link as asynchronous X 25 HDLC synchronous PPP asynchronous PPP or MLT Refer to section Al296 Link Types on page 6 2 for more information about link types Menu ltem Type Toggle Link Type Availability Async AsyncPPP HDLC Bridge MLT SyncPPP and X 25 Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 2 Foro02 Link Type enter 2 to select Async X25 HDLC SyncPPP AsyncPPP Or MLT The default is Async This example displays 02 Link Type Set to HDLC gt 2 Menu 4 2 11 12 01 Link number 1 16 01 02 Link Type Async X25 HDLC SyncPPP AsyncPPP MLT HDLC Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Acce
59. Outgoing Connection Timer 2 360S eee eee eee eee ee eee 075 07 Dual Ethernet On Of f eee ee reer eee eee eee ee eee eee ee eee OF F Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide System Configuration General System Properties Configuration Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the System Menu 2 For10 Base T Ethernet Select off or on The default is off when running in switch mode The default is on when running in standalone mode 3 ForbDual Ethernet select off or on The default is off This example displays 10 Base T Ethernet setto ON and Dual Ethernet Set to off System Menu SEEM POMIRE e e a me Ree stn ae ARR RR KARR Bosh wom Bow LEAL 232 Destination Menu Break Sequence 0 o ccccccrree lt c gt lt 33 gt TCP Default Window Size iu 200 512 1024 2048 AE E A E R TA Oe e th es Sa Se Sa On Off Telnet POTE ox oca a rt e e a a aa A FER POTE ee E A a amp IA aca eae A 10 Base TENER isa ow Boh ea we A e ES Of f On Dual Ethernet wos cae Sok Goon ce e BS woe be A off On FTP Port Description This menu item sets the FTP server port number Menu ltem Type Data Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 2 For16 FTP port number enter16 and the FTP server port number Valid values are 1 to 65534 The default is 21 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide System Configuration General System Properties Con
60. Setup 13 1P Over X 25 Subnets 14 1P Static Routes 15 Telnet port number 1 65534 eee eee ee eee eee eee eee eee 00023 16 FTP port number 1 65534 ee ee eee eee ee eee eee eee eee eee 00021 17 Prompt Str ingre NewPrompt Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the System Menu 2 Forsystem Prompt enter the desired system prompt This example displays system Prompt Set tO NewPrompt System Menu System POMPE Ak CAL wae medito A davon me a RA ENE a NewPrompt J 4 10 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide System Configuration General System Properties Configuration TCP Settings Description The TCP settings are configured using two menu items The configurable values are TCP default window size Sets the TCP default window size for Al296 The window size specifies how many bytes Al296 will send to another device or how many bytes another device may send to the Al296 before receiving an acknowledgement Note A small default window size way slow transfers to and from Al296 TCP send ahead Enables or disables Al296 s ability to send a TCP window without requiring an acknowledgment When enabled acknowledgment is not required When disabled acknowledgment is required Menu Item Type Toggle Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access System Menu 4 2 11 2 Foro6 Tcp Default Window Size enter 6 to select 200 512 1024 or 2048 The d
61. Specifies the number of frames the link can send before receiving confirmation that the first frame has been received correctly This means that data can continue to flow in situations where there may be long turn around time lags without stopping to wait for an acknowledgement Menu Item Type Toggle for frame level disconnect Data for frame window size 6 47 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration LAPB Parameters Configuration Link Type Availability MLT and X 25 Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access menu 4 2 11 12 8 for MLT or menu 4 2 11 12 7 for X 25 2 For02 Frame level disconnect enter 2 to select Active Passive Or Other The default iS Active 3 Foro3 Frame Window size enter 3 and the window size The default is 7 This example displays 02 Frame level disconnect setto Passive ANd 03 Frame Window size setto4 gt 3 4 Menu 4 2 11 12 7 01 Interface mode DTE or DCE e rones DCE 02 Frame level disconnect Active Passive Other Passive 03 Frame Window size 1 7 LLL 4 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the MLT or X 25 Link Menu 2 Select LapB Menu Or X 25 LAPB Menu The MLT LAPB Menu or X 25 LAPB Menu appears 3 Forframe Level Disconnect Select Active Passive Or Other The default is Active 4 Forframe Window Size enter the window size The default is 7 This example displays Frame Level Disconnect
62. Support to isolate system faults nlipvcfsm Used primarily by Kentrox Technical Support to isolate system faults tpifsm Used primarily by Kentrox Technical Support to isolate system faults modmuxfsm Used primarily by Kentrox Technical Support to isolate system faults all fsm Used primarily by Kentrox Technical Support to isolate system faults pppfsm Used primarily by Kentrox Technical Support to isolate system faults bootp Enables or disables the logging of bootp attempts so that users can determine if the bootp process is still underway or if it has been completed linkChange Enables or disables the logging of debugging data when the PPP protocol on a link has gone down al Enables or disables the logging of all debugging data on Enables the logging of specified debugging data off Disables the logging of specified debugging data JJ 9 24 Examples This example displays the enabling of all debug data logging Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands debug debug debug debug debug debug debug debug debug debug debug debug debug 296 296 debug a alias x25 is pvcfsm asypvc nlipve tpifsm mod mu x all fsm ppprsm linkCha m tfsm bootp i on is on on is on smis on smis on is on smis on is on is on nge is on is on s on 9 25 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands delete delete Description This command deletes a specified
63. TCP Async Alias name p_address tcp_port_ number Called PVC address Call data ASY ink_number Table 8 16 TCP IP Source With Telnet Breaks Al296 Source Destination Menu item Information TCP X 25 SVC Alias name ip_address tcp_port_number with X 29 break Called The following options are available address e X25 ink number called address e X25 ink_number caller address call_user_data Note ca ed address must be a valid X 121 address Caller s TN Refer to TN on page 8 35 protocol Called PAD Refer to PAD on page 8 30 protocol TCP X 25 PVC Alias name ip_address tcp_port_ number with X 29 break Called PVC address Call data X25 ink_number cn Caller s TN Refer to TN on page 8 35 protocol Called PAD Refer to PAD on page 8 30 protocol 8 27 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Source Destination Protocol Tables Table 8 16 TCP IP Source With Telnet Breaks Al296 Continued Source Destination Menu Item Information TCP Async with Alias name ip_address tcp_ port number async break Called PVC address Call data ASY ink_number Caller s TN Refer to TN on page 8 35 protocol J 8 28 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Protocol Processing Modules Protocol Processing Modules Protocol processing modules are used to process data as it passes though Al296 The follo
64. Tenet PON esnin ici dis 4 12 RADIUS Configuration tii 4 14 Server Settings ill 4 14 Shell FTP OPINAS aras 4 16 TACACS Configuration sese eee eee eee eee 4 18 Sefer Settings indi 4 18 Shell FTP Options stars eee 4 19 SNMP Configuration sees 4 21 A thenticati n e Te 4 21 Community Names sse eee eee eee 4 22 Contact Sae 4 24 Node INOrmatiOn ue etica 4 24 HO 4 25 Static Route Configuration rta iio 4 27 IP Address Settings sse eee eee eee 4 27 TID to Modem Mux Configuration cuarta de 4 28 J roc 2 Table of Contents IN Inactivity TIMEQU TTT 4 28 Mn e 4 29 Port Bit Settings asnicar atodos 4 30 PIDIO ROUTE or E a 4 31 Time Configuration ete 4 33 Daylight Savings TIM 4 33 lA A A eee ae ae ees 4 34 R Tua sal 4 36 Chapter 5 IP Over X 25 Subnet Configuration see eee ee eee eee e 5 1 Configuration OVEMISW see eee eee ele 5 2 local beul cc 5 3 Local IP Address for this Subnet secciones 5 3 Local IP Subnet Mask eee 5 4 Local 4 23 Link Number savia e 5 5 Remote OTIS csi tarda 5 6 Remote IP Address for this Subnet sees eee eee eee eee 5 6 RemolS Fea UPS cut 5 7 Chapter 6 Link Configuration vrs cien 6 1 AI296 Link Rel 6 2 aA lese 6 2 Asynchronous PPP TT 6 2 SIS Ee lt le aL 6 3 ROM ste cee th 2 oo ea deacddonsl dendmcas anaes 6 3 Synchronous PPP TTT 6 3 CS 6 4 BX 25 Configuration conan adi s 6 5 BX 25 Configuration Values Usage sese eee eee eee eatobans 6 5 BX 25 Mod lO ei ieaieeeedigenclut
65. The following parameter is accepted i p_ address Defines the IP address of the destination device in dotted decimal format baseport Defines the baseport number for Al296 d Deletes an entry from the ARP cache table The following parameter is accepted i p_ address Defines the IP address of the destination device in dotted decimal format 5 Adds a permanent entry to the ARP cache for the current session Permanent entries must be in the same subnetwork as the IP address of the destination device The following parameters are accepted p_address Defines the IP address of the destination device in dotted decimal format e mac_address Defines the MAC address of the destination device J a Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands arp Examples This example displays all ARP cache entries 296 arp a Internet Address Ethernet Address Type Life 172 16 52 16 00 00 92 90 F2 D9 temp 5 mins 172 16 2 9 00 40 72 00 7F 96 temp 2 mins 296 Column Description Internet Address Displays the IP address of the destination device Ethernet Address Displays the MAC address of the destination device Type Displays the type of ARP cache entry as per m Or temp Type temp specifies that the entry is temporary and will be deleted when the time interval specified in the Life column expires Type perm specifies that the entry was entered by the user with the s option This entry will not
66. TlInK eee eee 0001 03 LCN Hi gh e e eee eee eee ee eee eee ee eee ee ee eee eee eee ee eee 0001 04 RESET Timer Interval Seconds e nor 00000 20 Save the changes made 21 Exit this menu with no changes Enter tem number and optional value then push lt CR gt key gt 3 For01 pvc Type enter 1 to selectPassive Active Of Connect on activity The default iS Passive 4 Foro2 LCN Low enter2 and the minimum LCN value Valid values are 1 to 1024 The default is 1 Note An asterisk configures all LCNs for the link with values defined in menu item 4 2 1114 12 9 1 5 Foro3 LCN High enter 3 and the maximum LCN value Valid values are 1 to 1024 The default is 1 6 Foro4 RESET Timer Interval enter 4 and the reset timer interval value The timer type range and default settings depend on the PVC type Refer to Table 6 1 for PVC types timer types ranges and defaults Table 6 1 PVC and Timer Type PVC Type Timer Type Range Default Active Call Timer 30 to 600 s 30s Connect on Activity Inactivity Timer 1 to 600s 1s J 6 88 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Virtual Circuit Configuration Table 6 1 PVC and Timer Type Continued PVC Type Timer Type Range Default Passive Reset Timer Os Os This example displays 01 PVC Type Set to Connect e 02 LCN Low set tos e 03 LCN High Setto15 04 I
67. Window Size eu 200 512 1024 2048 MEG PE A E A E E TA Ok Se baa es Oe SA TR Sa On Off Telnet POTE a Gs Boke aia e a a a a 23 E as th th ode te Be fee ce at ER ak eens a 26 IP Settings Description The IP settings are configurable using five menu items in the CLC menu or via a shell command on Al296 The configurable values are e P address e P address range e P subnet mask e Primary IP router address e Secondary IP router address Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide System Configuration General System Properties Configuration Menu Item Types Data Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 2 Foro1 iP Address enter 1 and the IP address for Al296 The default is 000 000 000 000 3 Foro2 IP Address Range enter 2 and the number of the IP addresses to be assigned to Al296 The valid range is 1 to 255 4 For03 IP Subnet Mask enter 3 and the IP subnet mask for Al296 The default is 255 255 255 254 5 Foro4 Primary IP Router Address enter4 and the IP address of the primary router for Al296 The default is 000 000 000 000 6 Foros Secondary IP Router Address enter 5 and the IP address of the secondary router for Al296 The default is 000 000 000 000 This example displays e 01 IP Address Set to 10 38 49 12 e 02 IP Address Range Set to 3 e 03 IP Subnet Mask Set to 255 255 000 000 04 Primary IP Router Address Set tO 010 038 000 001 05 IP Router A
68. amp Time Message 1 0 06 01 00 00 Link 1 up 2 0 06 01 00 00 Link 2 down 3 0 06 01 00 00 Link 3 down 4 0 06 01 00 00 Link 4 down 5 0 06 01 00 00 Link 5 down 6 0 06 01 00 00 Link 6 down 7 0 06 01 00 00 Link 7 down 8 0 06 01 00 00 Link 8 down 9 0 06 01 00 00 Link 9 down 10 0 06 01 00 00 Link 10 down 11 0 06 01 00 00 Link 11 down 12 0 06 01 00 00 Link 12 down 13 0 06 01 00 00 Link 13 down 14 0 06 01 00 00 Link 14 down 15 0 06 01 00 00 Link 15 down 16 0 06 01 00 00 Link 16 down links alarm group severity 0 296 This example displays alarms for links 5 8 in group inks 296Jalarm links 5 8 Num Sev Date amp Time Message 06 01 00 00 Link 5 down 06 01 00 00 Link 6 down 06 01 00 00 Link 7 down 06 01 00 00 Link 8 down ouou K OOO links alarm group severity 0 296 This example displays all alarms by severity level 296 alarm sev Alarm Group Num Sev Date Time Message inks 4 06 13 14 40 Link 1 is enabled but has not come up inks 5 4 06 13 14 40 Link 5 is enabled but has not come up inks 1 4 06 13 14 40 Link 10 is enabled but has not come up inks 12 4 06 13 14 40 Link 12 is enabled but has not come up general 1 6 06 13 14 40 Unable to find auto ID name of 222 board masked 296 J 24 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands alarm This example displays all alarms that have a severity level between 4 and7 296 alarm sev 4 7 Ala
69. before an inactive call is dropped or disconnected 6 86 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Virtual Circuit Configuration O Reset timer interval Defines the time interval in seconds at which a passive PVC can remain inactive before Al296 resets it Since passive PVCs do not get reset based on a timer the only configurable value for this setting is 0 The reset timer interval is only configurable in the Al296 menu system Menu Item Type Toggle for PVC type Data for LCN low LCN high and the timer interval Link Type Availability X 25 Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 9 2 This menu displays a summary of all the configured PVCs for an X 25 link on Al296 gt 2 Menu 4 2 11 12 9 2 PVC Type LCN Range Cal Tmr Reset T mr nAct Tmr 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 Display first page 18 Next Page 19 Delete entry 20 Save the changes made 21 Exit this menu with no changes Enter item number and optional value then push lt CR gt key gt 6 87 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Virtual Circuit Configuration 2 Enter a value 02 through 15 associated with the PVC to be configured Menu 4 2 11 12 9 2 1 the PVC Edit Menu appears gt 3 Menu 4 2 11 12 9 2 1 01 PVC Type Passive Active Connect on activity Passive 02 LCN Low for all LCNs for the
70. can also be used to see the current trace level The default trace level is 3 Command Types shell and winslc Formats For the Al296 system command trace evel For the winslc command winslc baseport trace evel Parameters baseport Defines the baseport number for Al296 level Defines the minimum trace level on the log port For example if eve is set to 2 all X 25 events assigned a priority of 2 or higher will appear on the log port The valid range for this argument is 1 to 5 The default level is 3 Note If you enter this command without a level the current trace level number appears Table 9 3 shows the priority assigned to each trace level Table 9 3 Trace Priority Levels Priority Level X25_TRACE 1 X25 NORMAL 2 X25 MINOR 3 default X25_MAJOR 4 X25_FATAL 5 J om2 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands trace Examples This example displays the configuration of trace 2 296 trace 2 X 25 Trace Level 2 296 9 113 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands traceroute traceroute Description This command diagnoses connectivity problems between Al296 and other hosts Command Type shell Formats traceroute p address Parameters ip_address Defines the IP address of the destination device in dotted decimal format Examples This example displays the traceroute to IP address 10 40 57 10
71. connect state eee ee ee eee eee eee eee eee ee eee ON 02 DTR disconnect state On Off Toggle eee eee errr ee eee OFF 03 RTS connect state On Off Flow Control FLOW CONTROL 04 RTS disconnect state On Off Toggle lt nooo TOGGLE Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu 2 SelectRTS DTR Lead Control Options Menu The RTS DTR Lead Control Options Menu appears 3 Forrts connect state Select On Off OF Fl owContro The default is on 4 FOrRTS disconnect state Select On off Or Toggle The default is off 6 73 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration RTS DTR Lead Control Configuration This example displays RTS connect state Set TO FI owControl ANd RTS disconnect state Set tO Toggle RTS DTR Control Options Menu Link DEMO configured se sos p p he ee lera e oe a A 3 DER Coiinect STETE e sasae e or woe amp a On Loff DTR disconnect state a a a a a o On off Toggle RTS connect state aa On Of f Fl owControl RTS disconnect state a a a On Of f Toggle J 6 74 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration X 25 Parameters Configuration X 25 Parameters Configuration The following settings are available for X 25 parameter configuration e Maximum Packet Size e Packet Window Size e Protocol Version e X 25 Coun
72. example displays the X 25 logical channel information for link 3 and circuit 1 296 xve 3 1 VC state DataTransfer link state L_connected restarts 1 1 0 0 NSUat 1 296 9 123 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands xve J 9 124 KENT Al296 System Codes This appendix provides information about Al296 system codes Guide to this Appendix X 25 Cause Codes and Diagnostic Codes Crash Codes Kentrox Technical Support a 1 fj Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 System Codes X 25 Cause Codes and Diagnostic Codes X 25 Cause Codes and Diagnostic Codes X 25 cause codes indicate events that triggered X 25 packets Possible values for the cause codes can vary depending on the type of packet CLEAR REQUEST REGISTRATION CONFIRMATION RESET REQUEST or RESTART X 25 diagnostic codes provide additional tips about the nature of a specific problem Unlike cause codes diagnostic codes do not vary depending on the type of packet Note Diagnostic codes can be produced by any equipment that handles virtual circuits and can propagate through all equipment that handles virtual circuits Because of this diagnostic codes may not indicate a problem with Al296 The following X 25 cause codes and diagnostic codes are available e Standard Reset Indication Cause Codes e Kentrox Specific Reset Indication Cause Codes e Standard Clear Indication Cause Codes e Standard ISO Diagnostic Codes e
73. expire and can be removed using the d delete option Note Resetting Al296 clears both permanent and temporary entries Life Displays the time interval for which the temporary entry will remain in the ARP cache This example displays an ARP cache entry with IP address 10 40 5 20 296 arp a 10 40 5 20 Internet Address Ethernet Address Type Life 10 40 5 20 00 01 02 EE A8 30 temp 4 mins 296 This example displays the configuration of an ARP cache entry with IP address 10 40 53 2 and MAC address 08 00 09 4a c5 54 296 arp s 10 40 53 2 08 00 09 4a c5 5a 10 40 53 2 mapped to Ethernet address 08 00 09 4A C5 5A 296 9 17 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands arp This example displays the deletion of an ARP cache entry with IP address 10 40 53 2 296 arp d 10 40 53 2 Mapping for 10 40 53 2 deleted 296 9 18 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands break break Description This command terminates an asynchronous or shell connection Use command diag tconn on page 9 49 not command who on page 9 122 when referencing connections and connection ID numbers Note This command only works for calls connected to the shell CAUTION This command operates without regard to current activity on the serial port Command Types shell and winslc Formats For the shell command break ink_number connection_origi
74. file name is specified the file will have the same name as the source file Note The destination file name cannot contain spaces or special characters put Uploads a file to the TFTP server The following parameters are accepted e address Defines the IP address of the TFTP server to which the file upload will occur e source_filename Defines the file to upload to the TFTP server Note The source file name cannot contain spaces or special characters e dest filename Defines the name of the source file after it has been uploaded to the server If no destination file name is specified the file will have the same name as the source file Note The destination file name cannot contain spaces or special characters Examples This example displays the upload of file pri mary cnf to file secondary cnf on TFTP server 10 34 6 13 296 tftp put 10 34 6 13 primary cnf secondary cnf File Uploaded successfully 296 JJ 9 106 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands tftp This example displays the download of file secondary cnf to file pri mary cnf from TFTP server 10 34 6 13 296 tftp get 10 34 6 13 secondary cnf primary cnf Attempting to Download the file secondary c nT File Downloaded successfully 296 9 107 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands tftpboot tftpboot Description This command displays the BOOTP TFTP status or aborts attempts
75. file that resides on Al296 Command Type shell Formats delete filename Parameters filename Defines the name of the file to delete Examples This example displays the deletion of file og txt 296 delete log txt Are you sure you want to delete log txt y n y log txt deleted 296 J 9 26 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands diag conn diag conn Description This command displays a list of enabled links along with connection information for each link Data can be displayed continuously one page at a time or sent to the screen one time only for all connections The default mode is a continuous display Command Type shell Formats di ag conn Examples This example displays existing connections across Al296 CONNECTIONS Mode Continuous Search Inactive 103 ASY 1 1 Idle 113 TCP 172 16 2 9 1032 lt Data Transfer gt SHELL Enter S kip l nternal A Il M ore D etail F ind P revPg N extPg or Q uit Note For explanations of the states shown such as dle and data transfer refer to section pvclist on page 9 80 Display Item Description S kip This option bypasses connections It gives a prompt for the number of connections to skip nternal This option toggles between nternal and H ide Int 1 nternal displays all the internal loopback connections along with other connections A I This option displays all connections without page brea
76. from SVCs in that an SVC must be reestablished each time data is to be sent Once the data has been sent the SVC disappears PVCs are more efficient for connections between hosts that communicate frequently Menu Item Type Data Link Type Availability X 25 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the X 25 Link Menu 2 Select Quick X 25 Menu The Quick X 25 Menu appears 3 ForNumber of pvcs enter the number of PVCs you want to configure The default is 0 J 6 64 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Quick X 25 Configuration This example displays Number of PVC setto 12 Quick X 25 Menu Lik being Configured s s a p pop p ww Gee deck teh Gee a ee Aon 03 Arer aCe MOE ine wk ek Roo Gy A ee o sin Gh tke A DTE DCE Port speed O external clocking 0 0 0 0 a 4800 X25 Passive Link Mode Nor mal Passive Extended Passive Link with Clocking 0 0 Enabled Disabled Frame Level Disconnect Active Passive Ot her Eae NTH 0 SIZE i Seca Be GR Gy dp de th OP a ae A as el Max Parket SIZE a de ce cee ce yo A Oe OO ew eS 128 256 512 Packet Window Size SG Oe Ae ee ip ok tock hh we Ue R eo ee we a ALD AS Local Added Se K KR lee ga gle Bee ay ae Se RO ho Gla AA As Nu mbier Of PVCS e e o a ge de ee th Rg We ka Sa ee we ee TD Packet Settings Description Packet settings are configured using two menu items e
77. in the table would be routed to ink 2 and an incoming X 25 SVC call from ne2 that does not match an alias in the table would be routed to to link 4 Important The link to link call alias must be at the end of the alias list If the link to link alias is above an actual destination alias an X 25 SVC call will be processed by the default link to link alias NE 1 X 25 Packet Network Link to Link Calls NE 2 A EEE E EENEN NE 3 B ann E BEES NE 4 Al296 Figure 8 6 Link to Link Routing Example 8 53 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Alias Configuration Examples This example displays Al296 configured to listen for all SVC calls on links 1 and 3 and route those calls to links 2 and 4 as displayed in Figure 8 6 on page 8 53 Alias Edit Menu A aS NAME i se ce C ieee lok a tee TR DOD ae eh bh epee ey R X25 1 SVC DESTIMACIDA e cay cms rn dant Stab taken ehh weve de teal Ae dh ib Gal ler AUTOS a avec Goan a Beda ewe ea alee Ree Keane Rad Cal lE SAO PCS Sic ae fee pe REEE E KIE A EEEE EAEE at an dnt sane ames Ns oh talaga ceo se Ta a AI X25LL 2 Ca Daba K R A p EREE R a Ge wh RN hte ci Das Cal er Se PROTO CO a sane eb Gordan deck een monty aia wo ted drab is Called PROTOCOL dale tw Gach dade ta wii ee eee hea waa wa a a e aa APPLECAELOA SERINO y i Wa
78. log txt Configuration has changed 06 20 11 060600 Sev F Msg User pubs from 10 40 5 20 1436 has exited the shell 06 20 20 060600 Sev F Msg User pubs from 10 40 5 20 1436 has entered the shell 06 21 01 060600 Sev 0 Msg Configuration has changed 06 21 04 060600 Sev 0 Msg Configuration has changed 06 21 04 060600 Sev F Msg User pubs from 10 40 5 20 1436 has exited the shell 06 21 07 060600 Sev F Msg User pubs from 10 40 5 20 1436 has logged out of the Destination Menu 04 40 49 060700 Sev F Msg User pubs from 10 40 5 20 2729 has logged into the Destination Menu 04 40 51 060700 Sev F Msg User pubs from 10 40 5 20 2729 has entered the shell Press Space for more or q to quit J 9 68 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands pad Description This command calls an X 25 PAD host It is used with the X 3 X 28 and X 29 protocols Used with a link number it calls the X 25 device connected to that link Without parameters it enters the command mode Command Types shell Formats pad Note There are several parameters available with this command See the list below Parameters break Sends a break signal to host breakaction Sets a breakaction breakin Sets a PAD recall character call host Sets up a connection to the named host clear Closes the current connection echo Enables disables terminal echo e mas k Sets the terminal echo mask to n flow Enables disables
79. ltem Type Data Link Type Availability X 25 Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 8 2 Foro3 Packet window size enter 3 and the window size The default is 2 Note To access the menu on a Soneplex NE set Packet window size tol This example displays 03 Packet window size Set to 006 gt 3 6 Menu 4 2 11 12 8 01 X25 Facilities negntlatl0n lt e rr ON 02 Max packet size 128 256 512 e e eee eee ee eee eee ee eee 512 03 Packet window size 1 7 2 2 22 ee ee eee ee ee eee eee ee eee eee ee eee 006 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the X 25 Link Menu 2 Select x 25 Parameters Menu The X 25 Parameters Menu appears 3 ForPacket Window Size enter the value The default is 2 Note To access the menu on a Soneplex NE set Packet window size tol J 6 76 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration X 25 Parameters Configuration This example displays Packet Window Size setto 6 X 25 Parameters Menu Link being configured a esearo aoco rosos soo bioi boa aaou 03 X25 Facilities Negotiation 2 Enabled Disabled Max Packet SIZE y teoa Tacu m mam a ee ke wae o 128 256 512 Packet Window Size s coa a rosmar aaoo dona ae aaa a a a ee H Protocol Version Description This menu item defines the protocol version year for the current link Menu Item Type Toggle Link Type Availabil
80. mode Menu Item Types Toggle for the passive link down state Data for the passive link stay inactive timer andthe passive link standby mode timer Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 2 Foro9 Bring passive link down when all calls have cleared enter 9 to select on or orF The default is or F 3 For10 Passive link Stay Inactive timer enter 10 and a value in seconds for the passive link stay inactive timer The minimum value is 25 seconds and the default is 60 seconds 4 Foril Passive link Standby Mode timer enter 11 and a value in seconds for the passive link standby mode timer The minimum value is 5 seconds and the default is 25 seconds Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide System Configuration General System Properties Configuration This example displays 09 Bring passive link down when all calls have cleared Set to ON e 10 Passive link Stay Inactive timer Set to 50 e 11 Passive link Standby Mode timer setto 20 gt 11 20 Menu 4 2 11 pg 1 01 IP Address 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 254 010 040 057 015 02 IP Address Range 1 255 eee eee eee ee eee ee eee eee eee ee eee eee 001 03 IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 1 255 255 255 254 255 255 000 000 04 Primary IP Router Address 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 254 010 040 000 001 05 Secondary IP Router Address 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 254 000 000 000 000 0O6 TCP Default Window Size 200
81. of errors received on that link exceeds a user specified threshold This prevents a bad link or cable from streaming enough errors to lock up or crash Al296 Menu Item Type Data Link Type Availability Async AsyncPPP HDLC Bridge MLT SyncPPP and X 25 Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 2 Forauto Disable Error Limit enter the associated item number a comma and the error limit value For example 9 25000 The default is 0 6 23 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration General Link Properties Configuration This MLT link example displays 09 Auto Disable Error Limit set to 25000 gt 9 25000 Menu 4 2 11 12 01 Link number 11 16 ee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee ee 01 02 Link Type Async X25 HDLC SyncPPP AsyncPPP MLT MLT 03 Link Des tT pt 0n lt rrrrrrrrrrn c Async link 1 04 Link state Enabled Disabled eee eee ee eee Enabled 05 Port speed 0 128000 bps 0 is external clocking 009600 06 Hardware Interface RS232 RS530 V 35 ee eee eee ee eee ee eee RS 232 07 Sync Port Encoding NRZ NRZI 222 eee eee ee eee ee eee eee ee ee eee ee NRZ 08 LAPB Parameters 09 Auto Disable Error Limit 0 1000000 0025000 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the Link Menu 2 Select auto Disable Menu The Li
82. or X 25 LAPB Menu appears 3 Forti Ack Timer enter the timer value The default is 3000 4 Fort2 Ack Delay Timer enter the timer value The default is 4000 5 Fort4 dle Timer enter the timer value The default is 25000 This example displays T1 Ack Timer Set to 19000 12 Ack Delay Timer Set to 20000 T4 Idle Timer Set to 50000 MLT LAPB Menu Link being configured 2 2 o 03 Frame Level Disconnect aa Active Passive Other Brame Window SIZE on a ck ce we ee RR a e ee a a we eo we ad N2 Retry Counter s s a m oe a aodai Wo a Waa ee ee ee ww a E50 TE ACK TEMER am ea a a Ge e ae Fa K Z 19121 T2 ACK Delay Timer e o se ek Boar a eee ae RR a o n 2100000 T4 Idle Timer AR e eA See Bh a ae wie a ee wwe a 151911 N2 Retry Counter Description This menu item defines the maximum number of accepted retransmissions for unacknowledged frames J 6 50 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration LAPB Parameters Configuration Menu Item Type Data Link Type Availability MLT and X 25 Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access menu 4 2 11 12 7 for MLT or menu 4 2 11 12 8 for X 25 2 For04 N2 retry count enter 4 and the retry count The default is 20 This example displays 04 N2 retry count setto 150 4 150 Menu 1 7 11 172 8 01 Interface mode DTE or DCE e eee ee ee eee ee ee eee eee eee ee DCE 02 Frame level disconnect Active Passive Othe
83. port during configuration Electrical Interfaces RS 232 RS 530 and V 35 selectable per port during configuration Installation Requires one slot in an Al chassis can be hot swapped Current Draw 4 2 Aat 5 VDC maximum Compliance For use with Al UL Listed Alswitch Series Chassis Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Product Description Individual Port Access Individual Port Access Individual ports are accessed by using a cable assembly or a distribution panel Al296 uses the following components to derive ports e CAB257 Cable e DP196 Distribution Panel CAB257 Cable The CAB257 cable has a multi connector end that provides four DB 25 connectors Four CAB257 cables are needed to derive all 16 ports DP 196 Distribution Panel The DP196 distribution panel provides the physical interface for Al296 with sixteen DB 25 connectors The distribution panel is available in two sizes for 19 inch or 23 inch rack installations Figure 1 2 displays the distribution panel and Table 1 2 lists the specifications cE 0 EEE o E JE 5 e Pk R Figure 1 2 DP196 19 23 Distribution Panel Table 1 2 DP196 19 23 Specifications Description Specification Mounting DP196 19 Mounts to a 19 inch rack DP196 23 Mounts to a 23 inch rack 1 O Ports Sixteen DB 25 connectors
84. single or double quotes or integers between positive and negative 2 147 483 647 All strings equal zero Strings cannot be used in mathematical functions Variables Several variables are recognized by macros Refer to Table 8 18 for more information Note Variables are not case sensitive Table 8 18 Macro Variables Variable Value c CUD Specifies a call user data variable A CALLED Specifies a called address variable B CALLER Specifies a caller s address variable Wildcard Symbols Macros have two available wildcard symbols e matches any single character e matches zero or more characters Note Alias names that use wildcards are not really macros Wildcards are not processed in alias names that start with 8 39 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Alias Macros Operators Operators are used for calculation of mathematical expressions in alias macros Al296 evaluates expressions from left to right in order of precedence as shown in Table 8 19 To change the order of precedence a programmer may enclose a portion of an expression in parentheses to calculate that portion first 443 2 Specifies an equation that equals 10 4 3 2 Specifies an equation that equals 14 Al296 evaluates both regular and boolean logic operators Refer to Table 8 19 fora list of all available operators in order of precedence
85. source address MAC IP or TCP UDP for the filter being created mac_address Defines the MAC address to use for either the source or destination of the filter being created dst Defines the destination address MAC IP or TCP UDP for the filter being created ip_address Defines the IP address to use for either the source or destination of the filter being created ip_address port_number Defines the IP address and the TCP UDP port number for either the source or destination of the filter being created 9 31 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands diag eth port_number Defines the TCP UDP port number regardless of the MAC IP address settings protocol Adds or deletes a specific protocol filter Available protocol filters are e ip e icp e udp e icmp e arp e osi al Deletes all the filters or adds a filter to show all Ethernet traffic list Lists all the filters in the system Examples This example displays the configuration of diagnostic interpretation level medi um for the Ethernet diagnostic session display 296 diag eth interpret medium Interpretation is now set to MEDI UM This example displays the enabling and disabling of the timestamp display 296 diag eth timestamp Timestamps will now be displayed timestamp Timestamps will no longer be displayed This example displays the enabling and disabling of promiscuous mode 296 diag eth promis
86. terminal flow control forward Sets data forwarding conditions help Displays help information hosts Lists all the available hosts int Sends an interrupt packet Ifinsert Sets line feed insertion action loghost Displays X 29 messages message Enables the message mode of operation native Enables the native mode of operation 9 69 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands pad pagewait Sets page wait to n lines param Displays current X 3 parameters par Displays specified X 3 parameters printer Defines terminal as the hardcopy device profile Sets the terminal profile quit Exits the PAD session reset Resets the current call rpar Displays specified remote X 3 parameters rset Sets and displays specified remote X 3 parameters set Sets specified X 3 parameters set Sets and displays specified X 3 parameters status Lists the status of the connection transparent Enables the transparent mode of operation vdu Defines the terminal as a display device width Sets the terminal width to n characters Examples This example displays the enabling of flow control for PAD 296 pad PAD flow Flow ON PAD This example displays the setting of the PAD profile 296 pad PAD profile V5 PAD J 9 70 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands panic panic Description This command forces Al296 to crash dump and halt Command Type winslc Fo
87. the Al198 Menu System 1 Log into Al198 2 At the prompt type menu The main menu appears 3 To access Menu 08 Configure the alias translation table enter 8 Menu 8 appears gt 8 Menu 8 01 Alias name RR KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK 02 Simple alias translation 03 Destination 04 Called address 05 This alias is visible in the destination MenU rro NO 06 Link number is 1 16 07 Caller s address 08 Ca data 09 App string 10 Called protoco 11 Caller s protocol 12 Alternate routing alias 14 Test macros 15 Show entire alias 16 Show the first entry in the alias translation table 17 Show the previous entry in the alias translation table 18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table 19 Delete the above alias translation entry 20 Save the changes made 20b to the beginning 20e to the end 21 Exit this menu with no changes Enter tem number and optional value then push lt CR gt key gt 4 Foro1 Alias name enter1 followed by the alias name for the incoming source call Al198 translates the alias name into a call of the type defined in the remaining alias menu items 8 5 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Call Routing Note The alias name may include leading trailing or embedded wildcard matching characters You may enter an asterisk which replaces z
88. the IRB toa remote Al296 The remote Al296 sends remote X 25 calls directly to its attached network elements J 1 18 KENT Using the Al198 Menu System This chapter provides information on starting ending and navigating through an Al198 menu system session Guide to this Chapter Accessing the Menu System Navigating the Menu System Exiting the Menu System Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Using the Al198 Menu System Accessing the Menu System Accessing the Menu System To access the Al198 menu system 1 Log into Al198 2 Atthe prompt enter menu The Main Menu appears gt menu Main Menu 01 Configure options affecting the system as a whole 02 Create delete or modify a destination name 03 Display all destination names 04 Configure cards 05 Set or remove connection restrictions based on port numbers 06 Display all connection restrictions 07 Configure slot density 08 Configure the alias translation table 09 Display the list of alias translation entries 10 Configure the BOOTP table 21 Exit the configuration menu system Enter item number and optional value then push lt CR gt key gt En Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Using the Al198 Menu System Navigating the Menu System Navigating the Menu System Menu Numbering Structure All menus accessed from the Main Menu are identified with a numerical reference at the top right corner of the menu screen
89. to TCP IP calls and routes them over the IRB to a remote Al296 Routing is based on the routing aliases configured in Al198 e The remote Al296 sends asynchronous calls to the attached asynchronous NEs 1 15 fj Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Product Description Typical Applications X 25 to TCP IP Application Figure 1 8 illustrates a common X 25 to TCP IP application X 25 network elements are connected to a router network using a TCP IP LAN Alswitch UN IRB fore wy i 2 una hor A ER Operating we X 25 NE 0 Support System gt a YO y ff X 25 NE i a y a lises A CAMA Al296 X 25 NE gt A EST lt Alswitch a ee a TCP IP X 25 Figure 1 8 X 25 to TCP IP Application Figure 1 8 illustrates the following events The OSS sends X 25 calls to Alswitch Alswitch converts X 25 calls to TCP IP calls and sends them over the router network The router network carries the TCP IP calls to Alfocus Alfocus sends the TCP IP calls over the IRB to Al296 Based on the Al198 routing alias Al296 converts the TCP IP calls to X 25 calls Al296 sends X 25 calls to the attached X 25 NEs Like other Alswitch line cards Al296 terminates X 25 connections and extracts the data from them Unlike other line cards Al296 can convert the X 25 connections to TCP IP connections across the IRB The ultimate destination for th
90. to contact the BOOTP server The Al296 card attempts to contact a BOOTP server if certain conditions are met These conditions are e The card is in standalone mode AND e The card does not have an IP address set or no BOOT INI file exists Attempts to contact the BOOTP server continue until a valid reply is received or until the IP address gets set by the user in another manner such as with an ip init shell command Note If the conditions are initially met then the card will not attempt to contact the BOOTP server When Al296 receives the necessary information from the BOOTP server it attempts to retrieve a configuration file from the TFTP server The TFTP server information is contained in the response from the BOOTP server Command Type shell Formats tftpboot Examples This example displays the result of a card booting without a BOOTP TFTP session 296 tftpboot Usage tftpboot abort Displays BOOTP TFTP status or aborts retry attempts BOOTP TFTP did not run this session 296 JJ 9 108 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands tftpboot This example displays the result of a card booting when no BOOTP or TFTP server is on the net 296 Usage 296 296 tf Displays Waiting tf BOOTP TFT pboot tpboot abort BOOTP TFTP status or aborts retry attempts or a response fromthe BOOTP server pboot abort P retry attempts will be aborted
91. to send IAC 255 ECHO 1 when the connection is initiated Initiates WILL SGA Module Properties Some modules are only used for one specific purpose For example the PKT module buffers all received data until a specified character is received in that data The TN module looks for Telnet commands embedded in the data AEP AEPN PAD PKT and TN can be combined to allow break propagation between the following protocols e X 25 with X 29 break to asynchronous break e X 25 with X 29 break to Telnet break e Asynchronous break to X 25 with X 29 break e Asynchronous break to Telnet break e Telnet break to X 25 with X 29 break e Telnet break to asynchronous break e X 29 break propagation across TCP connections between two Al296 cards e Asynchronous break propagation across TCP connections between two Al296 cards e Response to an indication of X 29 break Note For more information on this refer to Source Destination Protocol Tables on page 8 12 Module Arguments Some modules use protocol arguments to place restrictions on functionality For example the PKT module uses arguments to specify the characters to filter out of data and the characters to packetize in data J 8 36 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Protocol Processing Modules Use the following guidelines when entering arguments e Enter values separated by a comma in octal base 8 hexadecimal base 16 or d
92. to zero the option is turned off ld Sets the idle packetizing timer to hundredths of a second It packetizes after d hundredths of a second after not receiving any new characters Pd d d Sets the packetizing characters to the numbers entered in each d option Specify up to 16 characters Fd d d Sets the filter characters to the numbers entered in each d option Specify up to 16 characters It is possible to packetize on a filtered character U Prevents the passing of breaks upstream D Prevents the passing of breaks downstream S Packetizes on a specific sequence of characters Enter up to 16 characters The packet module accepts only one 5 parameter E Activates local echo back to the original Telnet session It behaves like an X 25 when X 3 parameter 3 is setto 1 Examples PKT T6 Provides packetizing and sets the packetizing timer to 06 seconds J 8 22 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Protocol Processing Modules PKT POxD 0x3B Provides packetizing and sets the packetizing characters to carriage return and semi colon PKT F10 127 Provides packetizing and filters out the characters for line feed and delete PKT U Provides packetizing but prevents breaks from being propagated upstream PKT 110 P0x0D D Provides packetizing on carriage returns for 10 seconds of idle time and prevents breaks from being propagated downstream PKT 513 10 Provides packet
93. way SVC low Setto75 O 06 Two way SVC high setto 85 e 07 Outgoing only SVC low Set to 100 e 08 Outgoing only SVC high setto 150 gt 8 150 Menu 1 7 11 12 9 01 Number of PVCs 0 10241 eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 0005 02 PVC configuration 03 Incoming only SVC low 0 4095 e eee ee ee eee eee ee ee eee eee 0008 04 Incoming only SVC high 0 40851 eee ee eee eee eee eee ee eee 0064 05 Two way SVC low 0 4095 ee eee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 0075 06 Two way SVC high 0 4095 2 eee tere eee eee te eee eee eee 0085 07 Outgoing only SVC low 0 4095 ee eee ee eee ee eee eee ee eee eee 0100 08 Outgoing only SVC high 0 4095 eee eee eee ee eee eee 0150 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the X 25 Link Menu 2 Select Quick X 25 Menu The Quick X 25 Menu appears 3 Forsvc Low enter a minimum SVC value that is higher than the number of PVCs The default is 1 4 Forsvc High enter a maximum SVC value that is higher than the minimum SVC value The default is 1 This example displays svc Low set to10 and svc High set to 15 Quick X 25 Menu LAK being Configured a a oe mot ty Rote a ek ee a a Ge oe Se oe A A Ae a 03 nterface Mode lt lt z A AA wae a ca amp EER R AOS AA Pw a DTE DCE Port speed O external clocking a a a 4800 X25 Passive Link Mode
94. with a single alias Generally this feature is used to route an X 25 connection across two Al296 A1232 Alscout cards using TCP IP SNMP Manageability Al296 supports configuration using SNMP as well as monitoring SNMP traps are generated by Al296 and are sent to all the management stations that exist in the trap table Standalone Configuration Al296 operates as a standalone card when it is installed in the Alswitch series 110 chassis Standalone mode lets Al296 function without dependence on Al198 for configuration and management Refer to Appendix B Standalone Mode and Switch Mode for more details Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Product Description Features System Diagnostics Al296 lets users view diagnostic data on existing connections and internal information about serial links For more information about viewing system diagnostics refer to sections e diag conn on page 9 27 e diag eth on page 9 29 e diag info on page 9 37 e diag line on page 9 46 e diag tconn on page 9 49 TID Multiplexing TID multiplexing allows a single call from a legacy X 25 OSS to fan out into multiple calls to various NEs The initiating call may be X 25 asynchronous or TCP Refer to Chapter 7 TID Multiplexing for more details Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Product Description Al296 Hardware Components Al296 Hardware Components Al296 has four high density connectors that provide 16 asynchronous HDLC Bridge PPP or X 25 po
95. 000000 LR 00000000 PVR 00500000 Stack dump 200082c0 9421 20008200 7c7f 200082e0 56d6 200082f0 7d96 20008300 7fe3 20008310 2c0a 20008320 576c 296 SSR0 00000000 XER 00000000 PSOS1 00000000 SSR1 00000000 CTR 00000000 PSOS2 00000000 ffc8 7c08 02a6 beal 000c 9001 003c 1b78 3ae0 0000 4800 1419 7c76 1b78 001e 3b16 3e82 a338 0000 572c 043e 6214 3bcc 2004 82be 0000 7ebd ab78 fb78 4801 76bd 7c7c 1b78 578a 043e 0100 4081 0008 3b80 0100 3b60 0000 043e 578b 043e 7c0c 5800 4080 001c PSOS3 00000000 Caller see LR J 9 52 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands help help Description This command lists all available system commands or information for a specific command Command Types shell and winslc Formats For the shell command help command For the winslc command winslc baseport help command Parameters baseport Defines the baseport number for Al296 command Defines the name of the command for which specific information will be displayed Examples This example displays a list of all available commands 296 help The following commands are available ftplogin diag tconn more staslc telnetlogin dir pad syncflash alarm exit passwd tal arp head ping tcpoutconn break help pppstatus tftp bridge id profile tftpboot creset ip pvcedit trace debug link pvclist type delete linkstat rese useradd diag conn log shol og userde diag eth logout show u
96. 033 03 Remote IP Address e eee eee ree eee ee eee eee ee eee eee 106 046 092 004 04 Subnet Mask o 255 255 255 000 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the AsyncPPP or SyncPPP Link Menu 2 Select ppp Configuration Menu The PPP Configuration Menu appears 3 Forlocal IP address enter the IP address Entering 0 0 0 0 specifies that the remote device will assign the IP address for Al296 The default is 0 0 0 0 4 ForRemote IP address enter the IP address Entering 0 0 0 0 specifies that the remote device will assign its own IP address The default is 0 0 0 0 5 ForsSubnet Mask enter the subnet mask The default is 255 255 255 240 This example displays Local IP address Set tO 23 230 34 5 O Remote IP address Set tO 23 230 34 6 Subnet Mask Set to 255 255 255 000 PPP Configuration Menu LITE Being CONTIGUA en Be oe Be we we a 3 Network Control Protocol i 4 e mos a adoa a a desa Gow a PCP BCP PCP Address Parameters Local 1P address soros ora a mosca mica we De A hae 2929094 Remote IP address a a aaa 23 230 34 6 Subnet Mask z oa m eee ee ee ee 255 255 255 000 6 43 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration General PPP Properties Configuration Maximum Unit Settings Description The maximum unit settings are configured using two menu items Maximum receive unit MRU Defines the maximum number of bytes that ca
97. 04 Called address eee reer eee eee eee eee eee ee eee X25 2 987654321098 05 This alias is visible in the destination menu eeeeeee YES 06 Link number is 1 16 07 Caller s address 08 Ca data 09 App string TI D NE OH WORTHI NGTON 1 TID NE OH WORTHI NGTON 2 10 Called protoco 11 Caller s protocol 12 Alternate routing alias 14 Test macros 15 Show entire alias 16 Show the first entry in the alias translation table 17 Show the previous entry in the alias translation table 18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table 19 Delete the above alias translation entry 20 Save the changes made 20b to the beginning 20e to the end 21 Exit this menu with no changes Enter item number and optional value then push lt CR gt key gt 7 13 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide TID Multiplexing TID Multiplexing Configuration These examples display two of the child alias configurations in the Al296 menu system Note To configure aliases in the Al296 local menu system Al296 must be in standalone mode Alias Edit Menu Alias NSG e ae 3 rara died tedaw hha woh ha Dhaest hohe vowed tai TLIDM 1 Die SU Nace O e a Sae ted Caller s AUTE z o aaa si ld iaa Ea Galled AGdreSS a da ar adan due AK R R h e amp X25 1 123456789012 Ca Data sak Se a L AAA eae aks book wed ae ae eae T Gali en s PO TOGO a Sade ed wa aed Pie ab ieee aed Called
98. 1 11 Caller s protocol 12 Alternate routing alias l6 Test macros 17 Show the first entry in the alias translation table 18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table 19 Delete the above alias translation entry 20 Save the changes made 21 Exit this menu with no changes Enter item number and optional value then push lt CR gt key Note Refer to Alias Configuration Examples on page 8 45 for a descriptions of all menu items in this example J 8 50 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Alias Configuration Examples MLT Route You can use aliases to route MLT call information through a TCP IP network The example in Figure 8 5 shows how aliases can be set up to route an MLT call One alias is configured for an Al296 card that is connected to the host and the other is configured for an Al296 card that is connected to an NE Alias Name Called Address Example MLT 3 Called Address Destination IP Address Example 192 168 1 140 1001 Called Protocol AEPN L ad UID Oo Link 31 r m 3 TCP IP Network mn E 55555555 NE B MLT Host E ORB A1296 Al296 Al296 Alias Name ijp_address tcp_port_number Example 192 168 1 140 1001 Callers Address MLT ink_number Example MLT 6 Caller s Protocol AEPN L Figure 8 5 MLT Call Routing Example
99. 1 Keer gt PARENT2 1 TID s SONEPLEX NE3 SONEPLEX NE4 15 TCP 192 168 31 15 5001 Keer gt PARENT2 2 TI D s NE4 DAYTON OH NE5 DAYTON OH NE6 DAYTON OH NE7 DAYTON OH NE8 DAYTON OH NE9 DAYTON OH 296 Note The connection ID is the first number that appears for each connection For example the connection ID for connection PARENT is 1 9 49 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commanas dir Description This command displays a list of files with associated times dates permissions and sizes Command Type shell Formats dir 1 Parameters Displays a list of the available files and file information such as permission time date and file size The s command with this option is the same as the dir command Examples This example displays all available files 296 dir boot ini boot img 232 img log txt primary cnf 296 This example displays all available files with permission size time and date information 296 dir I TW TT 10 0 143 Jun 1 22 52 boot ini TPT 10 0 2175720 Aug 15 09 54 boot img rW f Te 10 0 22061 Jun 1 00 00 log txt TW feere 10 0 4342 Aug 15 08 21 core txt TW r r 1 0 0 7092 Jun 13 22 46 primary cnf 296 J 9 50 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands exit exit Description This command ends the current shell session and returns to the login prompt Command Type shell Formats exit Exampl
100. 1073 0 241 Streams 2085 115 94 532 0 116 Bufcalls 64 0 100 0 0 0 Timeouts 2387 13 99 402908 0 45 Message blocks 16015 369 97 588495 0 551 Data blocks Class 0 1519 17 98 7954 0 40 Class 1 4080 16 99 835 0 18 Class 2 14944 56 99 301866 0 64 Class 3 9981 19 99 11034 0 32 Class 4 500 0 100 0 0 0 Class 5 390 260 60 222746 0 263 Class 6 1 1 50 1 0 1 Extended 350 0 100 0 0 0 SYSTEM ALLOCATION alloc failed 0 REGI ON ASIZ CNT CNT_HWM USED USED_HWM UNIT_SIZE All 741664 324 424 17632 20704 32 Al2 741664 0 0 0 0 32 Al 3 741664 32 36 179296 180832 32 Enter M emory A sync E thernet T cp or Q uit Column Description NAME Displays the name of the STREAMS resource FREE Displays the number of free or available STREAMS resources ALLOC Displays the number of STREAMS resources allocated at the time of the display F REE Displays the percent of free or available STREAMS resources USED Displays the number of STREAMS resources used since the card was last rebooted FAIL Displays the number of times an allocation failed HWM Displays the highest number of resources ever allocated at one time REGI ON Displays the memory allocation regions ASI Z Displays the size of the memory allocation regions in bytes CNT Displays the number of blocks allocated from a region regardless of size CNT_HWM Displays the highest number of blocks allocated since the card was last rebooted USED Displays the number of bytes currently allocated from a region
101. 14 2 6 1 appears 3 Foro6 Inactivity Timeout enter 6 and a timeout value Valid values are from o to 100000 The default is 300 This example displays 06 Inactivity Timeout Set to 1500 gt 6 1500 Menu 4 2 14 2 6 1 01 TID to route ee eee ee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee 02 Port Data Bits 7 Bjorn 8 03 Port Stop Bits 1 2 eee ee ee eee eee ee eee ee eee ee ee eee ee eee 1 04 Port Parity None Even Odd None 05 Init String L 06 Inactivity Timeout 0 100000 K KKK 001500 Al296 Local Menu Item Configuration 1 Access the TID to Modem Mux Menu located under the System Menu 2 From the TID to Modem Mux Summary Menu select Add 11D The TID To Modem Mux Edit Menu appears 3 Forinactivity Timeout enter a timeout value Valid values are from o to 100000 The default is 300 J 4 28 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide System Configuration TID to Modem Mux Configuration This example displays inactivity Timeout Set to 1500 TID To Modem Mux Edit Menu TID to route a so s sosa ok Be R ks KR Gk ra a ten ga nani Port Data Bits S ue ck A OR amp A oy oe oo Seven Eight Port Stop Bits Bae A O A a One Two Pott Pla Ve as le we me E A AS 14 K None Even Odd PE SERENO ye eo a i ih E E Oe a es oh ohn oh aes Inactivity Timeout oes ue we a a a oe Re a a we ee 1500 Initialization String Description This menu item define
102. 1812 SECTOE s s i ia ew adel applied Shell RAS Option Disabled RADI US RADI US Eal back 4 17 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide System Configuration TACACS Configuration TACACS Configuration TACACS authentication verifies user login information against the user s permission level on a TACACS server Up to 9 TACACS servers are configurable to provide secure access for an entire Al296 network Al296 TACACS authentication is available for Telnet asynchronous asynchronous PPP and FTP connections The following menu items can be configured for TACACS on the Al198 menu system e Server Settings e Shell FTP Options Note TACACS is not configurable from the Al296 local menu system For information on configuring TACACS when logged into Al296 refer to shell commands aaa on page 9 6 tacacs on page 9 96 and tacacs server on page 9 99 Server Settings Description From the Al198 Menu System the TACACS server settings are configured using four menu items for the primary and secondary server The configurable values are Primary secondary server status Enables or disables the primary or secondary server Primary secondary server P address Defines an IP address for the primary or secondary server Primary secondary server port Defines the port number for the primary or secondary server 6 Primary secondary server secret Defines a password for the primary or secondary se
103. 2 for PVC types timer types ranges and defaults Table 6 2 PVC and Timer Type PVC Type Timer Type Range Default Active Call Timer 30 to 600 s 30s Connect on Activity Inactivity Timer 1 to 600s 1s Passive Reset Timer Os Os This example displays e Low Pvc set to 30 e High Pvc Set to 50 e pvc Type Set to Active O Timer Value Set to 230 PVC Edit Menu Link DEPTO configured a a b e amp a bok A Ok Am Rok a ok amp a ow amp 4 03 LOW PVG gaa a ed Gara eo We BY Se ow 8 Ww a On A ee AL a 30 High PVG dk ca a ROR o a a on oe ea A ae Bock ea 50 PVC TY PGs lt S ade ok R a OSS ee d Passive Active Connect OnActivity Timer Valte ic m og oh Ace Ha A a a AE tt ke kote Re Gh gy ke a 230 SVC Configuration Settings Description SVCs are network connections that are established when transmission is required and are disconnected when the session is complete The SVC settings are configured using the following menu items e incoming only SVC low Defines the minimum LCN used for incoming only SVCs e incoming only SVC high Defines the maximum LCN used for incoming only SVCs Two way SVC ow Defines the minimum LCN used for an SVC Two way SVC high Defines the maximum LCN used for an SVC Outgoing only SVC low Defines the minimum LCN used for outgoing only SVCs Al296 can place calls on outgoing only SVCs greater than the maximum PVC and or two way SVC Outgoing only
104. 296 user Five system profiles are available for providing various levels of user access For more information about user profiles refer to command profile on page 1 103 RADIUS Authentication RADIUS authentication verifies user login information against valid user information in a database on a centralized RADIUS authentication server A primary and secondary RADIUS server are configurable to provide secure access for an entire Al296 network Al296 RADIUS authentication is available for Telnet asynchronous and synchronous ports For more information on RADIUS authentication refer to section RADIUS Configuration on page 1 19 TACACS Authentication TACACS authentication verifies user login information against the user s permission level on a TACACS server Up to 9 TACACS servers are configurable to provide secure access for an entire Al296 network Al296 TACACS authentication is available for Telnet asynchronous and FTP connections For more information on TACACS authentication and server configuration refer to the following commands o aa e tacacs e tacacs server PPP Authentication Protocols PAP and CHAP All asynchronous and synchronous PPP links are configurable to use either PAP or CHAP PPP authentication protocols PAP establishes peer identity using a 2 way handshake that is done only upon initial link establishment CHAP performs a 3 way handshake upon initial link establishment then proceeds to verify the link with
105. 3 way handshakes at random intervals CHAP also encrypts the user s password over the PPP link to provide added security Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Local Menu System Logging Into Al296 Logging Into Al296 Log into Al296 with a Telnet connection or with any of Al296 s asynchronous ports that are configured as Login ports Note ai is the default user ID and password Al296 prompts you to create a new user ID and password after the fifth login with the default values Refer to command useradd on page 9 118 to create a new user ID and password Using a Telnet Connection for Login Logging in using a Telnet connection requires that Al296 has a configured IP address If an IP address has not been configured refer to Chapter 4 System Configuration to assign an IP address To log into Al296 using a Telnet connection 1 Power on Al296 2 Connect the Ethernet network connection to the 10BaseT port on the front panel of Al296 3 Telnet to Al296 The login prompt appears Note ai is the default user ID and password There are five grace period logins If after the fifth login a new ID and password have not been created Al296 prompts you to create a user ID and password Use the useradd command described in Chapter 9 Al296 Commands to create a user ID and password 4 Enter your user ID The password prompt appears 5 Enter your password The destination menu appears You are now logged into Al296 The fo
106. 33 06 Send Timer ST3 Seconds ner 00045 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the X 25 Link Menu 2 From the X 25 Link Menu select the Bx 25 Menu 3 Forconnect Timer 12 enter the connect timer value The default is 12 4 ForSend Timer sT3 enter the send timer value The default is 18 This example displays Connect Timer sT2 setto 225 and Send Timer sT3 setto 275 BX 25 Menu Link Being configured aa ma ea da a ok a w NRT 03 BX25 SUP POR 4 4 de ele e e o we He A Enabled Disabled Use BX 25 Configuration Values 0 Enabled Disabled Sending Unit Number s s os s s s pono bobo ed k k e bow a m a o o pop popp BXA 2S MOTUS ee an a oe Se a E iiia ace Gots oh R a a e ah de a ae OO Connect Timer ST2 seconds 0 a a a 225 Send Timer ST3 Seconds 2 ee ee 275 6 9 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Connect Options Configuration Connect Options Configuration Connect options configure the Al296 connection parameters These options are available for asynchronous links and asynchronous PPP links The following configuration items are available Alias e Alias e Call Retry Interval e Connect String e Connection Settings e Link Application Description This menu item specifies an alias name for the connection When the link connection options are satisfied a call is placed based on information cont
107. 4 delel in dico tidad 9 26 A ecemeadysdeenunnenuageccantcucstentxan 9 27 ls Ela E A o A ee eee T 9 29 o Pe ere ees ee 9 37 A PAP o Ricca Aa aaa aa 9 46 ollo AA E N E 9 49 a I APEC PUE O 9 50 MA ads 9 51 nedd uta da asocian nara sado 9 52 A O E O TO eee oe N 9 53 Te NO 9 55 Da E E 9 56 ID IDI sassy ce ees a occ E aea E nn EA P E N OE 9 57 Mrs ei a Oa estes oto A 9 59 IST aii 9 61 o E 9 64 A ee eee ee eee error te ee eer 9 65 S 9 66 POG ini da 9 67 MOG Pu O A TO 9 68 pad Eo Po O 9 69 panic A PA 9 71 J toc 6 Table of Contents IN AS SW usina 9 72 o o TI as eecemenceren teense 9 73 PPP STATUS 2 ii 9 74 alenn 9 76 su ee PA A eee er eee ee eee ee eee eee ee eee ee er er 9 78 sU 0 TTT 9 80 PPP adarna aha ate alae elie en ete 9 82 TTT 9 83 Selina da 9 84 1190 9 PP a e el OE E EE ee ee eee 9 85 SNOW treated ida EEES 9 86 NANA O dc 9 89 standalone siensa e e devas Sbasd Weide AA a a A easiest ee nese 9 91 SIASIC aia 9 92 LES PAP ee EAA E er ee 9 94 SZ ec oe 9 95 tacas aiii daa 9 96 tacas SOVET rruna enaa a aa aided donee enceneeecatias 9 99 MEAN Ee E E A E E da ae E T O E 9 103 TOPOUTCONM sia A neh ide A a 9 104 e E 8 ES IA 9 105 TIMID GON id 9 108 TIMEZONE A E 9 110 A A TO 9 112 TWACCKOULE unir a dio 9 114 I eL aa 9 115 UPAS APA eater ee eee eer ee O OO 9 116 UPIME senri e ee eee ee tn ects Seances ret eee 9 117 HSCF AAG ARA sede E 9 118 Pa T 9 120 USOS E as 9 121 WO nadia 9 122 VO iria oo ties
108. 4 1 Call Retry Interval Description This menu item defines a value for the call retry interval If a call fails to connect and the retry interval is greater than 0 the link attempts to place the call again after the specified number of seconds elapse This setting has no effect on calls placed to the link when the link is the destination and not the call originator A value of 0 disables call retry interval functionality Menu Item Type Data Link Type Availability Async Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 11 2 Foro3 Call retry interval enter3 and the interval value The default is 0 6 11 ff Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Connect Options Configuration This example displays 03 call retry interval setto 134 gt 3 134 Menu 4 2 11 12 11 01 Link Application Login Destination Alias ALIAS 02 Alias async 4 1 03 Call retry interval 0 32767 s 0 disabled 00134 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the Async Link Menu 2 Select connect Options Menu The Connect Options Menu appears 3 Forcall Retry Interval enter the desired interval value The default is 0 This example displays cal Retry Interval Setto134 Connect Options Menu Link being configured oaa 1 Link Application Login Destination AppAlias Link Application AMAS os
109. 5 Link Number Description This menu item configures the local IXE doorway link number Menu Item Type Data Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 13 This menu displays a list of all the configured IP over X 25 subnets 2 From Menu 4 2 11 13 enter a value 02 through 11 associated with the IP over X 25 subnet to be configured Menu 4 2 11 13 1 appears 3 Foro3 Local X 25 link number enter 3 and the link number Valid values are 1 to 16 The default is 1 This example displays 03 Local X 25 link number setto 12 gt 3 12 Menu 4 2 11 13 1 01 Local IP address for this subnet 024 035 132 067 02 Local IP Mask for this Subnet e eee reese 255 255 000 000 03 Local X 25 link number eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 12 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the IP Over X 25 Subnet Menu 2 From the IP Over X 25 Subnet Menu select Add The IP Over X 25 Subnet Edit Menu appears 3 Forlocal X 25 link number enter the link number The default is 1 This example displays Local X 25 link number Set to 12 IP Over X 25 Subnet Edit Menu Local 1P Address for this Subnet e 0 0 0 0 Local P Mask for this Subnet i b tor t p w e a 255 255 255 252 Local X 25 Wink number s so ro sos aoe wo aaa ee 1 mos 12 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide IP Over X 25 Subnet Configuration Remo
110. 512 1024 20481 200 O7 TCP Send Ahead OFF 08 5NMP System Parameters 09 Bring passive link down when all calls have cleared ON 10 Passive link Stay Inactive timer ee reer eee 000050 11 Passive link Standby Mode timer ee eee ee ee eee eee 000020 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the System Menu 2 FOrBring passive links down when all calls have cleared Select Yes Or No The default is No 3 Fortime to remain inactive after being brought down enter a value in seconds The minimum value is 25 seconds and the default is 60 seconds 4 ForTime to stand by before being brought up enter a value in seconds The minimum value is 5 seconds and the default is 25 seconds This example displays Bring passive links down when all calls have cleared Setto Yes Time to remain inactive after being brought down Set to 50 O Time to stand by before being brought up Setto 20 System Menu CS G G R E gt Ge RAR A naa 296 Destination Menu Break Sequence 0 eee lt c gt 1 5 x TCP Default Window Size 0 200 512 1024 2048 TEP SO id AMG des a a aw Ghee ROW ea wa R TR Enabled Disabled PENSE POTE du ee o a o TO SR AA e e e a eH a ee AA PPE PHONE a mam tae e e i car eee er eke Set de a Sy Be A BO ae aT 10 Basie T BtMer net oe none oe wok hk kw ok ee RB 8 Loff On Dual 0 2 0 X lt a iw ce lar ai a BR A ao oe Oe se ea o
111. 6 Port Data Bits setto7 gt 6 Menu 4 2 11 12 01 Link Number 1 16 eee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee eee 01 02 Link Type Async X25 HDLC SyncPPP AsyncPPP MLT Async 03 Link Description Async link 1 04 Link state Enabled Disabled normes Enabled A e eee eee eee eee ee eee ee eee eee 9600 06 Port Data Bits 7 Bj 7 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu 2 ForPort data bits selectSeven Or Eight The default is Ei ght J 6 34 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration General Link Properties Configuration This example displays Port data bits Set to Seven Async Link Menu Link DO Configure A a aoa a a Noe de ee e e we ee Ye oe ew oe 0 Link state Bee ci mn ae ee a a Se oe ee fh ke eet A Up Down Link Type Async X 25 HDLC Bridge SyncPPP AsyncPPP MLT Interface Type hei Gwe RS RS 232 RS 530 V 35 Port speed in bits per second 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 57 6K 115 2K Autobaud Port data DES a sm to a Ad dock ele ob do ae ewe a a ed Seven Ei ght Port Parity Description This menu item defines parity which is a process for detecting whether or not bits of data have been altered during data transmission Menu Item Type Toggle Link Type Availability Async and AsyncPPP Configuration in the Al19
112. 6 TCP IP Application crea 1 16 X29 Haie TT saree a R EREA 1 17 Ch S TM apter 2 Using the Al198 Menu System sss eee eee e 2 1 Accessing the Menu System cuicos 2 2 Navigating the Menu System sese eee rias iaa 2 3 Menu Numbering Structure essere e eee eee eee eee eee eee 2 3 Types of Menu A a o ee ee 2 3 NN Table of Contents Exiting the Menu System susana ida 2 6 Chapter 3 Al296 Local Menu System see eee eee e 3 1 Identifying Al296 Menu System Security Options see eee eee eee 3 2 Multilevel User Name and Password Security sees eee eee eee 3 2 RADIUS Authentication sona 3 2 TACACS Authentication sese eee eee eee 3 2 PPP Authentication Protocols PAP and CHAP sese eee 3 2 Logging Into Al2960 T 3 3 Using a Telnet Connection for Login sse eee eee eee eee eee 3 3 Using an Asynchronous Port for Login asen dle 3 4 Accessing the Local Menu System seer eee eee eee 3 6 Navigating the Local Menu System sees eee eee eee eee 3 7 Identifying Types of Menu Items sese eee eee eee 3 7 Accessing the Help Menu sese eee eee eee 3 9 Exiting the Local Menu System ssl 3 10 Chapter 4 System Configuration sees eee eee e 4 1 General System Properties Configuration esse eee eee eee eee 4 2 Destination Menu Break Sequence eee eee eee eee eee 4 2 Ethernet POM Ren iie LT 4 4 FEP ac T gamer nee EE ee T 4 5 IP SUIS fac sect can ce bbe reinas credit EE En 4 6 Passive Link Settings sisi 4 8 SR PPP aa SEa EAEE 4 10 TOP Settings erriarena licenci 4 11
113. 6 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands selcnf selcnf Note This command is only available for Al296 in standalone mode Description This command has two forms One allows for the recovery of an overwritten runtime configuration file and the other allows for the deletion of the specified configuration file Any configuration file with a cnf extension can be used for system boot up The configuration file is written to boot ini Command Type shell Formats sel cnf T d config file Parameters t Specifies the option that recovers the current overwritten run time configuration file d Specifies the option that deletes a configuration file The following parameter is accepted config_ fil e Defines a configuration file for deletion it must end with a cnf extension Examples This example displays the available options for command sel caf 296 selcnf usage selcnf r selcnf d lt config_ file gt Selects the specified config file for current configuration Options r Recovers the current over written run time config file d Deletes the specified configuration file 296 9 84 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands sholog sholog Description This command displays the contents of the log file The last 32 000 characters of log messages that were sent to the log port are displayed Note This command has the same functionality as command show log Command T
114. 7 9482 or 1 614 798 2000 You can also access and view the most current versions of Kentrox product documentation on our Web site at http www kentrox com KENTROX Table of Contents Chapter 1 Product Description sss eee 1 1 STT 1 2 Break Prop atlas en eee ee eee ee ee en 1 2 BX 25 Compatibility sees eee eee eee ee 1 2 DCD DSR RTS DTR Signal Lead Control sese esse eee 1 2 Dynamic Port Configuration sse eee eee ee eee eee 1 2 EIA Lead Signaling sse eee eee eee 1 2 IRB Connectivity sas ou 1 2 Line Monitoring Diagnostics si n i n 1 2 Link to Link Gall Routing sss esse sese eee eee 1 3 Performance Monitoring Maintenance Troubleshooting sss esse eee ee 1 3 Remote and Local Configuration sese eee eee cin 1 3 Simultaneous Connections serian 1 3 Single Alias Translation eee ee eee eee eee mee incio 1 3 SNMP Manageability eee eee eee eee eee 1 3 Standalone Configuration vol 1 3 System Diagnostics ermano it 1 4 TID Multiplexing sortida rita aldo cla 1 4 AI296 Hardware Components scsi aceasta tinea ea dene cote eee 1 5 Front Panel Components misa ii 1 6 Technical Specifications sscssceneiren mia E E R NAE 1 7 Indvid al POM ACCESS sondas 1 8 CAB257 Cable incre ae eea E aE EAEE Ea AERE EEn 1 8 DP196 Distribution Panel serrana 1 8 Typical Applications suda 1 11 Asynchronous to TCP IP Application sse eee eee eee 1 11 IP Over X 25 Networks eee eee neee ereenn 1 12 Mixed Asynchronous and X 25 Networks sse eee eee eee eee 1 14 X 25 1
115. 8 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 2 Foro08 Port Parity enter 8 to select None Odd Or Even The default is None This example displays 08 Port Parity Set to odd gt 8 Menu 4 2 11 12 01 Link Number 1 16 eee ee eee ee eee eee eee eee eee ee eee 01 02 Link Type Async X25 HDLC SyncPPP AsyncPPP MLT Async 03 Link Desti pt 0n lt oo Async link 1 04 Link state Enabled Disabled eee ee etree Enabled O5 Port Spes eee eee ee eee eee ee eee ee eee eee 9600 06 Port Data Bits 7 Bjorn 8 O7 Port Stop Bits 1 2 eee ee eee eee eee eee eee ee ee eee eee 1 08 Port Parity None Odd Even eee eee ee ee eee ee eee eee Odd Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu 2 ForPort parity select None Even Or Odd The default is None 6 35 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration General Link Properties Configuration This example displays Port parity set to Odd Async Link Menu Link DO Configure A a aoa a a Noe de ee e e we ee Ye oe ew oe 0 LME Siae e 5 ap te Sa Gian OR A AAA fh oh ee H Up Down Link Type Async X 25 HDLC Bridge SyncPPP AsyncPPP MLT Interface Type tne O id Port speed in bits per second 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 57 6K 115 2K RS 232 RS 530 v 35 Auto
116. 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands diag eth This example displays the diagnostic Ethernet display when the following parameters are entered interpret max to set maximum interpretation e timestamp to enable timestamping e promiscuous to enable promiscuous mode e filter add src 172 16 2 9 to add a filter for address 172 16 2 9 e data to display data e go to start the data capture e stop to stop capturing data 296 diag eth interpret max nterpretation is now set to MAXI MUM i mestamp Timestamps will now be displayed promiscuous The ethernet chip is now in promiscuous mode ilter add src 172 16 2 9 ew filter added data Uninterpreted data will now be displayed go Timestamp 11 10 2006 02 33 54 74 lt Ethernet 00 40 72 00 7F 96 gt 00 00 0C 7E F2 72 Protocol 0x0800 1P IP 172 16 2 9 gt 172 16 0 1 Version 4 Header Length 20 bytes Type 0f Service none dentifier 37903 Fragmentation Flags none Offset 0 bytes Time To Live 60 hops Protocol 0x01 1 CMP CMP Type 8 Code 0 echo request 00 00 48 44 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C HDABCDEF GHI J KL 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 41 42 MNOPQRSTUVWXYZAB 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 CDEFGHI J KLMNOPQR 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 STUVWXYZABCDEFGH 49 4A 4B 4C IJ KL J 9 34 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Co
117. A 2 End On o woa First Second Third Fourth Last End Day Sun Mon Tue Wed Thur Fri Sat End Month 1 12 1 Jan 12 Dec a aaa a 11 End Hour 023 a m em 4 2 w Boa a Se e an ee Bowe a 2 SNTP Settings Description SNTP is a time protocol that maintains a common time among Internet hosts There are 4 menu items available for configuring SNTP settings SNTP client on this host is Enables or disables SNTP If Enabled is selected the system attempts to contact the primary and secondary SNTP servers for the exact time If Al296 is unable to contact either the primary or secondary SNTP server it uses the local time maintained by Al296 If Di sabl ed is selected the system uses the local time maintained by Al296 J 4 34 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide System Configuration Time Configuration O Primary SNTP Server Defines the IP address of the first SNTP server from which Al296 will attempt to retrieve the exact time e Secondary SNTP Server Defines the IP address of the second SNTP server from which Al296 will attempt to retrieve the exact time Note The SNTP client must be enabled before the primary or secondary SNTP server can be defined SNTP Poll Interval minutes Defines the time interval in minutes for Al296 to poll the SNTP servers Menu ltem Types Toggle for sNTP client on this host is Data for Primary SNTP Server Secondary SNTP Server and SNTP Poll Interval minutes
118. Al296 s local memory For more information about alias translation and macros see sections Call Routing on page 8 5 and Alias Macros on page 8 38 Figure 8 1 displays a typical call processing data flow scenario where Al296 is used Al296 Card A IP address 172 16 30 100 Al296 Card B m IP address E oc R E Eg o 172 16 30 200 gf EET E AEPN HESE 5 5 sl Z E 18 S l D A E Incoming Outgoing gt 2 Z b o X 25 TCP IP E call call TCP 3 5 X 25 jo jo Incoming Outgoing TCP IP X25 call to call X25 2 67891 Figure 8 1 Call Data Flow In Figure 8 1 an X 25 protocol call is coming into Al296 card A and needs to pass over the IRB and be sent out Al296 card B Refer to the figure to follow the flow of the call The following events occur if the data flow is from left to right 1 The data comes into Al296 card A as an X 25 packet Refer to X 25 on page 6 4 for information about X 25 2 The data travels upstream and is converted into a TCP call 3 The data starts downstream through the AEPN protocol option to preserve the packetization Refer to AEPN on page 8 29 for information about the AEPN protocol 4 The data is sent out Al296 card A over TCP on the IRB Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Overview 5 The TCP packet is received by Al296 card B 6 The data travels upstream
119. BACK The default is DI SABLED This example displays 09 Shel FTP Radius Option Setto LOCAL FALLBACK gt 9 Menu 4 2 11 2 2 01 Primary Server Status Enabled Disabled ENABLED 02 Primary Server IP Address ooo 050 023 156 012 03 Primary Server Port 1 65535 lt oro 00122 04 Primary Server 56Cret eee eee eee eee eee hilltop 05 Secondary Server Status Enabled Disabled DISABLED 06 Secondary Server IP Address o ooo 000 000 000 000 07 Secondary Server Port 1 65535 e eee ee eee eee eee eee eee 01812 08 Secondary Server Secret eee eee eee eee eee applied 09 Shell FTP Radius Option Enabled Disabled Local Fall back LOCAL FALLBACK Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System To configure the shell FTP RADIUS option 1 Access the RAS Configuration Menu located under the System Menu 2 ForsShell RAS Option Select Disabled RADIUS RADI US Fallback The default is Disabled J 4 16 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide System Configuration RADIUS Configuration This example displays the shell RAS option set to RADI US Fall back RAS Configuration Menu RADIUS Primary Server Status Enabled Disabled PATAS o e R T 0 0 0 0 Port Number 1812 SOCCER 4 4 amp Pe wae 0 AAR newone RADIUS Secondary Server Status Enabled Disabled P Address 1 wee 0 0 0 0 Port Number
120. CD 42 Ethernet 00 40 72 00 D2 43 Link 16 00 60 47 CC DB 43 Ethernet 00 00 92 90 CF 44 Etherne 00 A0 C9 25 9A B1 Etherne 00 40 72 00 73 B8 Etherne 00 40 72 00 41 C7 Etherne 00 00 92 90 95 C8 Ethernet 00 00 92 90 C7 CE Ethernet 00 10 4B 64 25 CF Etherne 00 00 92 90 0C DO Etherne 00 00 92 9B 58 D3 Etherne 00 00 92 Bp 3A D5 Ethernet 00 00 0E 3A 02 D5 Etherne 00 10 83 F5 A5 D8 Ethernet 00 00 92 90 96 DB Etherne 00 00 92 90 95 DF Etherne 00 40 72 00 AF E7 Link 16 creset Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands creset Description This command resets the error counters for a link or a range of links There is no output for this command To see if the error counters were reset for the links you specified enter command staslc on page 9 92 Command Types shell and winslc Formats For the shell command creset range For the winslc command winslc baseport creset range Parameters range Defines the link or a range of links being reset Valid values are e A single link number for example 3 to reset error counters for link 3 e A series of link numbers separated by commas for example 1 2 3 to reset error counters for links 1 2 and 3 e A range of link numbers separated by a dash for example 1 2 to reset error counters for links 1 and 2 e Any combination of a single link number series and or range for example 1 2 3 to reset error counters
121. CP with N caller s address protocol option 04 ip_address tcp_port_number Called AEP Refer to AEP on page 8 29 protocol X 25 SVC Async with Alias name Call user data or called address or X 25 SVC asyncbreak caller s address with TL1 Async TL1 packetizing with async Called PVC and X 29 break address break Async packetized Call data ASY ink_number on CR or Caller s The following options are available e ide protocol e SVC PAD Refer to PAD on page 8 30 e SVC with TL1 PAD TL1 Refer to PAD on page 8 30 and TL1 on page 8 33 Called The following options are available protocol e Async leave blank e Async TL1 TL1 Refer to TL1 on page 8 33 e Async packetized PKT P13 12 Refer to PKT on page 8 32 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Source Destination Protocol Tables Table 8 5 X 25 PVC Source Without Breaks Al198 Source Destination Menu Item Information X 25 PVC X 25 SVC Alias name X25 ink_number cn Called The following options are available address e X25 ink_number called address 6 X25 ink_ number caller_address cal _user_data Note ca ed_address must be a valid X 121 address X 25 PVC X 25 PVC Alias name X25 ink_number cn Called PVC address Call data X25 ink_number cn X 25 PVC TCP Alias name X25 ink_number cn Called ip_address tcp port number address X 25 PVC A
122. Command Types shell and winslc Formats For the shell command staeia ink_range For the winslc command winslc baseport staeia ink_range Parameters ink_range Defines a link or range of links Valid values are 1 to 32 Individual values are separated by commas and hyphens For example 1 4 6 specifies links 1 4 5 and 6 Specifies all links baseport Defines the baseport of Al296 Examples This example displays the status of the EIA leads for links 1 to 5 296 staeia 1 5 Link Type Status IN OUT DCD CTS DTR RTS 1 ASY Enabled 2 X25 Enabled 3 X25 Enabled 4 X25 Enabled Ln X25 Disabled 296 Column Description DCD DCD is an incoming EIA lead control signal The plus symbol indicates that this lead is asserted The minus symbol indicates that the lead is negated 9 89 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands staeia Column Description CTS CTS is an incoming EIA lead control signal The plus symbol indicates that this lead is asserted The minus symbol indicates that the lead is negated DTR DTR is an outgoing EIA lead control signal The plus symbol indicates that this lead is asserted The minus symbol indicates that the lead is negated RTS RTS is an outgoing EIA lead control signal The plus symbol indicates that this lead is asserted The minus
123. Deset DELON c e ae at wigan emanated AA a aes TTT Display Alias in Destination Menu 2 o Yes No Alias Test Menu Range 255 characters lt Fl gt Help lt F2 gt Send lt F4 gt Close lt Ctrl R gt Return to Main Menu J s 10 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Call Routing 2 Inthe Alias Edit Menu select Application String and enter the X 25 keep alive string as follows X25KA s where X25KA period d period Notifies the 296 that this is the X 25 keep alive feature The period between each RR on the VC This value is in tenths of second In the example above an RR would be sent every 2 seconds If the d flag is given the destination will send out the RRs if it is an X 25 link If the s flag is given then only the source side of the connection will send out the RRs if it is an X 25 link If neither is given then it will send out RRs on the side that is an X 25 link and both if both are X 25 links 8 11 ff Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Source Destination Protocol Tables Source Destination Protocol Tables The following parameters are referred to in the tables cal l_data Defines the call data Maximum length is 16 characters cal ed_address Defines the address being called Maximum length is 14 characters caller_address Defines the address of the caller Maximum leng
124. Enables TACACS login e Disabled Disables TACACS login e local fallback Enables TACACS login but resorts to local login if the TACACS login fails 4 Note RADIUS and TACACS cannot both be configured at the same time Attempting to do this generates an error Menu Item Type Toggle Configuration in the Al198 Menu System Important Configuration of the shell FTP TACACS option results in privilege level authorization and supersedes any TACACS configuration on the Al296 card To configure the shell FTP TACACS option 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 2 4 4 19 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide System Configuration TACACS Configuration 2 Foro9 Shell FTP TACACS Option enter 9 to select ENABLED DISABLED OF LOCAL FALLBACK The default is DI SABLED This example displays 09 Shel FTP TACACS Option Set tO LOCAL FALLBACK gt 9 Menu 4 2 11 2 4 01 Primary Server Status Enabled Disabled DISABLED 02 Primary Server IP Address ooo 000 000 000 000 03 Primary Server Port 1 65535 lt rro 00049 04 Primary Server Secreto applied 05 Secondary Server Status Enabled Disabled DISABLED 06 Secondary Server IP Address ooo 000 000 000 000 07 Secondary Server Port 1 B553RI n 00049 08 Secondary Server Beret eee ee ee eee eee applied 09 Shell FTP TACACS Option Enabled Disabled Local Fall back LOCAL FALLBACK J 4 20 Al296 Versio
125. Forces the PVC to activate with the corresponding call timer asy ink_number cn Defines the link number and logical channel number for the asynchronous PVC being edited baseport Defines the baseport number for Al296 C Forces the PVC to connect on activity with the corresponding inactivity timer call_timer Defines the value of the call timer Valid values are from 30 to 600 inactivity_timer Defines the value for the inactivity timer Valid values are from 1 to 600 J 9 78 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands pvcedit P Forces the PVC to become passive x25 ink_number cn Defines the link number and logical channel number for the X 25 PVC being edited Examples This example displays the call timer set to 32 seconds for PVC x25 4 3 296 pvcedit x25 4 3 a 32 296 9 79 pvclist Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands pvclist Description This command lists the PVCs in the system and displays their current state If there are many PVCs in the system this command redirects its output to a file named pvc lst for easier viewing Command Types shell and winslc Formats For the shell command pvclist ink_range For the winslc command winslc baseport pvclist ink_range Parameters ink_range Defines a link or range of links Valid values are 1 to 32 Individual values are separated by commas and hyphens For example 1 4 6 Sp
126. Forcurrent Time Zone hh mm enter the time zone you want Al296 to use e For enter the direction east west of Universal Coordinated Time UTC or Greenwich Mean Time e For hh enter the number of hours e For mm enter the number of minutes Note The time entered is the number of hours you are from UTC For example if you are located in the Eastern Standard Time EST zone you would enter 05 00 in this field This indicates that you are 5 hours behind UTC This example displays a time zone configuration of 05 00 Time Menu Current Time Zone hh mm 1 e a RR a a e oG 05 00 J 4 36 KENT IP Over X 25 Subnet Configuration This chapter provides information on configuring the encapsulation of the IP protocol over X 25 IXE networks Guide to this Chapter Configuration Overview Local Settings Remote Settings Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide IP Over X 25 Subnet Configuration Configuration Overview Configuration Overview Al296 supports encapsulation of the IP protocol over X 25 IXE networks The local Al296 wraps IP packets either control or data packets inside of X 25 frames and sends them across the X 25 network The remote Al296 receives the X 25 frames and unwraps the IP packets To allow IP traffic to run over an X 25 network the network must be configured to support IP over X 25 encapsulation To do this complete the following tasks e Config
127. KENTROX Al296 16 Port High Speed Multi Protocol Line Card User s Guide Version 9 8x Part Number 296UM Rev 5 2008 by Kentrox Inc All rights reserved Copyright 2008 by Kentrox Inc All Rights Reserved The material discussed in this publication is the proprietary property of Kentrox Inc Kentrox retains all rights to reproduction and distribution of this publication Kentrox is a registered trademark of Kentrox Inc Applied Innovation Applied Innovation Inc the Al logo and other names are the intellectual property of Kentrox All other product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Information published here is current as of this document s date of publication but is subject to change without notice You may verify product information by contacting our headquarters in Oregon Kentrox is an Equal Opportunity Affirmative Action employer Kentrox Inc 5800 Innovation Dr Dublin Ohio USA 43016 3271 Toll Free 800 247 9482 International 1 614 798 2000 Fax 1 614 798 1770 15201 NW Greenbrier Pkwy Suite C6 Beaverton Oregon USA 97006 Toll Free 800 733 5511 Direct 503 643 1681 KENTROX About this Document This document explains how to install configure and operate the Al296 16 port high speed multi protocol line card You should have a working knowledge of the following Your network AlSwitch technology X 25 protocol Asynchronous p
128. Max packet size Defines the maximum number of bytes permitted for an X 25 packet This limit governs both transmit and receive packets Packet window size Defines the packet window size which specifies the number of packets that can be sent before receiving confirmation that the first packet was received correctly Menu Item Type Toggle for max packet size Data for packet window size Link Type Availability X 25 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 2 3 4 Access the X 25 Link Menu Select Quick X 25 Menu The Quick X 25 Menu appears For Max Packet Size select128 256 or512 The default is 128 For Packet Window Size enter the window size The default is 2 6 65 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Quick X 25 Configuration This example displays Max Packet Size Setto 256 and Packet Window Size setto 5 Quick X 25 Menu LK being Configured s s a por ww AR deck teh Gee ao ee on 02 lntiertiace Mode s s qe c m ke e ee a domo koak F E oa DTE DCE Port speed O external clocking oaa a a a 9600 X25 Passive Link Mode a aa aaa Nor mal Passive Extended Passive Link with Clocking 2 0 Enabled Disabled Frame Level Disconnect Active Passive Other Frame Window Size r e Gok e a we a e E 7 Max Packet SIZE w wa rra a TRR RR a N 128 256 512 Packet WINdOW SIZE e ss Ga ee aaa a A a 5 Passive Link Settings Description The p
129. Modulo enter the desired value The default is 256 This example displays 8x 25 Modulo set to 150 BX 25 Menu Link being Comf igure e sos son 2 Ak ok ae Ob a ee Boe Bom HY Wem Os 03 BX 25 SUP POLE s s moa a om oe pop a godo d BOM ee me Enabled Disabled Use BX 25 Configuration Values a a a aaa Enabled Disabled Sending VIt NUMDET a ce ee E a RA AA eww OR E a wes 4 BX 2 Sr MOCUICO Le QoS E Se a cece ga a Ard At Ge oR Ga a Ee a GE a ER 150 BX 25 Support Description This menu item enables or disables BX 25 module support on a link BX 25 support can only be enabled on one link at a time When enabling BX 25 support first disable support on all other links Menu Item Type Toggle Link Type Availability X 25 Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 11 2 For01 Bx25 Support enter 1 to select Enabled Or Disabled The default is Disabled This example displays 01 Bx25 Support setto Enabled gt 1 Menu 4 2 11 12 11 01 BX25 Support Enabled Disabled Enabled Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration BX 25 Configuration Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 2 3 Access the X 25 Link Menu Select 8x 25 Menu The BX 25 Menu appears For Bx 25 Support select Enabl ed Or Disabled The default is Disabled This example displays 8x 25 Support Set tO Enabled BX 25 Menu Link being Comf igur
130. Move the cursor to the menu item Note If the selected menu item has a range of valid values that range will appear in the bottom right of the screen 2 Enter your data To erase existing data for a data entry menu item 1 Move the cursor to the menu item 2 Delete the data using BACKSPACE or DELETE and press ENTER OR Enter new data Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Local Menu System Navigating the Local Menu System To save your changes Press F2 or use the up and down arrow keys to highlight send and ENTER Enter y to save lf an error message appears check your work and make changes as necessary Press CTRL E to save data entries immediately without being queried to save If an error message appears check your work and make changes as necessary Toggle Items The following screen shot displays an example of a toggle menu item The selected option has brackets around it GNE SEACE e eee wie ee edo e Ge UP Oh a oe A e Be a A Me ae oe Up Down To select a value for a toggle menu item 1 2 Move the cursor to the menu item Highlight the option you want to select and press ENTER The brackets move to that option To save your changes Press F2 or use the up and down arrow keys to highlight send and ENTER Enter y to save lf an error message appears check your work and make changes as necessary Press CTRL E to save data entries immediately without being queried t
131. NACTIVITY Timer Interval Setto240 gt 4 240 Menu 4 2 11 12 9 2 1 01 PVC Type Passive Active Connect on activity Connect 02 LCN Low for all LCNs for the TlInK eee eee 0005 03 LCN Higher 0015 04 INACTIVITY Timer Interval Seconds eee eee eee ee eee 00240 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the X 25 Link Menu 2 Select Quick X 25 Menu The Quick X 25 Menu appears 3 ForNumber of pvcs enter the number of PVCs to be configured The default is 0 4 For svc Low enter a minimum SVC value that is higher than the number of PVCs Valid values are from o to 4095 The default is 1 5 Forsvc High enter a maximum SVC value that is higher than the minimum SVC value Valid values are from 0 to 4095 The default is 1 6 Save your work 7 From the Quick X 25 Menu select pvc Menu The PVC Summary Menu appears 8 Foredit pvc enter the number of the PVC to be edited This value must be in the range of configured PVCs The PVC Edit Menu appears 9 ForLow pvc enter the minimum PVC value 10 For Hi gh pvc enter the maximum PVC value 11 Forpvc Type select Passive Active Of ConnectOnActivity The default is Passive 12 For Timer Value select the timer interval value 6 89 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Virtual Circuit Configuration The timer type range and default settings depend on the PVC type Refer to Table 6
132. PROVOCO r he ia rl A ars Application String TID NE OH COLUMBUS 1 TID NE OH COLUMBUS 2 TID NE OH COL AE A AN 51 HS 1 5 E a a DAEA Display Alias in Destination Menu a Yes No Alias Test Menu lt Fl gt Help lt F2 gt Send lt F4 gt Close lt Ctrl R gt Return to Main Menu Alias Edit Menu ANTAS Names s ay R ae REER RER thee ee OM AER eh eek eee es E Oe TLIDM 2 Destination e dee ei ad ee ee estas ih adios Sede ied dans Galleries ATEO A a Peace douche echt ot Called AMF OSS w win aaraa a in Reh Mahe RA Meteo eee era X25 2 987654321098 Ca Data ai a Ge Ge he iaa Aca wala ala wade han elke Blade Rd nae dt Ba we Callers Protocol Sy seare atedaindawdd rint oa aa awed deeds ds Gal ed Prior OC Ov a atene aod adn nod my Aare akan ad aceck a E a Reale manele ae a may aes EEA Application String TI D NE OH WORTH NGTON 1 TID NE OH WORTHI NGTON 2 Alternate Route DOSER O Display Alias in Destination Menu 0 Yes No Alias Test Menu Range 255 characters lt Fl gt Help lt F2 gt Send lt F4 gt Close lt Ctrl R gt Return to Main Menu EST Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide TID Multiplexing TID Multiplexing Troubleshooting TID Multiplexing Troubleshooting If an OSS is not getting a response from an NE it can send a TL1 retrieve header command RTRV HDR to determine if the problem is with the NE or with Al296 The parent conne
133. Protocol Tables Table 8 3 X 25 SVC Source Without Breaks Al198 Source Destination Menu Item Information X 25 SVC X 25 SVC 01 Call user data or called address or caller s address 04 The following options are available e X25 ink_ number called address e X25 ink_number caller_address cal _user_data Note ca ed_address must be a valid X 121 address X 25 SVC X 25 PVC 01 Call user data or called address or caller s address 04 PVC 08 X25 ink_number cn X 25 SVC TCP 01 Call user data or called address or caller s address 04 ip_address tcp_port_number X 25 SVC Al193 TX 01 Call user data or called address or TCP with N caller s address protocol option 04 ip_address tcp_port_ number 10 AEP Refer to AEP on page 8 29 X 25 SVC Async 01 Call user data or called address or caller s address 04 PVC 08 ASY ink_ number 8 15 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Source Destination Protocol Tables Table 8 4 X 25 SVC Source With Breaks Al198 Source Destination Menu Item Information X 25 SVC TCP with 01 Call user data or called address or X 25 SVC telnet break caller s address and reply to X 29 break 04 ip_address tcp port number 11 PAD Refer to PAD on page 8 30 10 TN Refer to TN on page 8 35 X 25 SVC Al193 TX 01 Call user data or called address or T
134. SVC high Defines the maximum LCN used for outgoing only SVCs Al296 can place calls on outgoing only SVCs J 6 00 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Virtual Circuit Configuration Menu Item Type Data Link Type Availability X 25 Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 2 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 9 For 03 Incoming only SVC low enter 3 and the minimum LCN used for incoming only SVCs The default is 0 For 04 Incoming only SVC high enter 4 and the maximum LCN used for incoming only SVCs The default is 0 Important Al296 can only receive calls on incoming only SVCs that are greater than the maximum PVC For 05 Two way SVC low enter 5 and the minimum LCN used for an SVC The default is 1 Important This value must be greater than the number of PVCs and or incoming SVCs For 06 Two way SVC high enter p and the maximum LCN used for an SVC The default is 1 For 07 Outgoing only SVC low enter7 and the minimum LCN used for outgoing only SVCs The default is 0 For 08 Outgoing only SVC high enter 8 and the maximum LCN used for outgoing only SVCs The default is 0 Important Al296 can place calls on outgoing only SVCs greater than the maximum PVC and or two way SVC 6 01 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Virtual Circuit Configuration This example displays e 03 Incoming only SVC low Set to 8 e 04 Incoming only SVC high Set to 64 O 05 Two
135. Setto Passive and Frame Window Size set to4 X 25 LAPB Menu Link being configured w s w p mor Ge RR RR WH A a ke Sk o a oe 02 Frame Level Disconnect 4 Active Passive Other Frame Window Size ww ee 4 Interface Mode Description This menu item configures the interface mode as either DTE or DCE DTE is used for a communications device typically a terminal or computer that is the source or destination of signals on a network DCE is used for a device typically the modem that establishes maintains and terminates a session on a network It may also convert signals for transmission J 6 43 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration LAPB Parameters Configuration Menu Item Type Toggle Link Type Availability MLT and X 25 Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access menu 4 2 11 12 7 for MLT or menu 4 2 11 12 8 for X 25 2 Foroi interface mode enter 1 to select DCE or DTE The default is nce This example displays 01 Interface mode Set to DTE gt 1 Menu 4 2 11 12 8 01 Interface mode DTE or DCE e eee eee eee eee ee ee eee eee eee DTE LAPB Timer Settings Description The LAPB timer settings are configured using three menu items TL ack timer Defines the maximum amount of time from the end of transmission to the receipt of an acknowledgment 12 ack delay timer Defines the time available from the receipt of a frame until a response has t
136. Table 8 19 Operators in Order of Precedence Operator Description Specifies a comment at the ends the alias macro expression Specifies a multiplication operation Specifies a division operation Specifies the remainder of a division operation Specifies an addition operation a Specifies a subtraction operation Expressions that use the following operators return 0 for a false condition and 1 for true condition lt lt Specifies a less than evaluation lt lt Specifies a less than or equal to evaluation Specifies an equal to evaluation Specifies a greater than evaluation gt Specifies a greater than or equal to evaluation lt lt gt Specifies a not equal to evaluation 8 Specifies a boolean logical AND evaluation This requires that two conditions are true before continuing with the evaluation d Specifies a boolean logical exclusive OR evaluation This requires that One condition or another not both is true before continuing with the evaluation Specifies a boolean logical OR evaluation This requires that one condition or both conditions are true before continuing with the evaluation J 8 10 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Alias Macros Table 8 19 Operators in Order of Precedence Continued Operator Description Specifies a boolean logical NOT evaluation This changes a true condit
137. This numerical reference specifies the location within the menu system Each digit in the menu number represents a menu item that was previously selected For example Menu 4 2 indicates that menu item 4 and 2 were selected gt 2 Menu 4 2 01 Configure as Empty Slot 02 Configure as Al183 A1185 standard 4 16 port card 03 Configure as Al193 194 Ethernet card with slot expansion of 04 Configure as Al192 196 X 25 network card with slot expansion of 05 Configure as ASP or Advanced Smart Line Card with slot expansion of 06 Configure as Al196 network card with Local View 07 Configure as Al2524 Router card 08 Configure as Al294 Ethernet Switch card 09 Configure as Al196 network interface card with menu support 10 Configure as Independent Smart Line Card 11 Configure as Al296 network interface card 12 Configure as Al192 196 with full menu support and slot expansion of 13 Configure as Al285 network interface card 14 Configure as Al232 network interface card 15 Configure as Al Modem 16 Configure as AlFlex Fiber LAN Extender Card 17 Configure as Al120 Card 18 Configure as AlE1 Card 19 Configure as AITC Card 20 Next Page 21 Exit this menu with no changes Enter item number and optional value then push lt CR gt key gt Types of Menu Items The following four types of menu items are available e Submenus e Toggles e Data e Functions 2 3 fj Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide
138. UTION If you are connected to Al296 through a serial port do not monitor the port with command di ag I i ne Use command hi de to hide and not monitor the port Failure to comply with this statement can cause Al296 to become unresponsive Command Type shell Formats diag line 9 47 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands diag line Examples This example displays a typical default line monitor display for asynchronous data 06 gt d FF 03 00 31 59 0C 08 06 59 0C AC 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 06 lt d FF 03 02 01 77 00 00 00 00 14 00 02 06 gt d FF 03 00 31 D3 5D 08 06 D3 5D AC 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 06 gt d FF 03 00 31 D3 5D 08 06 D3 5D AC 10 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 32 00 00 00 00 00 00 33 00 01 FF FF FF FF FF FF 00 00 92 9B pya lysie ca ee ae aes 01 08 00 06 04 00 01 00 00 92 9B Mc a 05 00 00 00 00 00 00 AC 10 22 79 Ml os y 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 80 00 00 40 72 00 6F wwe r o 80 00 00 40 72 00 6F 77 80 04 00 W ia r ow ORO ai aie 01 FF FF FF FF FF FF 00 10 48 DO T TT K 01 08 00 06 04 00 01 00 10 4B DO lao ob K D1 00 00 00 00 00 00 AC 10 20 EB B I ars A 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 FF FF FF FF FF FF 00 10 48 DO Kee Dn wet a wa K 01 08 00 06 04 00 01 00 10 4B DO H Pere ere K D1 00 00 00 00 00 00 AC 10 1E 82 lados as 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Column Description Line number Displays the line number which can
139. VC Connection e SVC to PVC Connection e PVC to SVC Connection e MLT Route SVC to SVC Connection In Figure 8 2 the X 25 data on the incoming Al296 is on baseport 16 link 2 and has a called address of 6145551234 The call continues on the outgoing Al296 on baseport 32 link 4 and called address 6145553897 Called Address 6145551234 Called Protocol IP Address TL1 172 16 1 111 TCP IP Network Al296 Incoming Al296 Outgoing Baseport 16 Baseport 32 Link 2 Link 4 Called Address 6145553897 Figure 8 2 SVC to SVC Connection Diagram 8 45 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Alias Configuration Examples This example displays the menu items used to configure the SVC to SVC connection gt 10 TL1 Menu 8 01 Alias name o 6145551234 02 SLC Routing 03 Destination 172 16 1 111 04 Called address lt lt o ocomorrrrr ete eee ete ee ee eee eee eee X25 4 6145553897 05 This alias is visible in the destination menu eeeeeee NO 06 Link number is 1 16 07 Caller s address 08 Call data 09 App string 10 Called protocol TL1 11 Caller s protocol 12 Alternate routing alias l6 Test macros 17 Show the first entry in the alias translation table 18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table 19 Delete the above alias translation entry 20 Save the changes made 21 Exit this menu with no changes Enter tem number and option
140. X 25 The following configuration components are available e Local IP Address for this Subnet e Local IP Subnet Mask e Local X 25 Link Number Local IP Address for this Subnet Description This menu item configures the local IXE doorway address for the subnet Note This address is not the same as the local Al296 IP address Menu Item Type Data Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 13 This menu displays a list of all the configured IP over X 25 subnets 2 From Menu 4 2 11 13 enter a value 02 through 11 associated with the IP over X 25 subnet to be configured Menu 4 2 11 13 1 appears 3 For01 Local IP address for this subnet enter the subnet IP address value The default is 0 0 0 0 This example displays 01 Local IP address for this subnet S ttO 24 35 132 67 gt 1 24 35 132 67 Menu 4 2 11 13 1 01 Local IP address for this subnet 024 035 132 067 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the IP Over X 25 Subnet Menu 2 From the IP Over X 25 Subnet Menu select add The IP Over X 25 Subnet Edit Menu appears 3 Fortocal IP Address for this Subnet enter the subnet IP address value Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide IP Over X 25 Subnet Configuration Local Settings This example displays Local IP Address for this Subnet Set tO 24 35 132 67 IP Over X 25 Subnet Edit Menu Local IP Address for this Subnet 2 1 1 0
141. a An a tr eee ee ere Nee eT ere re ee 6 52 Dialing Time out Interval sees eee eee 6 53 Number of Dial Attempts sun ias 6 54 PPP Authentication Configuration esse see eee eee eee eee eee 6 56 Local Authentication Settings eee ee eee eee eee 6 56 o se eee 6 58 Remote Authentication Settings sse ee eee eee eee eee eee 6 60 QUICK 4 259 Configuration usa ctas 6 62 Frame Settings A eP _ ee E 6 62 nn 6 63 Number OT PVCS alas 6 64 Packet Settings sese eee eee eee 6 65 Passive Link Settings siii dde 6 66 e eote a ee a ee ee 6 67 SVC Settings sese UP 6 68 J toc s Table of Contents IN XA 121 Local AddrESS escitas 6 69 RTS DTR Lead Control Configuration sss sese eee 6 71 DTR State Configuration sese eee eee eee 6 71 RTS State Configuration suo 6 72 X 25 Parameters Configuration esse eee eee 6 75 Maximum Packet SIZE secusrsunt as 6 75 pee ao Ae eee oda ee ce reece 6 76 Protocol Version socia inline 6 77 A 25 Counter SEHINOS sico de 6 78 X 25 Facilities Negotiation sarria 6 80 X 25 Timer Settings catala 6 81 PA Local FOOT OSS st AA 6 84 Virtual Circuit Configuration sesi n ida 6 85 N mberof PVCS ua la 6 85 PVC Configuration Settings citar 6 86 SVC Configuration Settings seer eee eee eee eee 6 90 Chapter 7 TID Multiplexing sss eee eee 7 1 62T 7 2 TID Multiplexing Configuration sec cs 7 4 Configuring the Parent Alias stats eee 7 4 Configuring the Children Aliases sese eee eee 7 7 Example Configurations isis 7 10 TID Multiple
142. a a a a a a aaa aaa a 1650000 TZE TERTRE Timet s ens e e moata a ee ae a a we RR 2300 0010 T28 Registration Timer s s trce 8 ee o ee d e a eo w ee ee a 0000 R20 Restart Counter a sos wick a a a e aod g a o LU R22 Reset Transmission Counter aoa a a a a a a a 18 R23 Clear Transmission Counter a a a a a a a a ee 34 R28 Registration Transmission Counter a oa a aa a a a pe ee ee 7 X 25 Facilities Negotiation Description This menu item allows the window size and packet size to be negotiated between connections when one end is set differently than the other When enabled Al296 initiates negotiation When disabled Al296 does not initiate negotiation but does respond to negotiation attempts made by the remote side Menu Item Type Toggle Link Type Availability X 25 Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 8 2 Foro1 x25 Facilities negotiation enter 1 to select on or off The default is off J 6 80 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration X 25 Parameters Configuration This example displays 01 X25 Facilities negotiation Set to on gt 1 Menu 4 2 11 12 8 01 X25 Facilities negotl ati on ON Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 2 3 Access the X 25 Link Menu Select x 25 Parameters Menu The X 25 Parameters Menu appears For X25 Facilities Negotiation Select Enabled Or Disabled The default is Disabled This example displays x25 Facilities
143. a dae 9 123 Appendix A Al296 System Codes sese A 1 X 25 Cause Codes and Diagnostic Codes sees A 2 Standard Reset Indication Cause Codes seer eee A 2 Kentrox Specific Reset Indication Cause Codes eee A 3 Standard Clear Indication Cause Codes sese eee eee A 3 Standard ISO Diagnostic Codes sese eee eee eee A 4 CCITT Diagnostic Codes sese ese eee A 4 Kentrox Specific Diagnostic Codes sese eee A 7 NN Table of Contents MAS e o e A 8 Common Crash Codes assi A 8 AI296 Crash Codes sse eee A 9 System Failure Crash Reports sese eee rss A 10 Kentrox Technical Support santi on A 11 Appendix B Standalone Mode and Switch Mode sss sese B 1 Standal e Mod score B 2 Downloading Software for a Standalone Al296 sss eee eee B 2 Configuring BOOTPATFTP acc i B 3 NE MI a aes oc e da B 4 Downloading Software for Al296 in Switch Mode sese ese eee eee eee B 4 Appendix C Commands for Al296 TACACS Server Enhancements C 1 AI296 COMMAN S sia C 2 Al296 Menu Aliases eee C 3 FIP Sessions nosna A o iia C 4 J roc s KENT Product Description This chapter provides an overview of the Al296 16 port high speed multi protocol line card Guide to this Chapter Features Al296 Hardware Components Technical Specifications Individual Port Access Typical Applications Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Product Description Features Features The Al296 16 port high speed multi protocol line card provides 16 physical ports for
144. aatacemne ieee ciaetanee ecenmutatens 6 6 BX 25 SUPDOM scs reinen epa anen aaa KEA ER EEEE tena E EA ENEA NEES 6 7 BX 25 Timer Settings eee eee eee eee cee sti 6 8 Connect Options Configuration sse eee eee eee eee 6 10 PNAS OE oo Eon A aA Paaa a as Eaa iaaii 6 10 Call Retry Interval eee eee 6 11 no retn nnnnsere rnent 6 12 Connection Settings cto ola 6 14 E Pe 6 16 Disconnect Options Configuration vieran a 6 18 Disconnect Inactivity Timer Settings sse eee eee ee eee eee 6 18 Disconnect Settings sse eser eee ee eee i 6 20 NN Table of Contents e 6 21 General Link Properties Configuration sse eee eee eee eee eee 6 23 Auto Disable Error Limit crias erat 6 23 FOW eels e 6 24 Hardware Interface Interface Type esse eee eee 6 25 Interface Pen 6 27 Link Description susi i 6 28 A PP PP oa bere caerenseuceeeeee a toes ia 6 29 Rules 6 30 IBI State ate pee tents cee ae ee 6 31 LinK A o ee ee ee eee 6 32 Passive Link with Clocking ss 6 33 Port RL NTT 6 34 PONE Tl 6 35 POM SPS T 6 36 Port Stop SI 6 38 Sync Port Encoding AP 6 39 Xon Repeat Interval si coi oi 6 40 General PPP Properties Configuration sees eee eee eee 6 42 IPCP sall Us LT 6 42 Maximum nennen 6 44 Network Control Protocol sese eee 6 45 LAPB Parameters Configuration siii 6 47 Frame SENOS neta aged aaria Enana 6 47 Interface Mode A O O 6 48 LAPB Time r Settings tc TOs 6 49 N2 Retry Counter arias 6 50 Modem Option Configuration sin seer eee eee 6 52 le
145. ability X 25 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the X 25 Link Menu 2 Select Quick X 25 Menu The Quick X 25 Menu appears 3 Forx25 Passive Link Mode Select Normal Passive Or Extended The default is Nor ma 4 ForPassive Link with Clocking Select Enabled Or Disabled The default is Disabled This example displays x25 Passive Link Mode Set to Passive and Passive Link with Clocking Set tO Enabled Quick X 25 Menu Link DELTO Configured ss a os p p he ee See e RE UR CR a A 02 nera MOE a iis ca wa Sa NO OR eR Oh OR ee ae we He Ta DTE DCE Port speed O external clocking 0 0 0 e 9600 X25 Passive Link Mode Nor mal Passive Extended Passive Link with Clocking ee uu Enabled Disabled Port Speed Description This menu item defines how many bits of data Al296 can transmit per second over a link Note There is an aggregate baud rate limitation of 359 kilobits per second for link groups 1 to 4 5 to 8 9 to 12 and 13 to 16 For example the total baud rate configured for links 1 to 4 must not exceed 359 kilobits per second If it does then the Al296 disables the links and reports an error Menu ltem Type Data Link Type Availability X 25 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the X 25 Link Menu 2 Select Quick X 25 Menu The Quick X 25 Menu appears 6 67 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Quick X 25
146. able Disables the specified AAA phases for the specified TACACS servers e enable Enables the specified AAA phases for the specified TACACS servers e server_range Specifies a server number or range of server numbers port Configures the TCP port number for specified TACACS servers The following parameters are accepted e Specifies all TACACS servers e port _number Defines the TCP port number for the TACACS servers Valid values are 1 through 65535 e server_range Specifies a server number or range of server numbers secret Configures the TACACS shared secret which is similar to a password for specified TACACS servers The following parameters are accepted e Specifies all TACACS servers e shared secret Defines the TACACS shared secret for the server or server range The maximum length of the shared secret is 24 characters e server_range Specifies a server number or range of server numbers summar y Displays a summary of TACACS server configuration settings for specified servers The following parameters are accepted e Specifies all TACACS servers e server_range Specifies a server number or range of server numbers J 9 100 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands tacacs server server_range Specifies a server number or range of server numbers The server number represents a server s priority level Al296 attempts to contact all servers in the range starting with th
147. acs server Display Item Description Continued IP Address Displays the configured TACACS IP addresses for the specified TACACS servers Port Displays the configured TACACS port numbers for the specified TACACS servers Secret Displays the TACACS shared secrets passwords for specified TACACS servers Phases Displays the AAA phases that are allowed for specified TACACS servers JJ 9 102 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands tail tail Description This command displays the last few lines of a file Command Type shell Formats tail n ines file name Note More than one file name can be specified in this command Parameters n Specifies that a line number value will be entered lines Defines the number of lines to display The default is 20 file_name Defines the name of the file to display Examples This example displays the last 10 lines of file userl og txt 296 tail n 10 userlog txt 14 09 46 072204 User pubs from 10 40 5 20 1309 has exited the shell 14 14 50 072204 User pubs from 10 40 5 20 1309 has entered the shell 16 17 53 072204 User pubs from 10 40 5 20 1309 has exited the shell 16 17 53 072204 User pubs from 10 40 5 20 1309 has logged out of the Destinat ion Menu 16 27 23 072204 User pubs from 10 40 5 20 1565 has logged into the Destinatio Menu 16 27 25 072204 User pubs from 10 40 5 20 1565 has entered the shell 17 44 07
148. age 8 32 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Source Destination Protocol Tables Table 8 13 X 25 PVC Source Without Breaks Al296 Source Destination Menu Item Information X 25 PVC X 25 SVC Alias name X25 ink_number cn Called The following options are available address e X25 ink_number called address 6 X25 ink_ number caller_address cal _user_data Note ca ed_address must be a valid X 121 address X 25 PVC X 25 PVC Alias name X25 ink_number cn Called PVC address Call data X25 ink_number cn X 25 PVC TCP Alias name X25 ink_number cn Called ip_address tcp port number address X 25 PVC Async Alias name X25 ink_number cn Called PVC address Call data ASY ink_ number Table 8 14 X 25 PVC Source With Breaks Al296 Source Destination Menu Item Information X 25 PVC TCP with Alias name X25 ink_number cn X 25 PVC telnet break and reply to Called ip_address tcp_ port number X 29 break address Caller s PAD Refer to PAD on page 8 30 protocol Called TN Refer to TN on page 8 35 protocol 8 25 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Source Destination Protocol Tables Table 8 14 X 25 PVC Source With Breaks Al296 Continued Source Destination Menu Item Information X 25 PVC Async with Alias name X25 ink_number cn X 25 PVC a
149. ained in the alias name The specified name must correspond to an alias that has been created in the Alias Menu If no alias name is specified and Link Application is Set to ALi as in the Al198 menu system AppAlias in the Al296 local menu system then a default alias is used The default alias is the concatenation of the string asy with the numeric link number such as asy 3 which indicates link number 3 Note Theo2 alias menu item is used only if 01 Link Application is Set to ALIAS AppAlias in the Al296 local menu system Menu Item Type Data Link Type Availability Async Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 11 2 Foro2 Alias enter2 and the alias name J 6 10 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Connect Options Configuration This example displays 02 Alias Set tO async 4 1 gt 2 async 4 1 Menu 4 2 11 12 11 01 Link Application Login Destination Alias ALIAS 02 Alias async 4 1 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the Async Link Menu 2 Select connect Options Menu The Connect Options Menu appears 3 Forlink Application Alias enter the alias value This example displays Link Application Alias SettO async 4 1 Connect Options Menu Link being configured e sor a RRR a a w RR 1 Link Application aaa s Login Destination AppAlias RTT Application AW aS i sea a es aa Sa Gow ado R async
150. al value then push lt CR gt key J 8 16 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Alias Configuration Examples SVC to PVC Connection In Figure 8 3 the X 25 data on the incoming Al296 is on baseport 16 1 T nk 2 witha called address of 6145551234 The call continues on the outgoing Al296 on baseport 32 link 1 Called Address 6145551234 Called Protocol IP Address TL1 172 16 1 111 TCP IP Network Al296 Incoming 88 Al296 Outgoing Baseport 16 Baseport 32 Link 2 Link 1 LCN 3 LCN 4 Figure 8 3 SVC to PVC Connection Diagram 8 47 fj Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Alias Configuration Examples This example displays the menu items used to configure an SVC to PVC connection gt 10 TL1 Menu 8 01 Alias name o 6145551234 02 SLC Routing 03 Destination 172 16 1 111 04 Called address PVC 05 This alias is visible in the destination menu NO 06 Link number is 1 16 07 Caller s address 08 Call data eee eee ee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee X25 1 4 09 App string 10 Called protocol TL1 11 Caller s protocol 12 Alternate routing alias l6 Test macros 17 Show the first entry in the alias translation table 18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table 19 Delete the above alias translation entry 20 Save the changes made 21 Exit this menu with no changes En
151. alias and IP configuration Al296 operates in standalone mode when it is installed in the Al110 chassis The following characteristics apply when Al296 is operating in standalone mode e The front panel Ethernet port is the default rather than the IRB e Al296 cards are not hot swappable the card configuration must be set up manually e Al296 has a unique system OID e The Al296 local menu system has slightly different options than when the card is running in switch mode Downloading Software for a Standalone Al296 To download software for Al296 in standalone mode 1 Open a command prompt window 2 Atthe command prompt start the FTP utility ftp 3 Atthe FTP prompt open Al296 open ip address ip_address Specifies the Al296 IP address The FTP utility prompts you for a user name and password 4 Putthe FTP utility in binary mode binary 5 Transfer the software image to Al296 put filepath imagename i mg filepath Defines the path to the software image file imagename Defines the software image file name Note Wait for a completion message after entering this command Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Standalone Mode and Switch Mode Standalone Mode 6 Exit the FTP utility 7 Login to the shell with a serial or Telnet connection 8 Update the existing boot program image with the new software image file update magename img boot i mg imagename Defines the software image file name 9 When t
152. ame a Ad wk ae async 4 1 Call Retry Interval 0 327675 0 disable 134 Connect String Description This menu item configures the string that is sent after a connection is established The following character values apply e lt b gt sends a break signal e lt n gt represents the decimal value of an ASCII character Valid values are 0 to 255 e text represents the text value in the string e lt p gt represents a pause control sequence is the number of tenths of seconds to pause Valid values are 1 to 20 for 0 1 seconds to 2 seconds For example string lt b gt ogi n lt 13 gt lt p 10 gt lt b gt Sends A break signal Text login A carriage return A 1 second pause Another break signal J 6 12 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Connect Options Configuration Menu Item Type Data Link Type Availability Async Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 11 2 For08 Connect string enter 8 and the connect string This example displays 08 Connect string Set tO lt b gt newstring lt 33 gt lt p 13 gt lt b gt gt 8 lt b gt newstring lt 33 gt lt p 13 gt lt b gt Menu 4 2 11 12 11 01 Link Application Login Destination Alias ALIAS 02 Ali TI async 4 1 03 Call retry interval 0 32767 s 0 disabled 00134 04 Dial Connect when DSR is On LLL N A 05 Con
153. ames continuously Passi ve Specifies that the DISC frame is not sent Al296 responds to an SABM with a UA If a remote system fails to respond to an RR frame enough times to exceed the maximum number of accepted retransmissions for unacknowledged frames then Al296 sends SABM frames continuously Ot her Specifies that an immediate disconnect frame DISC is sent if an RR has been sent enough times to exceed the maximum number of accepted retransmissions for unacknowledged frames and no reply has been received J 6 62 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Quick X 25 Configuration O Frame window size Specifies the number of frames the link can send before receiving confirmation that the first frame has been received correctly This means that data can continue to flow in situations where there may be long turn around time lags without stopping to wait for an acknowledgement Menu Item Type Toggle for frame level disconnect Data for frame window size Link Type Availability X 25 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the X 25 Link Menu 2 Select Quick X 25 Menu The Quick X 25 Menu appears 3 Forframe Level Disconnect Select Active Passive Or Other The default is Active 4 Forframe Window Size enter the window size The default is 7 This example displays Frame Level Disconnect setto Passive and Frame Window Size set to 4 Quick X 25 Menu Link Dei ng Configured s s dr a
154. ansmission Counter 2 eee ee eee 25 R23 Clear Transmission Counter ad ee e a ee 34 R28 Registration Transmission Counter o 52 Protocol Version 0 1980 1984 1988 X 25 Counter Settings Description The X 25 counter settings are configured using four menu items e R20 restart counter Defines the maximum number of times a reset can be sent without receiving reset confirmation O R22 reset transmission counter Defines the maximum number of times a reset can be sent without receiving clear confirmation O R23 clear transmission counter Defines the maximum number of times a clear request can be sent without clearing confirmation R28 registration transmission counter Defines the maximum number of times a registration request can be sent without receiving registration confirmation Menu ltem Type Data J 6 78 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration X 25 Parameters Configuration Link Type Availability X 25 Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access menu 4 2 11 12 8 2 For13 R20 restart count enter 13 and the counter value The default is 1 3 FOr14 R22 reset transmission count enter 14 and the counter value The default is 1 4 For15 R23 clear retransmission count enter 15 and the counter value The default is 1 5 Fori6 R28 registration retransmission count enter 16 and the counter value The default is 1 This e
155. ansmitter has run out of data due to the system being busy bad_tx_size Displays the number of times the transmit byte count was incorrect tx_blocked Displays a 1 if the transmitter is blocked Otherwise a 0 is displayed tx_delayed Displays the number of times the transmitter has been blocked Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands diag info Display Item Description state Displays the current state of the Ethernet interface The following values may appear e The Ethernet interface is uninitialized e 1 The Ethernet interface is idle e 2 The Ethernet interface is active e 3 The Ethernet interface needs to be reset eth intr stuck Displays the number of times the Ethernet interface interrupt has stuck while servicing the interrupt This example displays diagnostic information for TCP data which is accessed by typing T TCP IP INFO Copied ethernet receive packet 0 TCP keepalive failed 0 TCP max keepalive tries 1 Dropped SNMP request 0 Enter M emory A sync E thernet T cp or Q uit Display Item Description Copied ethernet receive packet Displays the number of copied Ethernet receive packets TCP keepalive failed Displays the number of TCP keep alive messages that have been sent and were expected to be received but were not received TCP max keepalive tries Displays the maximum number of TCP keep a
156. are using single alias translation for 03 Destination enter 3 and the IP address of Al296 By entering a destination value you are specifying the use of single alias translation For 04 Called address enter 4 and the called address For 07 Caller s address enter 7 and the caller s address Foro8 Cal data enter 8 and the call data information Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide TID Multiplexing TID Multiplexing Configuration 11 Foro9 App string enter TID tid tid Defines the TID of the destination NE Maximum length is 20 characters 12 optional For 10 Called protocol enter10 and the called protocol 13 For11 Caller s protocol enter 11 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System Note To configure aliases in the Al296 local menu system Al296 must be in standalone mode 1 Log in to the Al296 Main Menu 2 From the Al296 Main Menu select Alias Menu The Alias Summary Menu appears 3 From the Alias Summary Menu select Add Alias The Alias Edit Menu appears Alias Edit Menu Alias Name A O Callens Y a a a og ba A a de ieee its Galli AUTE O e o a A as Ca DATE 4 4 au ia aa ridad Hale AT Aa T tala A O EE Gaile Ss POMOC OI rar tod asas diario aa apt Ei lees cute Called Protocol E a a a e Rs Appl Peet iON SUMING a rr rr be eddie oo aa a aaa eas ALE er Mate ROUEC sn bees aadca A RN Desie tip ON ca te Ae s gaa ae A A Shae Mon tata yn oa ab lana ate won wee Display Alias in Dest
157. assive link configuration settings are configured using two menu items e X 25 passive link mode Defines the mode of operation for an X 25 link as one of the following e Normal Specifies the mode used for normal X 25 service e Passive Specifies the mode that allows Al296 to operate with the SCCS application of the AT amp T 5ESS The SCCS application requires redundant links at the 5ESS These links are called SCCOB and SCC1B Only one link is active at a time The 5ESS constantly tries to bring up whichever link is idle If the 5ESS has SCCOB active it will try to bring up SCC1B If SCC1B comes up the 5ESS will drop SCCOB and send information on SCC1B Passive mode ensures that either SCCOB or SCC1B will be up but not simultaneously e Extended Specifies the mode that supports passive link capability to the 5ESS over a TCP IP network Extended mode ensures that either SCCOA or SCC1A will be up but not simultaneously and will temporarily take down the corresponding link if connections fail or cannot be placed because the corresponding remote link is down e Passive link with clocking Enables or disables an X 25 passive link from supplying a clock value while the link is in the inactive state Note Old AT amp T 5ESS interface cards TN983 require clocking with the passive link set up Menu Item Type Toggle J 6 66 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Quick X 25 Configuration Link Type Avail
158. assword sent from the remote device Enabling RADIUS with fallback causes Al296 to attempt to use the ID and password information configured in the RADIUS server to validate the ID and password sent from the remote device If neither of the RADIUS servers respond Al296 uses the local ID and password configured in the PPP Authentication Menu for validation Enabling TACACS causes Al296 to use the ID and password information configured in the TACACS server to validate the ID and password sent from the remote device Enabling TACACS with fallback causes Al296 to attempt to use the ID and password information configured in the TACACS server to validate the ID and password sent from the remote device If neither of the TACACS servers respond Al296 uses the local ID and password entered in the PPP Authentication Menu for validation Notes When connecting to a remote PPP device ensure that the PPP authentication timeout on that device is set to a minimum of 30 seconds If the network latency is high set that value to a higher number of seconds 4 The TACACS server used must support version 1 78 or later of the TACACS protocol Menu Item Type Toggle Link Type Availability AsyncPPP and SyncPPP J 6 58 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration PPP Authentication Configuration Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Do one of the following e Foran asynchronous PPP link access Menu 4 2 11 12 2 1
159. asynchronous or X 25 connections between NEs and OSSs in a carrier s network Al296 includes the following features Break Propagation Al296 supports break propagation on X 25 asynchronous or TCP protocols Refer to Chapter 8 Alias and Call Routing Configuration for details about available types of break handling BX 25 Compatibility Al296 is BX 25 compatible and supports passive links DCD DSR RTS DTR Signal Lead Control Al296 supports user selectable disconnect on DCD low DCD high to low transition DSR low and DSR high to low transition Additionally Al296 allows for user selectable connection control of DTR RTS Dynamic Port Configuration Any X 25 or asynchronous parameter can be changed and individual links can be reconfigured without resetting Al296 X 25 and asynchronous parameters take effect after disabling and then re enabling the affected link EIA Lead Signaling Al296 can program the disconnected and connected states of EIA signals and toggle the leads The system can use EIA signaling to simulate modem style access to host computers These signaling options provide a secure and flexible connection to any asynchronous host or modem port Refer to command staeia on page 9 89 for more details IRB Connectivity Al296 communicates with other cards in the same chassis over an internal repeater bus It cannot communicate over the backplane with line cards that do not use the IRB Line Monitoring Diagnostics X 25 line mo
160. ats di ag info 9 37 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands diag info Examples This example displays the WAN Diag Info screen which is accessed by typing w LINK WAN DIAG INFO STATE TX_PEND RX_ WANT NO_ BUF BYTE_IN BYTE_OUT 30 0 1 0 0 759050 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Enter W an M emory A sync E thernet T cp or Q uit Column Description LINK Displays the link number STATE Displays the state of the WAN driver Two states are available e 0 means the X 25 frame level is not established e 30 means the X 25 frame level is established TX_ PEND Displays the state of the transaction if one is pending for transmission RX_ WANT Displays the state of the buffer if another buffer is needed NO_BUF Displays the number of times the receiver cannot be started because no buffers were available BYTE_IN Displays the count of the number of bytes coming in BYTE_OUT Displays the count of the number of bytes going out This example displays diagnostic information for STREAMS allocation and memory which are accessed by typing m J 9 38 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands diag info STREAMS ALLOCATION NAME FREE ALLOC FREE USED FAIL HWM Queues 8361 239 97
161. ault is oF F 4 Foro6 inactivity Timer resets on incoming characters from destination enter 6 to select on or off The default is on This example displays e 04 Disconnect inactivity timer Set to 236 05 Inactivity Timer enabled when link receives call set 0 on 06 lnactivity Timer resets on incoming characters from destination Set to OFF gt 12 Menu 4 2 11 12 12 01 Disconnect when DSR off ee rere eee eee ee eee ee eee eee eee N A 02 Disconnect when DCD off rere eee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee OF F 03 Disconnect when a break character is received ON 04 Disconnect inactivity timer 0 32767 s 0 disabled 00236 05 Inactivity Timer enabled when link receives call ON 06 l nactivity Timer resets on incoming characters from destination OFF Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the Async Link Menu 2 Select Disconnect Options Menu The Disconnect Options Menu appears 3 For Disconnect inactivity timer enter the timer value The default is 0 4 For Inactivity Timer enabled when link receives call select on or off The default iS Off 5 Forinactivity Timer resets on incoming characters from destination Select On or off The default is on This example displays Disconnect inactivity timer Set to 367 Inactivity Timer enabled when link receives call Set to on Inactivi
162. baseport 64 Al 198Al Switch She gt winslc 64 linkstat Al 198AIl Switch She Connection 22 gt 0A1 19815 40 40 072204 Sev F Base 064 Msg Connection 22 E DRCDF P Link N T TTC R K Speed Conn Rx Pkt Rx Bytes Tx Pkt Tx Bytes Rx CRC Rx Abt Rx Ovr Tx Und Intf A RSS DMT l1 Asy 9600 n 8 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RS 232 2 4DCE 9600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RS 232 3 DCE 9600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RS 232 4 4DCE 9600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RS 232 5 DCE 9600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RS 232 6 DCE 9600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RS 232 7 DCE 9600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RS 232 8 DCE 9600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RS 232 9 DCE 9600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RS 232 10 DCE 9600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RS 232 11 DCE 9600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RS 232 AI 19815 40 41 072204 Sev F Base 064 Msg 12 DCE lt 9600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RS 232 13 DCE e o 9600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RS 232 14 DCE lt 9600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RS 232 15 DCE o 9600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RS 232 16 DCE lt 9600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RS 232 Note The example has the terminal option set to 80 columns Setting the terminal to 132 columns is recommended 9 63 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands log Description This command turns the display of log messages on or off Command Type shell Formats log on off Parameters on Specifies the option that turns the display of log messages o
163. baud Port data DIES s e moa moa Ree ge A wok ue o e a Seven Ei ght POU SSO DIES ae aoa ae ae ae gi Gel ah Gt Sw are Ss he Re One Two Pott Parity es Y a a a A None Even Odd Port Speed Description This menu item defines the baud rate for a port Menu ltem Type Data in the Al296 local menu system Link Type Availability Async AsyncPPP HDLC Bridge MLT SyncPPP and X 25 Configuration in the Al198 Menu System Note The menu configuration has two variations based on the type of link being configured To configure the port speed on Async or AsyncPPP links 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 2 ForPort speed enter the associated item number JJ 6 36 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration General Link Properties Configuration Menu 4 2 11 12 5 appears gt 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 11520 Auto Menu 4 2 11 12 5 Baud Baud Baud Baud Baud Baud Baud Baud 0 Baud Baud Note 10 Auto Baud is not available for AsyncPPP 3 Entera value from 1 to 10 to select the port speed Menu 4 2 11 12 reappears with the new port speed selection This example displays 05 Port speed setto 4800 gt 4 01 03 Link 02 Link Link 04 Link 05 Port Menu 4 2 11 12 Number 116 01 Type Async X25 HDLC SyncPPP AsyncPPP MLT Async Description eee eee eee Async link 1 stat
164. bri24 Local PAP Password CHAP Secret a tar ea A lates ak A Gane ade er Goh ET documentation Remote Authentication Method 04 None PAP CHAP Remote PAP CHAP Identity 2 2 aa bri24 Remote PAP Password CHAP Secret o 1 ee ee documentation Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Quick X 25 Configuration Quick X 25 Configuration The Quick X 25 configuration menu is available only in the Al296 local menu system The following configuration items are available Frame Settings Interface Mode Number of PVCs Packet Settings Passive Link Settings Port Speed SVC Settings X 121 Local Address Frame Settings Description Frame settings are configured using two menu items Frame level disconnect Specifies the level at which a disconnect frame is sent The following options are available Acti ve Acknowledges that a link is disconnected when a disconnect frame DISC is sent and an unnumbered acknowledgment UA is received Some systems do not acknowledge the DISC frame with a UA but send a set asynchronous balanced mode frame SABM instead To bring this link up the system must be configured for a passive disconnect If a remote system fails to respond to a receive ready RR frame enough times to exceed the maximum number of accepted retransmissions for unacknowledged frames described in section N2 Retry Counter on page 6 50 then Al296 sends DISC fr
165. cacs Examples This example displays the TACACS authentication method for this shell connection aS Local 296 tacacs info Current session authenticated by Local 296 This example displays a TACACS debug log file 296 tacacs sholog 02 26 32 030406 192 168 001 074 AUTHEN FAIL 02 26 32 030406 192 168 001 089 AUTHEN SUCCESS 02 26 32 030406 192 168 001 074 AUTHOR FAIL 02 26 32 030406 192 168 001 089 AUTHOR SUCCESS This example displays all TACACS specific counters and statistics 296 tacacs stats TACACS Statistics Connect Attempts 0 Connect Failures o Wrong Header Type Wrong Header Sequence Number Wrong Header Session ID Wrong Body Length ocooo Write Errors Read Errors Short Header Received Short Body Received oooo Timed out waiting for response 0 296 Display Item Description Connect Attempts Displays the number of attempts that were made to connect to the TACACS server Connect Failures Displays the number of failed connection attempts that were made to the TACACS server Wrong Header Type Displays the number of packets received from the TACACS server that had an invalid type Wrong Header Displays the number of packets received from the TACACS O nue server that had a sequence number that was out of order 9 97 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands tacacs Display Item
166. called address or caller s address Called PVC address Call data ASY ink_number 8 23 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Source Destination Protocol Tables Table 8 12 X 25 SVC Source With Breaks Al296 Source Destination Menu ltem Information X 25 SVC TCP with Alias name Call user data or called address or X 25 SVC telnet break caller s address and reply to X 29 break Called ip_address tcp port number address Caller s PAD Refer to PAD on page 8 30 protocol Called TN Refer to TN on page 8 35 protocol X 25 SVC Al193 TX Alias name Call user data or called address or TCP with N caller s address protocol option Called ip_address tcp port number address Called AEP Refer to AEP on page 8 29 protocol X 25 SVC Async with Alias name Call user data or called address or X 25 SVC async break caller s address with TL1 Async TL1 packetizing with async Called PVC and X 29 break address break Async packetized Call data ASY ink_number on CR or Caller s The following options are available ie idle protocol e SVC PAD Refer to PAD on page 8 30 e SVC with TL1 PAD TL1 Refer to PAD on page 8 30 and TL1 on page 8 33 Called The following options are available protocol e Async leave blank e Async TL1 TL1 Refer to TL1 on page 8 33 e Async packetized PKT P13 12 Refer to PKT on p
167. character values are treated as data and forwarded next character Defines the next character in the sequence Valid values are e lt x gt where x represents the decimal ASCII value of the keystroke For example enter lt 9 gt to represent the TAB key e lt c gt x where lt c gt represents the CTRL key and x represents the actual key name For example enter lt c gt to represent CTRL SHIFT 6 lt c gt lt x gt where lt c gt represents the CTRL key and x represents the decimal ASCII value of the actual key name For example enter lt c gt lt 9 gt to represent CTRL TAB Note You can include multiple characters with delays between each in the break sequence For example lt c gt 1 5 x 0 9 k is a valid entry Menu Item Type Data Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 pg 2 2 From Menu 4 2 11 pg 2 enter 3 and the desired destination menu break sequence The maximum length is 44 characters The default is lt c gt 1 5 x This example displays item 03 Destination Menu Break Sequence configured as lt c gt 2 6 x gt 3 lt c gt 2 6 x Menu 4 2 11 pg 2 01 10 Base T Ethernet ee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee OFF 02 Radius Configuration Menu 03 Destination Menu Break Sequence o emmm lt c gt 2 6 x Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide System Configuration General System Properties Configuration Configuration in the Al296 Local Me
168. characters Setto Off Connect Options Menu Link being configured o a aaa a 1 Link Application o oa aaa ceo ok Login Destination AppAlias Link Application Alias E Sa che Nin we ee tuned ar eae eed tsetse fever eet async 4 1 Call Retry Interval 0 32767s 0 disable 4 134 Dial Connect when DSR is on SMe a AM Be ks Ge L M On Off Connect when DCD is on 2 On Of f Connect when characters are received by ad Ge ce A On Off Connect without DSR DCD or received characters On Off Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Connect Options Configuration Link Application Description This menu item configures the link application type The following options are available e Login Specifies that the link will prompt for a user name and password when connected Upon successful login a menu appears showing the available destination alias names Destination Specifies that the link does not accept incoming calls The link must be accessed internally using alias lookup from another link or from a TCP IP connection e Alias AppAlias Specifies that the link will attempt to place a call using direct alias lookup without displaying a destination menu If the link has a link application alias name configured then that name is used Otherwise a default alias name ASY i nkNum is used Menu Item Type Toggle Link Type Availability Async
169. cription The IPCP address settings are configured using three menu items e local IP address Defines a valid local IP address for Al296 O Remote IP address Defines an IP address for the remote device Subnet mask Defines a subnet mask for the link Menu Item Type Data Link Type Availability AsyncPPP and SyncPPP Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Do one of the following e Foran asynchronous PPP link access Menu 4 2 11 12 2 2 e For asynchronous PPP link access Menu 4 2 11 12 8 2 Foroi Network Control Protocol enter 1 to select pcp The default is Pcp 3 For02 Local IP Address enter 2 and the IP address Entering 0 0 0 0 specifies that the remote device will assign the IP address for Al296 The default is 0 0 0 0 4 For03 Remote IP Address enter 3 and the IP address Entering 0 0 0 0 specifies that the remote device will assign its own IP address The default is 0 0 0 0 5 Foro4 Subnet Mask enter4 and the subnet mask The default is 255 255 255 240 J 6 42 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration General PPP Properties Configuration This example displays 01 Network Control Protocol Set to PcP 02 Local IP Address Set tO 099 045 006 033 03 Remote IP Address Set O 106 046 092 004 04 Subnet Mask Set to 255 255 255 000 gt 4 255 255 255 000 Menu 4 2 11 12 8 01 Network Control Protocol IPCP BCB eee rere reese PCP 02 Local IP Address 099 045 006
170. ction on Al296 responds to RTRV HDR commands that have the same TID as the one configured for the card Y Tip For more information regarding TL1 commands responses and formats refer to the Belcore document GR 833 CORE RTRV HDR This command is used primarily as an aliveness check Format RTRV HDR tid ctag Parameters tid Defines the TID for Al296 Note that the TID and SID are the same ctag Defines the correlation tag used to correlate responses to input commands Each input command has a unique ct ag Maximum length is 6 characters Responses include the identical ct ag Normal Response Format This example displays the format of the response that appears when RTRV HDR Is successfully executed lt cr gt lt lf gt lt lf gt lt sp gt lt sp gt lt sp gt lt SI D gt lt sp gt lt YY MM DD gt lt sp gt lt HH MM SS gt lt cr gt lt l f gt M lt sp gt lt sp gt lt ctag gt lt sp gt COMPLD lt cr gt lt l f gt Table 7 1 describes each of the items in the above response format Table 7 1 RTRV HDR Response Format Description Response Item Description cr Specifies a carriage return If Specifies a line feed sp Specifies a space SID Specifies a system identifier system ID 7 15 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide TID Multiplexing TID Multiplexing Troubleshooting Table 7 1 RTRV HDR Response Format Description Continued Response It
171. cuous The ethernet chip is now in promiscuous mode promiscuous The ethernet chip is now in normal mode J 9 32 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands diag eth This example displays Ethernet diagnostic help information 296 diag eth hel p Commands for diag eth interpret Turn on data interpretation quit Exit diag eth hel p Display this help text data Toggle uninterpreted data display timestamp Toggle data timestampi ng go Begin data capturing stop Terminate data capturing filter Add a data filter promiscuous Toggle promiscuous mode for the ethernet chip This example displays the help associated with the Ethernet diagnostic f i t er command 296 diag eth filter Usage FILTER lt ADD DELETE gt SRC lt mac gt DST lt mac gt FILTER lt ADD DELETE gt SRC lt i pAddr gt DST lt i pAddr gt FILTER lt ADD DELETE gt SRC lt ipAddr port gt DST lt i pAddr port gt FILTER lt ADD DELETE gt SRC lt port gt DST lt port gt FILTER lt ADD DELETE gt PROTOCOL lt I P TCP UDP CMP ARP OSI gt FILTER lt ADD DELETE gt ALL FILTER LIST Where lt mac gt is the MAC address desired with the format XX XX XX XX XX XX with each X representing a hexidecimal digit lt i pAddr gt is the desired IP address with the format X X X X where 0 lt X lt 256 lt port gt is the desired TCP port 9 33 Al296 Version 9
172. d 0x89 Memory resource error a7 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 System Codes Crash Codes Crash Codes Crash codes report to the log port when a card crashes and you receive an Alswitch fault message This message indicates that the system has detected a serious hardware or software fault Common Crash Codes These codes are common to all software not just Kentrox products The first column of Table A 7 displays the hexadecimal code for the error message The second column displays the decimal value for the same message The third column provides a description of the error message Contact Kentrox Technical Support to report any of the following crash codes Table A 7 Common Crash Codes Error Code Error Code Desertion Hexadecimal Decimal P 0001 1 Specifies a bus error 0002 2 Specifies an address error 0003 3 Specifies an illegal instruction 0004 4 Specifies a zero divide error 0005 5 Specifies a check instruction trap 0006 6 Specifies a TRAPV error 0007 7 Specifies a privilege error 0008 8 Specifies a trace trap 0009 9 Specifies an unused exception vector 09xx gt 264 Specifies an illegal vector xx is the vector number non zero used in place of the codes above to ensure that the exact vector number is determined if an exception occurs Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 System Codes Crash Codes Al296 Crash Codes
173. d Telnet Port Description This item sets the Telnet port value for Al296 Menu ltem Type Data Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 2 For15 Telnet port number enter 15 and the desired port number value Valid values are 1 to 65534 The default is 23 This example displays 15 Telnet port number setto 122 gt 15 122 Menu 4 2 11 pg 1 01 IP Address 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 254 010 040 057 015 02 IP Address Range 1 255 eee eee eee eee ee ee eee eee ee ee ee ee eee 001 03 IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 1 255 255 255 254 255 255 000 000 04 Primary IP Router Address 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 254 010 040 000 001 05 Secondary IP Router Address 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 254 000 000 000 000 0D6 TCP Default Window Size 200 512 1024 2048 1024 O7 TCP Send Ahead ON 08 5NMP System Parameters 09 Bring passive link down when all calls have cleared ON 10 Passive link Stay Inactive timer 000050 11 Passive link Standby Mode timer rr 000020 12 Link Setup 13 1P Over X 25 Subnets 14 1P Static Routes 15 Telnet port number 1 65534 eee eee eee ee eee eee eee 00122 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the System Menu 2 ForTelnet Port enter the desired value The default is 23 J m2 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide System Configurati
174. ddress Set tO 010 038 000 002 gt 5 10 38 0 2 Menu 4 2 11 pg 1 01 IP Address 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 254 010 038 049 012 02 IP Address Range 1 255 eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee 003 03 IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 1 255 255 255 254 255 255 000 000 04 Primary IP Router Address 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 254 010 038 000 001 05 Secondary IP Router Address 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 254 010 038 000 002 Note For information about configuring IP setting with shell commands refer to commands ip on page 9 56 and ip init on page 9 57 4 7 fj Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide System Configuration General System Properties Configuration Passive Link Settings Description The passive link settings are configured using three menu items The configurable values are Passive link down state Configures standby DMlock mode for a passive link When this feature is turned on a passive link will go into DMlock mode after all calls have cleared When turned off a passive link will stay up when all calls have cleared Passive link stay inactive timer Sets the number of seconds a passive link waits for a connection to come up before failing Passive link standby mode timer Configures the amount of time a link remains in standby mode before it becomes idle Immediately after a passive link becomes inactive it goes into the standby DMlock
175. de Al296 Commands aaa Enables or disables TACACS authentication for Al296 command shell access TACACS authentication may be enabled on all connections or on aconnection type basis By default TACACS authentication is disabled on all connection types The following parameters are accepted e al tEnables or disables TACACS authentication on all connection types Note If no connection type is specified a is automatically selected e async Enables or disables TACACS authentication on asynchronous link connections e disabl e Disables TACACS authentication enabl e Enables TACACS authentication f tp Enables or disables TACACS authentication on FTP connections e telnet Enables or disables TACACS authentication on Telnet connections Configures the TACACS authorization method for the Al296 shell The authorization method can be either privilege level or per command Privilege level authorization is based on the priv lvl returned from the TACACS server Per command authorization requires Al296 to contact the TACACS server for each shell command run by a user Individual commands are then allowed or denied Note Authorization is performed only on the connection types that have enabled authentication For information about enabling authentication refer to command aaa authen The following parameters are accepted e command Configures the TACACS authorization method that requires to contact th
176. e p_address phase server_range disable enable account all authen author port server_range port number secret server _ range shared secret Summary server range Parameters t Specifies all TACACS servers default Disables all servers in the range and sets all configuration values to their defaults disable Disables the TACACS server or range of TACACS servers enable Enables the TACACS server or range of TACACS servers ip Configures an IP address for specified TACACS servers Note Al296 does not prevent users from configuring multiple server entries with the same IP address The following parameters are accepted e Specifies all TACACS servers e server_range Specifies a server number or range of server numbers e p_address Defines the server IP address 9 99 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands tacacs server phase Configures the AAA phases that are allowed for specified TACACS servers The following parameters are accepted e Specifies all TACACS servers e account Enables or disables the accounting phase for the specified TACACS servers e al tEnables or disables all AAA phases for the specified TACACS servers e aut hen Enables or disables the authentication phase for the specified TACACS servers author Enables or disables the authorization phase for the specified TACACS servers e dis
177. e Al296 and the remote device are negotiating basic information on how the connection will operate e AUTHENTI CcATE Indicates the link is up but not connected The link is validating ID and password information with the remote device e nerwrk Indicates the link is up but not connected The link is negotiating the local and remote IP addresses RUNNI NG Indicates the link is up and connected IPCP is running on the link The Al296 and the remote device can transfer IP packets over the link J 9 74 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands pppstatus Column Description Local IP Addr Displays one of the following e The IP address of Al296 if the link status is RUNNI NG e N A if the link status is NI TI ALI ZE SERI ALCONN ESTABLI SH AUTHENTICATE OF NETWORK Remote IP Addr Displays one of the following e The IP address of the remote device if the link status is RUNNI NG e N A if the link status is NI TI ALI ZE SERI ALCONN ESTABLISH AUTHENTICATE OF NETWORK 9 75 profile Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands profile Description This command allows a user account profile to be customized The following six system profiles are maintained Supervisor Management Status Empty Destination menu Connect Profile names are limited to 19 characters Only 20 user configurable profiles are allowed to be configured at
178. e Enabled Disabled eee eee eee Enabled O L 4800 To configure the port speed on an HDLC Bridge MLT SyncPPP or X 25 link 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 2 ForPort speed enter the associated item number a comma and the port speed value This example displays 06 Port speed Set to 19200 01 03 06 gt 19200 Link 02 Link Link 04 Li nk Port Menu 4 2 11 12 number 1 16 e eee eee eee eee ee ee eee eee ee ee eee eee ee 13 Type Async X25 HDLC SyncPPP AsyncPPP MLT HDLC Description eee eee eee state Enabled Disabled eee e eee eee Disabled speed 0 128000 bps 0 is external clocking 019200 6 37 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration General Link Properties Configuration Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the Link Menu 2 For Port speed Select 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 57 6K 115 2K Or Autobaud The default is 9600 This example displays Port speed Set to 4800 Async Link Menu Lik EO Toni gure isea ye ko aa a Rok Ae eR ee me ad Link state eo ee at Were eae Gena Cees Oe ee ee oe oe Up Down Link Type Async X 25 HDLC Bridge SyncPPP AsyncPPP MLT Interface Type ewe ea es RS 232 RS 530 V 35 Port speed in bits per second 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K
179. e For asynchronous PPP link access Menu 4 2 11 12 7 2 Foro01 RAs Option enter 1 to select DISABLED RADI US RADI US FR TACACS OF TACACS FB The default is DI SABLED This example displays 01 RAS Option set to tacacs for an asynchronous PPP link gt 1 Menu 4 2 11 12 2 1 01 RAS Option DISABLED RADI US RADI US tB TACACS TACACS FB TACACS Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System To configure RADIUS PPP authentication 1 Access the AsyncPPP Link Menu or SyncPPP Link Menu 2 Select ppp Authentication Menu The PPP Authentication Menu appears 3 Forras Option select Disabled RADIUS RADI US Fall back TACACS OF TACACS Fall back The default is Disabled This example displays RAS Option Set to RADI US Fall back PPP Authentication Menu Link being configured lt s q g p eb oe be a he ew ew Ge wee ee ee a 3 Authentication Options Local Authentication Method uy None PAP CHAP RAS Option Disabled RADI US RADI US Fal back TACACS TACACS Fall back 6 59 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration PPP Authentication Configuration Remote Authentication Settings Description The remote authentication settings are configured using three menu items Remote authentication method Defines the remote authentication method as one of the following options e pap specifies the method that uses a two way handshake that is done only upon
180. e RE ag a ee PP Recetas Send authentication traps ee On Of f SNMP Manager El sari la SP GOW Ga OS 10 35 0 30 SNMP Manager Elo s mu muss de wow we A ow A A Roe Rhos 10 35 0 60 SNMP Manager 3 a mom an Pe ah Hh ae i Pe a te ho he we Gee is 10 35 0 20 SNMP Manager 4 lt RRR RRR OS 0 0 0 0 SNMP Manager 5 s pru a E e ea a Geter ee 0 0 0 0 Read Community Name aaa ReadComm MIB2 Read Community Name 1 pe a MI B2 Write Community Name oa aaa a Writ eComm 4 23 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide System Configuration SNMP Configuration Contact Persons Description This item defines the name of the person to contact regarding a specific node Menu Item Types Data Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 8 2 Forol Contact person for this node enter 1 and the desired contact person The maximum length is 40 characters The following example displays ohn Doe configured for menu item 01 Contact person for this node gt 1 J ohn Doe Menu 4 2 11 8 01 Contact person for this node eee ee eee eee ee ee eee John Doe Al296 Local Menu Item Configuration 1 Access the SNMP Menu located under the System Menu 2 Forcontact person for this managed node enter the contact person The maximum length is 40 characters The following example displays ohn Doe configured for menu item Contact person for this managed node SNMP Menu Con
181. e TACACS server for each shell command run by a user Individual commands are then allowed or denied e priv vl Configures the TACACS authorization method based on the priv lvl returned from the TACACS server Changes the current user s password on the TACACS server L Note The TACACS server may not support or be configured to support password changes Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands aaa fall back ppp aut hen Enables or disables TACACS fallback for shell access If TACACS fallback is enabled and attempts to contact all configured TACACS servers fail then Al296 s user database is used for authentication and authorization The Al296 local log file is used for accounting The following parameters are accepted 6 disabl e Disables TACACS fallback e enabl e Enables TACACS fallback Enables or disables TACACS authentication and sets the fallback mode for specified AsyncPPP links Note The link type must be set to AsyncPPP for this command to have any effect The following parameters are accepted e Specifies all links di sabl e Disables TACACS authentication enabl e Enables TACACS authentication f al back Enables TACACS authentication with fallback i nk_range Defines a link or range of links Valid values are 1 to 16 Individual values are separated by commas and hyphens For example 1 4 6 specifies links 1 4 5 and 6 profile retry
182. e Unit 128 1568 eee eee eee ee eee eee 1000 06 Maximum Transmit Unit 64 1600 eee eee eee eee eee ee ee 0900 J 6 44 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration General PPP Properties Configuration Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the AsyncPPP or SyncPPP Link Menu 2 Select ppp Configuration Menu The PPP Configuration Menu appears 3 For Maximum Receive Unit enter the byte value The defaults are 1518 for network control protocol scr and 1500 for network control protocol Pcp 4 For Maximum Transmit Unit enter the byte value The defaults are 1518 for network control protocol scr and 1500 for network control protocol Pcp This example displays Maximum Receive Unit setto 1000 and Maximum Transmit Unit setto 900 for an nC network control protocol PPP Configuration Menu A A O A A ae E may a OA TRR e E R E P R R 3 Network Control Protocol s wos poe eoe d e e w o 4 PCP BCP PCP Address Parameters bocal A Bo Gb Go amp Bk dai dh oo ae Do he 0 0 0 0 Remote IP address a a s amp ece g a e aow Book e a a 0 0 0 0 CIR 2 MaSK e a Ck ae la Se de ch o we dh hd oh ds ok Ce ee e S 255 255 255 240 Maximum Receive Unit 2 o 1000 Maximum Transmit Unit o aaa a 900 Network Control Protocol Description This menu item defines the network control protocol as BCP or IPCP BCP configures e
183. e baseport number for Al296 Examples This example displays what happens when host 172 16 30 110 replies to a ping 296 ping 172 16 30 110 Pinging host 172 16 30 110 ICMP Echo Reply TTL 60 Host 172 16 30 110 replied to the ping The TTL time to live is the number of jumps or hops the message is allowed to take This example displays what happens when no reply is received from host 172 16 30 114 296 ping 172 16 30 114 Pinging host 172 16 30 114 Host 172 16 30 114 didn t reply to the ping 9 73 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands pppstatus pppstatus Description This command displays the status of all ModMux and asynchronous PPP IPCP links If IPCP is running on the link the link status is Runni NG this command also displays the local and remote IP addresses Command Type shell Formats pppstatus Examples This example displays the status of all PPP IPCP links 296 pppstatus Link Phase Local IP Addr Remote IP Addr 1 ESTABLISH N A N A 14 SERIALCONN N A N A 296 Column Description Link Displays the link number Phase Displays the status of the link Values are e niTIALIZE Indicates the link is down e sERIALCONN Indicates the link is up but not connected The link is waiting for the data carrier detect DCD signal or the data set ready DSR signal to come up e ESTABLI H Indicates the link is up but not connected Th
184. e lowest numbered ones If the connection to server 1 fails Al296 will attempt to contact server 2 and so on Valid values are 1 to 9 Individual values are separated by commas and hyphens For example 1 4 6 specifies servers 1 4 5 and 6 Command Defaults Disabled Examples The following TACACS server settings are configured for server numbers 1 4 and 7 Enabled TACACS servers IP address 12 56 120 4 Disabled accounting phase Port number 32500 Secret newguy 296 tacacs server 1 4 7 enable 296 tacacs server ip 3 12 56 120 4 296 tacacs server phase 1 5 8 disable account 296 tacacs server port 7 9 32500 296 tacacs server secret 8 newguy This example displays all configured TACACS servers and server settings 296 tacacs server summary Server IP Address Port Secret Phases 1 000 000 000 000 49 Authen Author 2 000 000 000 000 49 Authen Author 3 012 056 120 004 49 Authen Author 4 012 012 012 012 49 Authen Author 5 012 012 012 012 49 Authen Author 6 012 012 012 012 49 Authen Author Account de 000 000 000 000 32500 Authen Author Account 8 000 000 000 000 32500 newguy Authen Author 9 000 000 000 000 32500 Authen Author Account 296 Display Item Description Server Displays the server numbers The signs indicate if the associated servers are enabled or disabled 9 101 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands tac
185. e sa s r oom 2 Mk Mok a a ee eee Boe Bow ws 03 BX 25 Support a aaa ee Enabled Disabled BX 25 Timer Settings Description The initial BX 25 timer settings are configured using two menu items e Connect timer sTr2 Defines the maximum number of seconds that the BX 25 protocol will wait for a response to a session connect request e Send timer sTr3 Defines the data acknowledge timer which gives the maximum number of seconds that the BX 25 protocol will wait for an acknowledgement to a Data Request Menu Item Type Data Link Type Availability X 25 Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 2 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 11 For 05 Connect Timer 572 enter 5 and the connect timer value Valid values are 0 to 65535 The default is 12 Foro6 Send Timer S73 enter 6 and the send timer value Valid values are o to 65535 The default is 18 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration BX 25 Configuration This example displays 05 Connect Timer sT2 Setto33 and 06 Send Timer sT3 setto 45 gt 6 35 Menu 4 2 11 12 11 01 BX25 Support Enabled DI sabl edi eee eee eee Enabled 02 Use these configuration values Enabled Disabled Enabled 03 Sending Unit Number 0 9 eee eee eee ee eee eee ee eee eee 2 04 Modulo 5 256 e e ee eee ee eee ee eee eee eee ee eee ee eee eee eee eee 122 05 Connect Timer ST2 Seconds reer eee ene eee eee eee eee 000
186. ecifies links 1 4 5 and 6 Specifies all links baseport Defines the baseport number for Al296 Examples This example displays PVC information for link 1 296 pvclist 1 PVC list tasy 1 1 it 0 ASD state idle muxid 0 fd 65 flags 0020 296 Column Description First column Displays the PVC protocol type link number and LCN logical channel number JJ 9 80 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands pvclist Column Description Second column Displays the timer type for the PVC Possible values are e lt t Displays the connect timer if the PVC is active The number indicates the timer setting in seconds e it Displays the inactivity timer if the PVC is a connect on activity PVC The number indicates the timer setting in seconds 6 Passive Appears if the PVC is a passive type of PVC Third column Defines the state of the PVC Possible values are e dle Indicates the PVC is ready to connect e dataxfer lIndicates the PVC is connected and able to pass data incon Indicates the PVC is in a transition state attaching Indicates the PVC is in a transition state not attached Indicates that the PVC is not connected detached Indicates the PVC is in a transition state If the display indicates one of the transition states this should only appear for a short period of time If the state remains in this condition contact Technical Support
187. ecimal base 10 format Octal numbers have a leading zero and hexadecimal numbers have a leading Ox Refer to the Table 8 17 for more information e Type characters as their ASCII value e Do not use decimal points tabs or spaces when entering arguments e Enter at least one value when a d option is included with an argument d represents the ASCII value for a character Valid values are from 0 to 255 Table 8 17 displays descriptions for protocol argument entries Table 8 17 Protocol Argument Entries Entry Description Ox0d Specifies a carriage return in hexadecimal format 59 Specifies a semi colon in decimal format 0141 Specifies letter a in octal format 55 Specifies number 7 in ASCII decimal format 8 37 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Alias Macros Alias Macros An alias macro is a program within an alias that translates incoming call requests into outgoing call requests It is a shortcut that allows a programmer to write many aliases by only writing one macro Macros allow routing calls with fewer aliases Using them with alternate routing provides multiple routes for a single alias A macro may be entered for combinations of any or all of the following items Alias names called addresses caller s addresses call data application specific strings alternate routing aliases The following topics are covered in this section
188. ed address eee ee eee eee ee ee ee ee eee ee eee eee eee 05 This alias is visible in the destination menu 06 Link number is 1 16 07 Caller s address 08 Ca data 09 App string 10 Called protocol 11 Caller s protocol reer eee ee eee eee eee eee eee tees 12 Alternate routing alias 14 Test macros 15 Show entire alias 16 Show the first entry in the alias translation table 17 Show the previous entry in the alias translation table 18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table 19 Delete the above alias translation entry 20 Save the changes made 20b to the beginning 20e to the end 21 Exit this menu with no changes Enter item number and optional value then push lt CR gt key gt Menu 8 30 200 5000 EX Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Call Routing Call Routing To route calls with Al296 you must configure an alias for a source and destination protocol Note Aliases created in Al198 are not visible to Al296 when it is running in standalone mode However you can configure aliases in the Al296 local menu system when it is in standalone mode Configuring an Alias in the Al198 Menu System Note Specific configuration information about menu items in the following procedure is located in section Source Destination Protocol Tables for the Al198 Menu System on page 8 12 To configure an alias in
189. efault iS 200 3 Foro7 tcp Send Ahead enter 7 to select off or on The default is oF This example displays 06 TCP Default Window Size setto 1024 and 07 TCP Send Ahead set to oN gt 7 Menu 4 2 11 pg 1 01 IP Address 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 254 eeeee eee ee eee 010 040 057 015 02 IP Address Range 1 255 LL 001 03 IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 1 255 255 255 254 e 255 255 000 000 04 Primary IP Router Address 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 254 010 040 000 001 05 Secondary IP Router Address 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 254 000 000 000 000 06 TCP Default Window Size 200 512 1024 2048 1024 O7 TCP Send Ahead e eee ee eee eee eee eee eee ON Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 2 3 Access the System Menu For TCP Default Window Size Select 200 512 1024 or 2048 The default is 200 For TCP Send Ahead Select Enabled Or Disabled The default is Disabled 4 11 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide System Configuration General System Properties Configuration This example displays TCP Default Window Size Setto1024 and TCP Send Ahead Set to Enabled System Menu System Prompt i ok Shed Chee hie ea rada a Destination Menu Break Sequence 1 a eee eee o NewPrompt see pS Ce el SX TCP Default Window Size 200 512 1024 2048 TCP Send Ahead soo oo eee eR ee 4 6 we ee Enabled Disable
190. efer to PAD on page 8 30 protocol 8 19 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Source Destination Protocol Tables Table 8 8 TCP IP Source With Telnet Breaks Al198 Continued Source Destination Menu item Information TCP Async with Alias name ip_address tcp port pU mnp er async break Called PVC address Call data ASY ink_number Caller s TN Refer to TN on page 8 35 protocol Source Destination Protocol Tables for the Al296 Menu System The following tables are organized according to source protocols Match the destination protocol with the source protocol to find the appropriate menu item entries e Asynchronous Source Without Breaks Al296 e Asynchronous Source With Breaks Al296 e X 25 SVC Source Without Breaks Al296 e X 25 SVC Source With Breaks Al296 e X 25 PVC Source Without Breaks Al296 e X 25 PVC Source With Breaks Al296 e TCP IP Source Without Telnet Breaks Al296 e TCP IP Source With Telnet Breaks Al296 Table 8 9 Asynchronous Source Without Breaks Al296 Source Destination Menu Item Information Async Async Alias name ASY ink_number Called PVC address Call data ASY ink_ number J 8 20 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Source Destination Protocol Tables Table 8 9 Asynchronous Source Without Breaks Al296 Continued
191. ell 9 115 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands update update Description This command displays information about the image and configuration files When entered with arguments this command updates Al296 software Update the software by copying a new image or configuration file to a destination file Command Types shell and winslc Formats For the shell command update src file dest file For the winslc command winslc baseport update src file dest file Parameters src_file Defines the source file to copy dest_file Defines the file where the source file is to be stored baseport Defines the baseport number for Al296 Note Thesrc file andthe dest_fi e must both have a file extension of either cnf or img Examples This example displays the update of source image file 296 i mg to destination image file boot img 296J update 296 i mg boot img 296 J o 116 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands uptime uptime Description This command displays the current time and the amount of time Al296 has been running since it was last booted Command Type shell Formats uptime Examples This example displays the current time and the amount of time Al296 has been running since it was last booted 296 upti me 1 33pm up 2 days 23 08 40 uptime rolls over every 497 days 2 27 52 296 9 117 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide A
192. em Description YY MM DD Specifies the date HH MM SS Specifies the time of day ctag Specifies the correlation tag COMPLD Specifies completion The Input requirement is satisfied Normal Response Example This example displays the response that appears when RTRV HDR Al 232 12345 is executed A1296 97 01 01 05 06 39 M 12345 COMPLD Error Response Format If Al296 receives TL1 commands other than RTRV HDR with the same card TID it responds with a deny message This example displays the deny message format lt cr gt lt lf gt lt lf gt lt sp gt lt sp gt lt sp gt lt SI D gt lt sp gt lt YY MM DD gt lt sp gt lt HH MM SS gt lt cr gt lt l f gt M lt sp gt lt sp gt lt ctag gt lt s p gt DENY lt cr gt lt lf gt lt sp gt lt sp gt lt sp gt lt errcde gt lt cr gt lt l f gt Table 7 2 describes each of the items in the above response format Table 7 2 Error Response Format Description Response Item Description cr Specifies a carriage return If Specifies a line feed sp Specifies a space SID Specifies a system identifier system ID YY MM DD Specifies the date HH MM SS Specifies the time of day ctag Specifies the correlation tag DENY Specifies that the input requirement is not satisfied J 7 16 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide TID Multiplexing TID Multiplexing Troubleshooting Table 7 2 Error Response Format Descript
193. en RS 232 is selected Signals with both and after them are used when RS 530 V 35 or V 11 are selected When RS 530 is selected both the and the signals are used The DSR is only supported in RS 232 mode There is no DSR signal 4 Note The pin assignments also apply to CAB257 RJ45 10BaseT Connectors Figure 1 4 displays the RJ45 10BaseT connector Pin 1 Pin 8 Figure 1 4 RJ45 10BaseT Connector on an Al296 Front Panel Figure 1 4 lists the specifications for the RJ45 10BaseT connector Table 1 4 RJ45 10BaseT Connector Specifications Pin Signal Direction 1 TD Output 2 TD Output 3 RD Input 6 RD Input CAB182 cables connect network elements to the individual connectors on the distribution panel straight through applications J 1 10 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Product Description Typical Applications Typical Applications Al296 is used primarily for X 25 trunking and connecting different types of network elements The following applications are discussed in this section e Asynchronous to TCP IP Application e IP Over X 25 Networks e Mixed Asynchronous and X 25 Networks e X 25 to TCP IP Application e X 25 Trunking Asynchronous to TCP IP Application Figure 1 5 illustrates an asynchronous to TCP IP application
194. ent time 081104 Specifies the current date Sev F Specifies the message severity level Base 016 Specifies the line card baseport number Msg Introduces the log alarm message Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands aaa aaa Description These commands configure TACACS accounting authentication and authorization settings Command Type shell Formats aaa account disable enable authen disable enable all async telnet ftp author priv lvl command chpass fallback disable enable ppp authen ink_range disable enable fallback profile priv range profile name default retry retry_count default stat clear summar y timeout timeout value default Parameters account Enables or disables TACACS accounting of user login events and shell command events An accounting start packet or stop packet is issued each time a user logs into or out of Al296 An accounting start packet is also issued for each shell command that is run Note If enabled accounting is performed for all shell connection types Async Telnet and FTP even if authentication is disabled For information about authentication refer to command aaa authen The following parameters are accepted e disabl e Disables TACACS accounting e enabl e Enables TACACS accounting authen author chpass Al296 Version 9 8x User s Gui
195. enu Item Configuration 1 Access the TID to Modem Mux Menu located under the System Menu 2 From the TID to Modem Mux Summary Menu select Add 11D The TID To Modem Mux Edit Menu appears 3 ForTiD to route enter the desired TID Maximum length is 20 characters This example displays the TID configured as cOLUMBUS OH TID To Modem Mux Edit Menu TUD ti TOULE m kk ae Beer ae A es a a a COLUMBUS OH J 4 32 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide System Configuration Time Configuration Time Configuration Al296 supports the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP SNTP is a time protocol that maintains a common time among Internet hosts Note Time configuration options are only available when Al296 is operating in standalone mode The following configuration items are available e Daylight Savings Time e SNIP Settings e Time Zone Daylight Savings Time Description There are eight menu items available for configuring Daylight Savings Time e Start On and End 0on Configures the numbered day to start or end Daylight Savings Time e Start Day andEnd Day Configures the day of the week to start or end Daylight Savings Time e Start Month and End Mont h Configures the month to start or end Daylight Savings Time e Start Hour ANd End Hour Configures the hour of the day to start or end Daylight Savings Time Menu ltem Types Toggle Al296 Local Menu Item Configuration 1 Access the System Me
196. er s Guide Al296 Local Menu System Exiting the Local Menu System Exiting the Local Menu System To exit the local menu system and save all changes 1 Select lt F2 gt Send and press ENTER The following prompt appears Save changes y n 2 Save the changes y 3 Select lt F4 gt Close and press ENTER until you are out of the menu system To exit the local menu system without saving changes execute step 3 Note Entering lt CTRL gt R takes you directly to the main menu J 3 10 KENT system Configuration This chapter provides information on configuring Al296 system settings with the Al198 menu system and the Al296 local menu system To configure Al296 with the Al198 menu system the Al198 software must be at version 1 90 or later The Al198 menu system settings take effect only when Al296 is operating in switch mode non standalone mode Guide to this Chapter General System Properties Configuration RADIUS Configuration TAGACS Configuration SNMP Configuration Static Route Configuration TID to Modem Mux Configuration Time Configuration Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide System Configuration General System Properties Configuration General System Properties Configuration General system properties are configurable at the first level of the Al198 and Al296 System menu The following menu items can be configured e Destination Menu Break Sequence e Ethernet Port Settings e FTP Por
197. er Called The following options are available address e X25 ink_number called_address e X25 ink_number caller_address call_user_data Note ca ed address must be a valid X 121 address TCP X 25 PVC Alias name ip_address tcp_port_ number Called PVC address Call data X25 ink_number cn J sas Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Source Destination Protocol Tables Table 8 7 TCP IP Source Without Telnet Breaks Al198 Continued Source Destination Menu item Information TCP TCP Alias name p_address tcp_port_number Called ip_address tcp_ port_number address TCP Async Alias name p_address tcp_port_ number Called PVC address Call data ASY ink_number Table 8 8 TCP IP Source With Telnet Breaks Al198 Source Destination Menultem Information TCP X 25 SVC Alias name ip_address tcp_port_number with X 29 break Called The following options are available address e X25 ink number called address e X25 ink_number caller address call_user_data Note ca ed address must be a valid X 121 address Caller s TN Refer to TN on page 8 35 protocol Called PAD Refer to PAD on page 8 30 protocol TCP X 25 PVC Alias name ip_address tcp_port_ number with X 29 break Called PVC address Call data X25 ink_number cn Caller s TN Refer to TN on page 8 35 protocol Called PAD R
198. ero or more characters a question mark which replaces one character or an alias macro that starts with an equal sign For information on acceptable alias naming elements and conventions refer to section Source Destination Protocol Tables for the Al198 Menu System on page Biz 5 TO access menu 02 Simple alias translation enter 2 Menu 8 2 appears gt 2 Menu 8 2 01 Simple alias translation 02 Multiplexed connection 03 Multiplexed only translation 04 SLC routing translation 21 Exit this menu with no changes Enter item number and optional value then push lt CR gt key gt 6 Toselecto4 SLC routing translation enter 4 Menu 8 reappears with the SLC routing translation configuration items Important Menu item 04 sic routing translation is the only valid menu item for Al296 Use SLC routing translations to route calls through cards that support non time division subchannel TDS connections 7 optional If you are routing calls between two Al296 cards enter 3 and the IP address of the remote Al296 8 Foro4 Called address enter 4 and the the called destination address The called destination address defines the phone number being called Maximum length is 14 characters The actual address or an alias macro can be entered here Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Call Routing 9 Foros This alias is visible in the destination menu enter 5 to togg
199. es This example displays an exit from the current shell session 296 exit Writing Configuration Goodbye Valid destinations are as follows Al Enter destination name or EXIT to logout gt 9 51 head Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands head Description This command displays the first few lines of a file Command Type shell Formats head n ines file name Parameters n nes Defines the number of lines to display The default is 20 file_name Defines the name of the file to display Note Several filenames can be entered with this command Examples This example displays the first 30 lines of file core txt 296 head n 30 core txt 296 crash dump at 14 16 30 07 20 2004 up 0 days 00 31 46 Version 96HPC960 000007 created on 2004 03 29 at 09 43 35 Crash Code 000000ad PC 00000000 SP 00000000 MMR 00000000 GPROO 00000000 GPRO1 00000000 GPRO3 00000000 GPRO4 00000000 GPRO6 00000000 GPRO7 00000000 GPRO9 00000000 GPR10 00000000 GPR12 00000000 GPR13 00000000 GPR15 00000000 GPR16 00000000 GPR18 00000000 GPR19 00000000 GPR21 00000000 GPR22 00000000 GPR24 00000000 GPR25 00000000 GPR27 00000000 GPR28 00000000 GPR30 00000000 GPR31 00000000 MSR 00000000 GPRO2 00000000 GPRO5 00000000 GPRO8 00000000 GPR11 00000000 GPR14 00000000 GPR17 00000000 GPR20 00000000 GPR23 00000000 GPR26 00000000 GPR29 00000000 CR 00
200. es apply when uploading or downloading a file File names must contain an extension of ini img zmg cnf or txt Configuration files can be downloaded directly to file primary cnf or to another cnf file The only txt file allowed is banner txt and the only ini file allowed is boot ini Al296 must be updated in order to run a downloaded image file Any img filename is acceptable except boot img which is reserved and primary_devel img which is the primary image All zmg files must be written to a destination file with a img extension If no destination file name is given the name will default to the source file name with a img extension The source and destination file names must have the same extension excluding zmg files which use a img extension Command Type shell Formats tftp get address source filename dest filename put address source filename dest filename 9 105 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands tftp Parameters get Downloads a file from the TFTP server The following parameters are accepted e address Defines the IP address of the TFTP server to which the file download will occur e source filename Defines the file to download from the TFTP server Note The source file name cannot contain spaces or special characters e dest_filename Defines the name of the source file after it has been downloaded from the server If no destination
201. ese TCP IP connections may be one of the following An IRB connected line card in the same chassis such as another Al296 or an Al193 TX A locally connected TCP IP host A remote TCP IP host indirectly connected to Alswitch using a router network When Al296 establishes a TCP IP connection to an external device the IP packets are exported from Alswitch by Alfocus or by an Al router J 1 16 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Product Description Typical Applications X 25 Trunking Figure 1 9 illustrates a common X 25 trunking application A ann E BENEN X 25 NE X 25 Packet Network El EEE E X 25 NE Operating Support System A COMO Al296 X 25 NE A Ben E BEE X 25 NE A EEN E EEEEE X 25 NE A COMO Al296 X 25 NE Figure 1 9 X 25 Trunking 1 17 ff Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Product Description Typical Applications Figure 1 9 illustrates the following events The OSS sends X 25 calls through an X 25 packet network over an X 25 trunk to Al296 Al296 makes call routing decisions based on the Al198 routing alias Al296 sends local X 25 calls directly to its attached NEs X 25 NEs are connected to the OSS with a single X 25 trunk Al296 converts local X 25 calls to TCP IP calls and sends them over
202. example 103 and 113 are relative numbers and do not represent any particular link port or PVC The display does not show duplicate connections For example if connection 15 is connected to 30 the connection from 30 to 15 will not appear Q uit This option exits the command display and returns the user to the prompt J 9 28 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands diag eth diag eth Description This command monitors and displays Ethernet diagnostic information Using Interpretation Mode There are three levels of diagnostic information e Minimum Displays minimal diagnostic information mostly the packet s source and destination This is the default interpretation mode setting e Medium Displays protocol fields that are likely to change for each packet as well as those with values that are out of the ordinary e Maximum Displays all protocol fields To configure interpretation mode 1 Atthe prompt enter di ag eth 2 Enterinterpret minimum interpret medium interpret maxi mum or interpret Tip Entering i nt sr pr et with no additional parameter toggles interpretation off and on When interpretation is toggled from off to on the diagnostic level is set to the minimum level the default Using the Timestamp Option Timestamps can be configured to appear on the diagnostic display The timestamp value displays the calendar date and time To enable or disable timestamp display
203. ff On Bring passive links down when all calls have cleared Yes No Time to remain inactive after being brought down sec 50 Time to stand by before being brought up sec 1 20 49 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide System Configuration General System Properties Configuration System Prompt Description This item sets the system prompt value in the CLI Menu Item Type Data Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 2 Fori7 Prompt String enter 17 and the desired system prompt value There is no default prompt string The maximum length is 64 characters This example displays item 17 Prompt String Set tO NewPrompt gt 17 NewPr ompt Menu 4 2 11 pg 1 01 IP Address 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 254 010 040 057 015 02 IP Address Range 1 255 e ee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee 001 03 IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 1 255 255 255 254 255 255 000 000 04 Primary IP Router Address 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 254 010 040 000 001 05 Secondary IP Router Address 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 254 000 000 000 000 O6 TCP Default Window Size 200 512 1024 20481 200 O7 TCP Send Ahead OFF 08 5NMP System Parameters 09 Bring passive link down when all calls have cleared ON 10 Passive link Stay Inactive timer rr 000050 11 Passive link Standby Mode timer or 000020 12 Link
204. figuration This example displays 16 FTP port number Set to 220 gt 16 220 Menu 4 2 11 pg 1 01 IP Address 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 254 010 040 057 015 02 IP Address Range 1 255 eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee ee ee ee eee 001 03 IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 1 255 255 255 254 255 255 000 000 04 Primary IP Router Address 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 254 010 040 000 001 05 Secondary IP Router Address 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 254 000 000 000 000 O6 TCP Default Window Size 200 512 1024 20481 200 O7 TCP Send Ahead OFF 08 SNMP System Parameters 09 Bring passive link down when all calls have cleared OF F 10 Passive link Stay Inactive timer eee ee eee eects 000060 11 Passive link Standby Mode timer eee eee eee ee ee eee eee 000025 12 Link Setup 13 1P Over X 25 Subnets 14 1P Static Routes 15 Telnet port number 1 65534 eee e eee eee eee ee eee eee eee 00023 16 FTP port number 1 65534 eee eee ee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee 00220 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the System Menu 2 ForFTP Port enter the desired FTP port value Valid values are from 0 to 65534 This example displays FTP Port setto 1752 System Menu SVSECM lt P POMP te e arri rr ae a wom aod wm wha A E 232 Destination Menu Break Sequence 0 eee lt c gt lt 33 gt TCP Default
205. for links 1 2 and 3 e to reset error counters for all links baseport Defines the baseport number for Al296 Examples This example displays the resetting of error counters for links 5 to 7 296 creset 5 7 296 J 9 22 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands date date Description This command sets and displays the date and the time for Al296 when it is operating in standalone mode Command Types shell Formats date Examples This example displays the configuration of date 08 04 2005 and time 10 24 49 for Al296 in standalone mode 296 date Today is Thursday 05 01 2004 01 09 52 Please enter the date and or time Use MM DD YYYY and or hh mm ss 24 hour format 08 04 2004 10 24 49 296 9 23 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands debug debug Description This command enables or disables the logging of debugging data Tip You have to have logging turned on to view debug information from a shell connection Command Type shell Formats debug alias x25 pvcfsm asypvcfsm nlipvcfsm tpifsm modmuxfsm allfsm pppfsm linkChange bootp all on off L Parameters alias Enables or disables the logging of alias translation debugging data x25 Used primarily by Kentrox Technical Support to isolate system faults pvcfsm Used primarily by Kentrox Technical Support to isolate system faults asypvcfsm Used primarily by Kentrox Technical
206. formation 0x01 Invalid P S 0x02 Invalid P R 0x10 Packet type invalid 0x11 Packet type invalid for state r1 0x12 Packet type invalid for state r2 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 System Codes X 25 Cause Codes and Diagnostic Codes Table A 5 Standard Clear Indication Cause Codes Continued Cause Code Description 0x13 Packet type invalid for state r3 0x14 Packet type invalid for state p1 0x15 Packet type invalid for state p2 0x16 Packet type invalid for state p3 0x17 Packet type invalid for state p4 0x18 Packet type invalid for state p5 0x19 Packet type invalid for state p6 Ox1A Packet type invalid for state p7 0x1B Packet type invalid for state d1 0x1C Packet type invalid for state d2 0x1D Packet type invalid for state d3 0x20 Packet type not allowed 0x21 Unidentifiable packet 0x22 Call on one way logical channel 0x23 Invalid packet type on a permanent virtual circuit 0x24 Packet on unassigned logical channel 0x25 Reject not subscribed to 0x26 Packet too short 0x27 Packet too long 0x28 Invalid general format identifier 0x29 Restart or registration packet with non zero LCN 0x2A Packet type not compatible with facility 0x2B Unauthorized interrupt confirmation 0x2C Unauthorized interrupt 0x2D Unauthorized reject as Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 System Codes X 25 Cause Codes and Diagn
207. ge pvc router tconn tcp version wan For winslc enter the following command with any of the shell command keywords winslc baseport show Parameters baseport Defines the baseport number for Al296 comments Displays comments conn Displays all active connections crash Displays crash dump information J 0 86 data date eth inventory ip log mem perf ports pvc router tconn tcp version wan Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands show Displays link data The following parameters are accepted e ink_range Defines a link or range of links Valid values are 1 to 32 Individual values are separated by commas and hyphens For example 1 4 6 specifies links 1 4 5 and 6 e Specifies all links Displays the date and time Displays Ethernet information Displays the serial number product name manufacture date and MAC address when in standalone mode Displays the IP address subnet mask and high IP address Displays the contents of the log file same as command s hol og Displays memory allocation Displays serial link performance The following parameters are accepted e ink_range Defines a link or range of links Valid values are 1 to 32 Individual values are separated by commas and hyphens For example 1 4 6 specifies links 1 4 5 and 6 e Specifies all links Displays the link number link type and description for al
208. gs Table A 3 Standard Clear Indication Cause Codes Cause Code Description 0x00 DTE originated 0x01 Number busy 0x03 Invalid facility request 0x05 Network congestion 0X09 Clear due to network out of order 0x0B Access barred 0X11 Remote procedure error 0x13 Local procedure error 0x15 Recognized Private Operating Agency RPOA out of order 0X19 Reverse charging not subscribed 0X21 Incompatible destination 0X29 Fast select not subscribed as Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 System Codes X 25 Cause Codes and Diagnostic Codes Table A 3 Standard Clear Indication Cause Codes Continued Cause Code Description 0x39 Ship absent Ox7F Registration cancellation confirmed Standard ISO Diagnostic Codes Table A 3 lists the standard ISO diagnostic codes and their meanings Table A 4 Standard Clear Indication Cause Codes Cause Code Description OxAO DTE specific signals OxA1 DTE operational OxA2 DTE not operational 0xA3 DTE resource constraint OxA4 Fast select not subscribed OxA5 Invalid partially full data packet OxA6 D bit procedure not supported OxA7 Registration cancellation confirmed CCITT Diagnostic Codes Table A 3 lists the CCITT diagnostic codes and their meanings Table A 5 Standard Clear Indication Cause Codes Cause Code Description 0x00 No additional in
209. h oe et Oe de ch ae ceded newNode Node MOC at ON a Gua le g a Be hod me A eo a Al HOW BM E A NA Office B SNMP Manager Description An SNMP manager is a combination of monitoring software running on a network management station NMS and the actual device running the software It collects and acts on information from the various devices being monitored and or controlled The SNMP manager also periodically polls the devices it is managing to get status information Al296 allows for the configuration of up to 5 SNMP managers Note SNMP managers are only configurable when Al296 is in standalone mode They are not configurable through the Al198 menu system 4 25 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide System Configuration SNMP Configuration Menu Item Types Data Al296 Local Menu Item Configuration 1 Access the SNMP Menu located under the System Menu 2 FOrSNMP Manager 1 enter the IP address of the first SNMP manager The default is 0 0 0 0 3 FOrsSNMP Manager 2 enter the IP address of the second SNMP manager The default is 0 0 0 0 4 ForsnmP Manager 3 enter the IP address of the third SNMP manager The default is 0 0 0 0 5 Forsnmp Manager 4 enter the IP address of the fourth SNMP manager The default is 0 0 0 0 6 Forsnmp Manager 5 enter the IP address of the fifth SNMP manager The default iS 0 0 0 0 The following example displays SNMP Manager 1 Set to 10 65 32 4 SNMP Manager
210. he OSS 5 If you are using single alias translation for Destination enter the IP address of Al296 By entering a destination value you are specifying the use of single alias translation 6 Forcall data enter the parent name Note When creating the parent name note that you use the parent name to make the children alias names For example if a parent is named PARENT1 valid child names would be PARENT1 1 and PARENT1 2 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide TID Multiplexing TID Multiplexing Configuration 7 ForaApplication string enter TMUXn TID tid for Al296 n Defines the maximum number of children connections Valid values are 1 to 128 tid_for_Al296 Defines the terminal identifier for Al296 8 Forcalled protocol enter 9 optional For caller s protocol enter the caller s protocol 10 Save your changes Configuring the Children Aliases Configuration in the Al198 Menu System Al296 supports a maximum of 512 child connections These connections can be X 25 asynchronous or TCP IP To configure the child aliases 1 Log into Al198 2 Atthe prompt enter menu to access the Main Menu 3 For08 Configure the alias translation table enter 8 The alias configuration menu appears gt 8 Menu 8 01 Alias name a 1 KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK 02 Simple alias translation 03 Destination 04 Called address 05 This alias is visible in the des
211. he receiving PC 296 sz userlog txt Sending files x0 1 file sent 296 9 95 tacacs Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands tacacs Description This command displays TACACS log and shell session information Command Type shell Formats tacacs info sholog p stats clear Parameters info Specifies how the current shell session was authenticated If the current session was authenticated by a TACACS server it will display the IP address of the server If a TACACS server could not be contacted and fallback is enabled it will display Fall back to local If TACACS authentication was disabled it will display Loca shol og Displays the contents of the TACACS debug log file The TACACS debug log file records all connection attempts to TACACS servers The following information is displayed for each connection attempt e A record of the timestamp e The IP address of TACACS server e The AAA phase e The success or failure status associated with each connection Note The TACACS debug log file is only populated when TACACS debugging is enabled using command debug tacacs on The following parameters are accepted p Paginates the sholog output stats Displays or clears TACACS specific counters and statistics The following parameters are accepted cl ear Clears the counters and statistics JJ 9 06 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands ta
212. he update is complete reboot Al296 Configuring BOOTP TFTP The Al296 configuration can be automatically downloaded from a TFTP server when the card is in standalone mode and has BOOTP information stored in Al198 Menu 10 For more information about BOOTP configuration refer to Configuring the BOOTP Table in the A1198 Common Logic Controller System Manager User s Manual When Al296 starts it determines if the following conditions are met before using BOOTP to find IP address information e Al296 is in standalone mode e The IP address is not set If both of these conditions are met Al296 attempts to contact a BOOTP server until it obtains valid IP address information or the IP address is set by a user with the ip init shellcommand When an IP address has been obtained either by BOOTP or through the ip init command Al296 will resume its boot process The following events occur when Al296 attempts to download a configuration file from the TFTP server e Once the IP address information has been correctly configured from the BOOTP reply Al296 will attempt to contact a TFTP server only if the TFTP server IP address and configuration filename were received by the BOOTP reply e Al296 will try to download the configuration file from the TFTP server once every 60 seconds for a maximum of 10 retries e lf no valid configuration file is downloaded from the TFTP server after 10 retries Al296 will remove the previously configured IP addres
213. iew In Figure 7 1 Al296 takes a single call from an OSS and routes TL1 commands to various NEs by means of the TID in the TL1 command Similarly Al296 receives TL1 responses and NE reporting messages from several NEs and routes these messages to the appropriate OSS The call to Al296 from the OSS is a parent call The calls from Al296 to the various NEs are children calls After receiving a TL1 command from the OSS Al296 checks to see if there is an existing connection for each TID If a connection to the appropriate NE is already established then Al296 forwards the TL1 command to the NE as specified by the TID The following characteristics apply to Al296 when it attempts to connect to an NE e f Al296 is unable to establish a connection to an NE it will buffer the TL1 command and try to reconnect within 2 seconds e Al296 tries to connect up to three times if it cannot immediately establish a connection e Al296 buffers only one TL1 command for each NE If a connection is made Al296 forwards the buffered command to the NE Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide TID Multiplexing Overview e f a connection is not established after four tries or if Al296 receives a TL1 command with an unknown TID the TL1 command gets discarded and a message gets logged e lf the OSS is disconnected from Al296 all associated children calls to the NEs are disconnected Y Tip To access the configuration menu on a Soneplex NE device you
214. ination Menu o Yes No Alas Location qars ce cnc he o bw RoR Rho he e Beginning End Alias Test Menu Range 255 characters lt Fl gt Help lt F2 gt Send lt F4 gt Close lt Ctrl R gt Return to Main Menu Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide TID Multiplexing TID Multiplexing Configuration 4 10 For Alias name enter parent_name m parent_name Defines the name you entered for 08 cal data during the parent alias configuration m Defines the child number Valid values are 1 to specified during the parent alias configuration If you are using single alias translation for Destination enter the IP address of Al296 By entering a destination value you are specifying the use of single alias translation For Called address enter the called address For caller s address enter the caller s address For call Data enter the call data information For Application String enter TID tid tid Defines the TID of the destination NE Maximum length is 20 characters optional For Called protocol enter the called protocol 11 Forcaller s protocol enter 12 Save your changes Example Configurations The following screens display parent and child alias configurations that do the following 1 2 A call comes in on alias 172 16 1 123 at port 1000 172 16 1 123 1000 The call fans out into two child calls 09 App string in the parent alias configuration de
215. ing Attempts 16 Accounting Failures 0 Accounting Fallbacks 16 296 0 0 0 0 0 0 This example displays a successful password change on a TACACS server 296 aaa chpass Old Password New Password Re enter New password Password Changed 296 Password Change was successful 9 11 ff Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands alarm alarm Description This command e Displays a list of the alarm groups and the overall alarm severity e Displays alarms for a specified alarm group or for a specified range of severity levels within an alarm group e Displays alarms by severity level or for a specified range of severity levels e Clears all non self clearing alarm groups and the overall alarm severity e Clears a specified non self clearing alarm group e Masks a specified alarm group e Unmasks a specified alarm group Command Type shell Formats alarm group range sev range clear group mask group unmask group Parameters group Defines the group of alarms to display clear mask or unmask Valid values are existing alarm groups The following parameters is accepted range Defines a range of alarm severity levels to display Valid values are 1 to 32 Individual values in the range are separated by hyphens Sev Displays all alarms or a range of alarms based severity level The following parameters is accepted range Defines a range of alarm
216. ing from 20 Kbps to 2 Mbps 6 25 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration General Link Properties Configuration e y 35 Data transmission standard for a trunk interface between a network access device and a packet network Menu Item Type Toggle Link Type Availability Async AsyncPPP HDLC Bridge MLT SyncPPP and X 25 Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 2 ForHardware Interface enter the associated item number to select 25232 R5530 Or v 35 The default is R5232 This asynchronous link example displays 15 Hardware Interface setto v 35 gt 15 Menu 4 2 11 12 01 Link Number 1 16 2 eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee eee 01 02 Link Type Async X25 HDLC SyncPPP AsyncPPP MLT Async 03 Link Des tT pt 0n eee Async link 1 04 Link state Enabled Disabled eee eee ee eee Enabled O5 Port Speed 9600 06 Port Data Bits 7 Bj 8 O7 Port Stop Bits 1 2 eee ee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 1 08 Port Parity None Odd Even ooo None 09 Flow Control None XonXoff lt eee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee None 10 Xon Repeat interval 0 120s with 0 no repeat 000 11 Connect Options 12 Disconnect Options 13 RTS DTR Lead Control Options 14 Modem Options 15 Hardware Interface RS232 RS530 V 35 L v 35 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1
217. ings time for Al296 The following parameters are accepted e Specifies that the value is east of UTC e Specifies that the value is west of UTC e hh Defines the number of hours from UTC Universal Coordinated Time or Greenwich Mean Time e mm Defines the number of minutes from UTC Universal Coordinated Time or Greenwich Mean Time Note For enter the direction east west of Universal Coordinated Time UTC or Greenwich Mean Time The time entered here is the number of hours from UTC For example if the desired location is in the Eastern Standard Time EST zone enter 05 00 in this field This indicates a time 5 hours behind UTC J 9 110 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands timezone Examples This example displays the current daylight savings time setting 296 timezone Daylight saving is disabled on this system Current time zone 00 00 296 This example displays the enabling of daylight savings time and the setting of the timezone to 5 00 296 timezone dston Daylight saving is enabled on this system Current time zone 00 00 296 timezone 05 30 Daylight saving is enabled on this system Current time zone 05 30 296 9 111 ff trace Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands trace Description This command configures which X 25 rejected call codes cause and diagnostic appear on the log port This command
218. initial link establishment e CHAP specifies the method that verifies the identity of the peer by using a three way handshake that is done upon initial link establishment Verification may be repeated any time after the link has been established CHAP also encrypts the user s password over the PPP link to provide added security e None Specifies no authentication will be used Remote PAP CHAP identity Defines the user name for remote PAP CHAP authentication Remote PAP password CHAP secret Defines the password for remote PAP CHAP authentication Menu Item Type Toggle for remote authentication method Data for remote PAP CHAP identity and remote PAP password CHAP secret Link Type Availability AsyncPPP and SyncPPP Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Do one of the following e Foran asynchronous PPP link access Menu 4 2 11 12 2 1 e For asynchronous PPP link access Menu 4 2 11 12 7 For 05 Remote Authentication Method enter 5 to select None PAP Or CHAP The default iS None For 06 Remote PAP CHAP identity enter 6 and the user name The default is applied For 07 Remote PAP Password CHAP Secret enter 7 and the password The default is applied J 6 60 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration PPP Authentication Configuration This example displays O 05 Remote Authentication Method Set to CHAP O 06 Remote PAP CHAP identity Set to bri24 O 07 Remote PAP Password CHAP Secret Se
219. ink state Enabled Disabled ee Enabled A e ee eee eee eee eee ee ee eee eee eee eee 9600 06 Port Data Bits 7 Bjorn 8 O7 Port Stop Bits 1 2 eee ee eee eee ee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee 1 08 Port Parity None Odd EvVen None 09 Flow Control None XonXoff eee eee ee eee eee eee ee eee XonXof f Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the Link Menu 2 Forsw Flow Control Select None Or XonXoff This example displays sw Flow Control Set to xonxoff Async Link Menu ink to 5 ra BT Z dd a RA E e nl ro ae OL A IA AE Async link 1 Link state YRS Enabled Disabled Link Type La po eB eR es Async AsyncPPP Mo d Mu x Port speed in bits per second 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 57 6K 115 2K Autobaud Port data bits Seven Eight Port Stop DIS ae e A AA A BP ee Oe a One Two Pott Parity aue usa e e a w a ow AR R R K A None Even Odd SW Flow Control o o eo None XonXoff Hardware Interface Interface Type Description This menu item configures the hardware connection used for an Al296 link The following hardware connections are available e RS232 A data transmission standard that defines the characteristics for connecting DTE and DCE data communications devices e s530 A data transmission standard that is similar to RS232 but with support for higher data rates rang
220. into Al296 and access the destination menu The user cannot connect to destination ai to retrieve status or to change the configuration connect Specifies a user who is automatically connected to a specific destination at login The destination is specified when the permission is assigned Examples This example displays the addition of user brian with profile mgmt to the user database The system prompts the user for the password after the username and profile are entered 296 useradd mgmt brian Adding user of type mgmt Please enter a password Passwords are truncated at 10 characters Please retype the password User brian added successfully 296 9 119 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands userdel userdel Description This command deletes a username and password from the database Command Type shell Formats userdel Examples This example displays the deletion of user brian from the database After the command is initially entered prompts appear that tell the user what information needs to be entered 296 user del Please enter the login name of the user to DELETE brian Delete user brian y n y User brian deleted successfully 296 J 9 120 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands users users Description This command displays currently configured Al296 users with the associated profile names and destinations
221. ion Continued Response Item Description errcde Specifies the error code Error Response Example This example displays the response that appears if RTRV HDR fails A1296 97 01 01 05 06 39 M 12345 DENY I AC Diagnostics for TID Multiplexing To view information on TID multiplexed calls and the associated TIDs use diag tconn This command displays a list of all connections on the card in the same format as di ag conn However di ag tconn is not interactive Use this command either from the Al296 shell or through Al198 as a wi ns c command Refer to diag tconn on page 9 49 for more information 7 17 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide TID Multiplexing TID Multiplexing Troubleshooting J 7 13 KENT Alias and Call Routing Configuration This chapter provides information on configuring aliases and routing calls on Al296 Guide to this Chapter Overview Call Routing Source Destination Protocol Tables Protocol Processing Modules Alias Macros Alias Configuration Examples Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Overview Overview Al296 uses aliases to route calls across the backplane of Alswitch Each incoming call s routing information must match an entry in the alias table or else the call is rejected When Al296 is in switch mode the alias table is stored on Al198 When Al296 is in standalone mode the alias table is stored in
222. ion Failure to do so can cause the diagnostic program to become overloaded which makes Al296 unresponsive To configure a filter 1 Atthe prompt enter di ag eth 2 Enter the desired filter Refer to section Formats on page 9 31 for information on filter formats Capturing Data While using the di ag eth command data can be captured for Ethernet diagnostics All variables and filters can be configured for specific or general information capture To configure data capture 1 Define the following settings e Interpretation Mode e Timestamp Mode e Promiscuous Mode e Data Mode e Filters J 9 30 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands diag eth 2 Entergo The system starts capturing data with the user defined settings and filters 3 Enterstop to stop capturing data Exiting the diag eth Session To exit the di ag eth session type quit The 296 prompt appears Command Type shell Formats diag eth The following formats apply to filters filter add delete src mac_address dst mac_address filter add delete src p address dst p address filter add delete src p_ address port number dst ip address port number filter add delete src port number dst port number filter add delete protocol ip tcp udp icmp arp osi filter add delete all filter list Parameters add Adds a filter delete Deletes a filter src Defines the
223. ion traps SNMP Menu Contact person for this managed node S MORA WAME o a e e E E R es e E Bide Ms fe he E be ee ahd rane Node LOCATION a ace E amp AES a A E re Send authentication traps bh hohe oe SOs On Of f Community Names Description SNMP community names provide embedded password access to MIB contents There are three menu items available for configuring Al296 SNMP community name information e Read Community Name Sets the name that permits read only access to all objects in the MIB e MIB2 Read Community Name Sets the name that permits read only access to all objects in MIB2 e Write Community Name Sets the name that permits read and write access to all objects in the MIB Menu Item Types Data for all menu items Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 8 2 Foros Read Community Name enter 5 and the community name value The maximum length is 32 characters The default value is readonly 3 For0o6 MIB2 Read Community Name enter 6 and the community name value The maximum length is 32 characters The default value is public 4 Foro7 Write Community Name enter 7 and the community name value The maximum length is 32 characters The default value is administrator 4 22 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide System Configuration SNMP Configuration The following example displays 6 ltemo05 Read Community Name Set to ReadComm 6 l
224. ion count 0 2551 052 17 Protocol version 1980 1984 19881 eee eee eee eee eee 1988 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration X 25 Parameters Configuration Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the X 25 Link Menu 2 Select x 25 Parameters Menu The X 25 Parameters Menu appears 3 ForProtocol Version select 1980 1984 or 1988 The default is 1984 This example displays Protocol Version setto 1988 X 25 Parameters Menu Link Del ng conf igure a s s be A RA Oa ee ee be Rk Bod 03 X25 Facilities Negotiation 0 Enabled Disabled aX LI be pa th ak Sah cd a oh oh ok oh we de el 128 256 512 Packet Window SIze a z 3 me a Boe Sok ok a aa a wow ow oe a a ew aw a aa X121 Local Address ae bw hh i Reson eke Bethe oh fs ahah ae Gage A Gana See GT T20 Restart TMB g a Tai a ae BA Bye ae ek Ge REIT 191 T22 Gal Timer x aos a m e d w we we ew ee a a ee se Fo 2000000 TA RESET TEMET car OR ee ee we we ah ae ee 21000000 T23 Clear Timer a e 2 r a a ade sog dow Ee ad a ss a Boe De w w 180000 T24 Window Timer oe omona we eo k o e e e a e e w a 235600000 T25 Data Retransmission Timer aaa aaa 1650000 T26 ERT RE Timer cce a w e a a amp oe Rowe de ee E ee eo eo 22300000 T28 Regis trRatIiO0A TUMOR s fom m a fo ee a Gh Ha are 900100 R20 Res aint Counte e s enr o moata awe le wt Se Aa amp RR Pon ok LET R22 Reset Tr
225. ion to a false condition and vice versa before continuing with the evaluation Functions Functions are preset command keywords that perform string and value conversions Some functions can be entered with only a single character For example s and switch represent the same function Note Functions are not case sensitive Table 8 20 lists available functions and their descriptions in alphabetical order Table 8 20 Alias Macro Functions Alias Macro Function Description of Operation asc string Returns the ASCII integer value of the first character in a string chr n Returns the character that corresponds to ASCII integer value n hex 1 Returns the hexadecimal equivalent to decimal or value n For example hex 31 returns hex value h n 1F if expression a b Returns a if expression is not zero or b if or expression is zero i expression a b left string n Returns the left most n characters of string Ifn is or greater than the length of string the function I string 0 returns the entire string lent string Returns the length of string or n string mid string x n Returns n characters from string starting with the or xth character If x is greater than the length of m string x n string the function returns a null string If fewer than n characters follow character x the function returns to end of the string 8 41 Al296 Versio
226. is similar to AEPN but adds the ability to transport X 25 interrupt reset packets and interrupt reset confirmation packets through TCP ASY This module takes a single argument that specifies the string to be transmitted on the outgoing connection when a call is placed The string typically contains a modem dial sequence Optional Parameters Echo Causes local echo from an ASY port Edit Buffers calls for line editing and sends lines as a whole when ENTER is pressed Lines can be edited by using BACKSPACE BX25NM The BX 25 network module is used to translate to and from the AEPN module and the BX25S module Typically this module is used with the BX25S module Refer to BX 25 Configuration on page 6 5 for information about configuring BX 25 parameters BX25S The BX 25 session layer module provides the session layer to X 25 that is required for the AMATPS protocol Typically this module is used with the BX25NM module Refer to BX 25 Configuration on page 6 5 for information about configuring BX 25 parameters ETER End to end reset is used on a PVC in the data transfer state to pass reset requests without confirmation The endpoint is responsible for confirming the reset which is also passed through This option works only with PVCs and is used on the X 25 side of the connection PAD Packet assembler disassembler works with messages traveling between X 25 and asynchronous protocols The X 25 protocol does not use break signals bu
227. ity X 25 Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 8 2 For17 Protocol version enter 17 to select 1980 1984 or 1988 The default is 1984 This example displays 17 Protocol version set to 1988 gt 17 Menu 4 2 11 12 8 01 X25 Facilities negotiati0n gt lt LL OFF 02 Max packet size 128 256 512 eee ee eee ee ee eee eee eee 128 03 Packet window size 1 7 errr ee eee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee 002 04 X121 local address 0 15 decimal digits ee ee eee eee 05 T20 restart timer 0 3200000mS eee ee eee 1750000 06 T21 call timer 0 3200000ms eee rere eee eee ee eee 1000000 07 722 reset timer 0 3200000ms eee eee eee ee eee eee eee 0020000 08 T23 clear timer 0 3200000ms ee eee eee eee eee ee 0180000 09 T24 window timer 0 3200000ms eee eee eee eee ee eee eee 2356000 10 725 data retransmission timer 0 3200000ms 1650000 11 T26 interrupt timer 10 32 00000me T e ee eee eee ee eee 2300000 12 T28 registration timer 0 3200000ms 0090000 13 R20 restart count 0 255 eee ee ee eee eee ee eee ee eee eee eee 150 14 R22 reset transmission count 0 255 eee eee eee eee eee ee eee 025 15 R23 clear retransmission count 0 2551 eee eee eee eee 034 16 R28 registration retransmiss
228. izing and sets the sequence to carriage return followed by a line feed RBP Record boundary preservation is a Cisco protocol that works with messages traveling between X 25 and TCP IP protocols RBP allows for packet preservation of X 25 data when transport is over a TCP IP network RBP is equivalent in functionality to AEP in that X 25 packet boundaries are maintained with the addition of a configurable record boundary Optional Parameter RBP Md Defines the maximum record size in bytes RBP will split an incoming X 25 data packet across multiple records so that no single record exceeds this value X 25 packets with this parameter set will be combined as long as the resulting record does not exceed this value If this value is not set each X 25 data packet will be converted into exactly one record Valid range for this parameter is 256 to 1500 The default is no M bit TL1 The Translation Language One module typically works with messages traveling between X 25 and asynchronous protocols However it also works with all other protocols Some OSSs require that each TL1 command response be fully contained in one X 25 packet By packetizing on the TL1 termination characters lt gt the TL1 module ensures that each TL1 command response is transmitted in one X 25 packet 8 33 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Protocol Processing Modules Defaults Sets no packetizing timer Sets
229. king 2 ee o 128000 X25 Passive Link Mode Normal Passive Extended Passive Link with Clocking 2 0 0 Enabled Disabled Frame Level Disconnect Active Passive Other Frame Window SIDA ci AR a a RA A a 7 Max Packet SIZE s de cc a A as 128 256 512 Packet Window SIZE a al a ad de e e a aw 2 X121 Local Address RRR a aca em Gee Ge Ro ae A RA ae Wier Number ot PVCS 4 ne oe omet a de de de ee a RA aa 0 PVC Menu SV GLOW 4 6 40 Ge a E A a cot eh o de te Uk ei Ga ee a 250 SVG HIRO se see ho Ge aod a hm i a a ee ee a ee Se Se ee ee a 3419 X 121 Local Address Description This menu item defines the X 121 address used in the X 25 network The X 121 address consists of a three digit Data Country Code DCC plus a network digit together forming the four digit Data Network Identification Code DNIC followed by the Network Terminal Number NTN of at most ten digits Menu Item Type Data Link Type Availability X 25 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the X 25 Link Menu 2 Select Quick X 25 Menu The Quick X 25 Menu appears 3 Forx121 Local Address enter the value 6 69 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Quick X 25 Configuration This example displays x121 Local Address Set to 59274 Quick X 25 Menu Lk being Configured s s a p por ERA deck A Gee ao a on 02 nterface Mod r s o 0 5 4 ee ee ee eee K DTE DCE Port s
230. ks The display does not show duplicate connections For example if connection number 15 is connected to 30 the connection from 30 to 15 will not appear M ore This option toggles between m ore and L ess It displays the link and PVC number for X 25 PVCs the link and X 121 addresses for X 25 SVCs and the alias used to make the connection 9 27 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands diag conn Display Item Description D etal This option prompts for the ID of the connection to view and displays details for that connection F ind This option displays specific types of connections F i nd indicates text matches that are applied to the display lines The matching is not case sensitive The logic for the matches can be AND or OR PATTERN 1 LOGIC 2 and PATTERN 3 are evaluated before LOGIC 4 and PATTERN 5 are considered 70 revPg This option displays the previous page of connections Twenty connections per page appear The numbers that appear in front of the description for example 103 and 113 are relative numbers and do not represent any particular link port or PVC The display does not show duplicate connections For example if connection number 15 is connected to 30 the connection from 30 to 15 will not appear extPg This option displays the next page of connections Twenty connections per page appear The numbers that appear in front of the description for
231. l available ports or for a specified range of ports The following parameters are accepted e ink_range Defines a link or range of links Valid values are 1 to 32 Individual values are separated by commas and hyphens For example 1 4 6 specifies links 1 4 5 and 6 e Specifies all links Displays PVC connections Displays the default and backup gateway IP address Displays complete connections Displays TCP information such as maximum keepalive tries dropped SNMP requests and total opened sockets Displays the version number of Al296 Displays WAN diagnostic information 9 87 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands show Examples This example displays the Al296 version number 296 show version Version 96HPC961 000003 created on 2004 07 06 at 09 31 34 Boot Loader Version 96B2L103 000003 296 This example displays the serial link performance for links 2 5 296 show perf 2 5 Performance for last 60 seconds Intrf Type Input Chars sec Output Chars sec 2 X 25 0 0 3 X 25 0 0 4 X 25 0 0 5 X 25 0 0 296 This example displays the link numbers link types and descriptions for ports 13 16 296 show ports 13 16 Link Type Description 13 X25 14 X25 V5 E 16 X25 296 JJ 0 88 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands staeia staeia Description This command displays the status of the ElA leads
232. l296 Commands Commands Overview Commands Overview Al296 is configurable directly through the local system using shell commands or through Al198 using winslc commands and the menu system Shell Commands Shell commands offer some of the same functionality available in the Al296 local menu system including e Creating modifying or deleting users and passwords e Accessing the Al296 menu e Configuring PVCs e Monitoring performance and diagnostic information e Pinging an IP address e Setting up an ARP table e Setting the trace level Shell Connections Before using the shell commands a shell connection to Al296 must be established You can connect locally using an asynchronous port on the Al296 front panel or remotely using a Telnet connection Establishing a Local Shell Connection Establish a local shell connection to Al296 through any port configured as a login port By default all ports are configured as login ports but only port 1 is enabled 1 Use a PC or laptop with terminal emulation software such as HyperTerminal to connect to Al296 For information on operating your particular terminal emulation software refer to the documentation provided with the program 2 Setup your terminal emulation software to connect using COM port 1 COM1 3 Configure COM port 1 with the following parameters e Bits per second 9600 e Data bits 8 e Parity None e Stop bits 1 e Flow control None 4 From within your termi
233. l296 Commands diag info This example displays diagnostic information for the Ethernet sonic chip in use on this card soni co which is accessed by typing E SONI CO frames_received 2133706 2451073 bytes_received 204088549 233809600 frames_sent 317511 bytes sent 38293966 0 collisions 116 0 transmit_errors 0 0 cre errors 0 0 alignment_errors 0 0 missed packets 0 0 rx_buffers exhausted 0 0 heartbeatlost 0 0 rx_overruns 0 0 rba_exceeded 0 0 current_tda 8 ex_defers 0 0 ex_coll 0 0 tx_underruns 0 0 bad_tx_size 0 0 tx_blocked 0 2451086 tx_delayed 0 0 state 2 2451086 eth intr stuck 0 233812081 Display Item Description frames received Displays the number of frames received on the connection bytes received Displays the number of bytes received on the connection Note This field displays a negative number after it reaches a count of 2 147 483 647 This is normal operation and does not indicate an error frames_sent Displays the number of frames sent from the connection bytes_sent Displays the number of bytes sent from the connection Note This field displays a negative number after it reaches a count of 2 147 483 647 This is normal operation and does not indicate an error collisions Displays the number of transmit collisions This is the number of times the Ethernet device goes to transmit but cannot because someone else is already transmitting transmit_errors Displays the number of tran
234. l296 Commands useradd useradd Description This command adds a username and password When the user first logs into Al296 the login name and password are both ai by default Five grace logins are available before a username and password must be configured A total of ten users can be added to the database Command Type shell Formats useradd profile name username Parameters profile_name Assigns a permission to a username Table 9 4 describes the permissions The default permission is supervisor username Defines the login name for a user up to 8 characters After entering a username a prompt appears that asks for a password up to 10 characters Table 9 4 Description of Permissions profile_name Permission supervisor Specifies a user who can execute all commands on the system At least one supervisor permission must be configured The system will not allow the deletion of the only supervisor user The default permission is supervisor mg mt Specifies a user who can execute all commands except for useradd J ons Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands useradd Table 9 4 Description of Permissions Continued profile name Permission status Specifies a user who can only execute the following commands creset debug di ag conn diag info diag eth di ag tconn help ip menu ping pvclist show staeia stasilc dest Specifies a user who can login
235. l296 Local Menu System 1 Access the X 25 Link Menu 2 Select 8x 25 Menu The BX 25 Menu appears 3 Foruse BX 25 Configuration Values Select Enabled Or Disabled The default is Enabled This example displays Use 8X 25 Configuration Values Set tO Enabled BX 25 Menu Lim being Conf ROUTE s r e g ai a hte a ee te eh ee we a 03 BX 25 SUPOTE a a coto koe ce WO we ee He He Enabled Disabled Use BX 25 Configuration Values uu Enabled Disabled BX 25 Modulo Description This menu item defines a modulo value A modulo is used by the BX 25 protocol to define the value at which the packet sequence numbers will rollover Menu ltem Type Data Link Type Availability X 25 Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 11 2 Foro4 Modulo enter 4 and the desired value The default is 256 This example displays 04 Modulo set to 200 gt 4 200 Menu 4 2 11 12 11 01 BX25 Support Enabled Di sabl edi nrrrrrrrrnnrr Disabled 02 Use these configuration values Enabled Disabled Enabled 03 Sending Unit Number 0 9 2 5 eee eee eee eee ee eee ee eee eee 0 04 Modulo 5 256 ee ee eee ee eee en ee eee eee 200 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration BX 25 Configuration Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the X 25 Link Menu 2 Select 8x 25 Menu The BX 25 Menu appears 3 Forsx 25
236. l296 in standalone mode IP address Subnet mask High IP address Primary gateway address Backup gateway address IP address range CAUTION The following message appears when the ip init command is invoked and no login ports are configured There are no login ports currently configured for this system Please take necessary precautions to prevent lockout Command Type shell Formats ip init Examples This example displays the prompt that appears when i p init is entered A prompt appears for each configurable IP address item 296 ip init Enter IP Address XXX XXX XXX XXX 9 57 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands ip init This example displays the configuration of all the IP settings available with this command 296 ip init Enter IP Address XXX XXX XXX XXX 172 16 2 39 Setting IP Address to 172 16 2 39 Enter Subnet Mask XXX XXX XXX XXxx 255 255 000 000 Setting Subnet Mask to 255 255 000 000 Enter Router Address XXX XXX XXX XXX 172 16 000 1 Setting Router Address to 172 16 000 1 Enter Backup Router Address default none 172 16 2 41 Setting Backup Router Address to 172 16 2 41 Enter IP Address Range default 1 Setting range to 1 296 o J 9 58 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands link link Description This command is used to e Force a serial link to connect or disconnect Note When this c
237. lays sync Port Encoding Set to NRZI MLT Link Menu LTS To COME FOU Ca a A a a RO a See ce e he ae a Gee 8 5 E SEAE sA cara eam a a E e he e oe a a a Up Down Link Type Async X 25 HDLC Bridge SyncPPP AsyncPPP MLT Interface Type s s so s so soe coros eee ee RS 232 RS 530 V 35 Link Description bod bt iu a Reda X 25 link 5 LURE SL ag ModE x ee eee a a e Be ee Bo de al DTE DCE Port speed O external clocking 0 a a 9600 Sync Port Encoding 1 ee o NRZ NRZI Xon Repeat Interval Description This menu item enables or disables the XON repeat interval When enabled Al296 sends multiple XON characters at the specified interval Some equipment requires the receipt of multiple XONs before sending data after it has received an XOFF Menu Item Type Data Link Type Availability Aysnc and AsyncPPP Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 2 For10 Xon Repeat interval enter 10 and a interval value The default is 0 J 6 10 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration General Link Properties Configuration This example displays 10 Xon Repeat interval Set to 30 gt 10 30 Menu 4 2 11 12 01 Link Number 1 16 eee eee ee eee eee ee eee eee eee ee eee ee eee 01 02 Link Type Async X25 HDLC SyncPPP AsyncPPP MLT Async 03 Link Desti pt 0n Async link 1 04 Link s
238. le between Yes and No This setting specifies if the alias will appear in the welcome screen 10 optional For 08 cali data enter 8 and the call user data Call data is dependent on the type of SLC being used lt may be directly entered as an alias macro 11 optional For 10 Called protocol enter10 and the called protocol type For more information about protocol types refer to Protocol Processing Modules on page 8 29 12 optional For 11 Caller s protocol enter 11 and the caller s protocol type For more information about protocol types refer to Protocol Processing Modules on page 8 29 13 For20 Save the changes made enter 20 to save the alias configuration 14 Repeat this procedure for additional alias configurations Configuring an Alias in the Al296 Menu System Note Specific configuration information about menu items in the following procedure is located in section Source Destination Protocol Tables for the Al296 Menu System on page 8 20 To configure an alias in the Al296 Menu System 1 Log into Al296 2 At the prompt type menu The Al296 Main Menu appears 3 Access the Alias Menu The Alias Summary Menu appears Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Call Routing 4 From the the Alias Summary Menu select Add Alias The Alias Edit Menu appears Alias Edit Menu A las Name 13 ACTOR e a ay ke caer AO dedicada ca aah Mr bib iii Gal ler Addes S
239. les The following AAA settings are configured Enabled TACACS fallback Enabled AAA accounting Enabled AAA authentication on tel net connections priv lvl authorization Custom profile newProf with TACACS privilege levels 3 to 5 Enabled TACACS authentication for AsyncPPP links 1 to 9 10 retry attempts 15 second timeout 296 aaa fallback enable 296 aaa account enable 296 aaa authen enable telnet WARNING Potential lock out At least one TACACS server must be enabled for Authentication AND at least one TACACS server must be enabled for Authorization 296 aaa author priv lvl 296 aaa profile 3 5 newProf 296 aaa ppp authen 1 9 enable 296 aaa retry 10 296 aaa timeout 15 296 J 9 10 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands aaa This example displays a summary of all authentication authorization and accounting settings 296 aaa summary Async Shell Access Telnet Shell Access FTP Access Authorization Accounting Fall back AAA Timeout AAA Retry Count Priv lvl 3 newProf Priv lvl 4 newProf Priv lvl 5 newProf 296 Local AAA Local Priv lvl Enabled Enabled 15 seconds 10 This example displays all AAA specific counters and statistics 296 aaa stats AAA Statistics Authentication Attempts Authentication Failures Authentication Fallbacks Authorization Attempts Authorization Failures Authorization Fallbacks Account
240. live messages received on the connection Dropped SNMP request Displays the number of dropped SNMP requests 9 45 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands diag line diag line Description This command monitors incoming and outgoing asynchronous traffic and displays diagnostic information for the traffic A help screen provides a list of commands available for line monitoring diagnostics CAUTION The line monitor degrades the performance of Al296 Do not use this command in heavy traffic situations in which performance is crucial Note Information from the line monitor diagnostic mode only appears when data is passed on serial links If no data is passed the screen is blank Table 9 2 displays the line monitor mode options that can be entered after di ag line is entered Table 9 2 Line Monitor Mode Options Option Function data Toggles the display of data on or off modem Toggles the display of modem signals on or off t Toggles the display of a timestamp for each frame of data displayed on or off h Orr Hides n or reveals r all lines on Al296 h lx Orr Ix Hides n or reveals r a specified line x rixy Reveals a specified LCN y on a specified line x rix yz Reveals a range of specified LCNs y through z ona specified line x h lxy Orrixy Hides or reveals all LCNs from a specified LCN y on up ona specified line x hilx yOrrlx y Hide
241. llowing message appears when Al296 is configured to contact a TACACS server during authentication login test Password Contacting TACACS server Please wait Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Local Menu System Logging Into Al296 The following message appears when Al296 is configured to contact a TACACS server during authentication but the contact attempt fails login test Password Contacting TACACS server Please wait TACACS server s not responding Note Five consecutive failed login attempts generate an SNMP trap and a log message saying that the login failed Also an entry appears in the log file with text stating Warning x consecutive failed login attempts where x is the number of consecutive failed login attempts Using an Asynchronous Port for Login Two tools are required for logging into Al296 using an asynchronous port e A PC with terminal emulation software such as HyperTerminal included with Windows 95 98 2000 XP or Procomm e Terminal cable with these specifications null RS232 cable with DB25 male connector for Al296 distribution panel connection and appropriate connector for your PC To log into Al296 using an asynchronous port 1 Set the terminal emulation software to the following settings e 9600 baud e No parity e Eight data bits e One stop bit 2 Power on Al296 3 Connect a PC to port 1 on the DP232 distribution panel 4 Note Link 1 on Al296 is enabled a
242. meters for an MLT or X 25 link e Frame Settings e Interface Mode e LAPB Timer Settings e N2 Retry Counter Frame Settings Description Frame settings are configured using three menu items O Frame Level Disconnect Specifies the level at which a disconnect frame is sent The following options are available e Active Specifies that a disconnect frame DISC is sent and an unnumbered acknowledgment UA must be received to acknowledge that the link is disconnected Some systems do not acknowledge the DISC frame with a UA but send a set asynchronous balanced mode frame SABM instead To bring this link up the system must be configured for a passive disconnect If a remote system fails to respond to a receive ready RR frame enough times to exceed the maximum number of accepted retransmissions for unacknowledged frames described in section N2 Retry Counter on page 6 50 then Al296 sends DISC frames continuously e Passive Specifies that the DISC frame is not sent Al296 responds to an SABM with a UA If a remote system fails to respond to an RR frame enough times to exceed the maximum number of accepted retransmissions for unacknowledged frames then Al296 sends SABM frames continuously e 0ther Specifies that an immediate disconnect frame DISC is sent if an RR has been sent enough times to exceed the maximum number of accepted retransmissions for unacknowledged frames and no reply has been received O Frame Window Size
243. mmands diag eth This example displays the diagnostic Ethernet display when the following is entered O filter add src 00 40 72 00 02 09 to configure a filter with source MAC address 00 40 72 00 d2 d9 filter add dst 00 40 72 00 d2 d9 to configure a filter with destination MAC address 00 40 72 00 d2 d9 e go to start the capture e stop to end the capture 296 diag eth filter add src 00 40 72 00 d2 d9 New filter added filter add dst 00 40 72 00 d2 d9 New filter added go This example displays the diagnostic Ethernet display when the following is entered filter add protocol tcp to configure a filter with a defined TCP protocol e go to start the capture e stop to end the capture 296 diag eth filter add protocol tcp New filter added go lt 00 A0 C9 22 D8 C4 00 00 92 B6 2F 97 08 00 45 2C ia l E 00 6C CF B7 40 00 80 06 69 4B AC 10 37 14 AC 10 1 iK 7 32 28 10 9A 00 8B 01 67 55 24 00 DO 5D 81 50 18 Qiao st gU P 1E 59 5C 61 00 00 00 00 00 40 FF 53 4D 42 2B 00 TR a se SMB 00 00 00 18 03 80 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 07 08 FE CA 02 10 41 OF 01 01 00 1B 00 40 Vv Arrea L 57 4F 20 43 57 20 56 4C 4F 20 44 45 4F 20 4D 41 wo CW VLO DEO MA 57 20 4C 4D 57 20 41 52 57 00 W LMW ARW stop 9 35 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands diag eth This example displays the diagnostic Ethernet display when filter list is entered to display all filters
244. most ten digits Menu Item Type Data Link Type Availability X 25 Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 8 2 Foro4 X121 local address enter 4 and the local address value This example displays 04 x121 local address Set to 43729 gt 4 43729 Menu 4 2 11 12 8 01 X25 Facilities negotl ati on 2 K K KKK KKK KKK KL ON 02 Max packet size 128 256 512 2 2 ere ee tere re eee eee ne ennen 512 03 Packet window Size 1 7 nen eens 006 04 X121 local address 0 15 decimal digits e eee eeeee 43729 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the X 25 Link Menu 2 Selectx 25 Parameters Menu The X 25 Parameters Menu appears 3 Forx121 Local Address enter the local address value This example displays x121 Local Address setto 59274 X 25 Parameters Menu Link being configured lt s s sesers odom eon E o b Eoi poa aoa ou 03 X25 Facilities Negotiation 2 00 Enabled Disabled Max Packet S200 e Bore w a kem eR aaia 128 256 512 Packet Window E oo so m wih amp a a ee e e w w o amp a eae a 6 X121 Local Address R sore a KR a a e R e R a aaae 59274 6 84 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Virtual Circuit Configuration Virtual Circuit Configuration The following settings are available for X 25 parameter configuration e Number of PVCs e PVC Configuration Settings e SVC Configuratio
245. mpts that are made to a TACACS server before the attempt fails Consecutive attempts are only made if the TACACS server responds but refuses a connection If no response is received from a TACACS server before the configured timeout period then no further connection attempts are made For information on configuring the timeout period refer to command aaa on page 9 6 The following parameters are accepted 6 retry _count Defines the number of consecutive connection attempts that are made Valid values are 1 to 100 e defaul t Resets the number of connection attempts to the default value 9 9 fj Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands aaa stat Displays or clears AAA specific counters and statistics The following parameter is accepted cl ear Clears all counters and statistics summary Displays a summary of all authentication authorization and accounting settings ti meout Configures the number of seconds to wait for a response from a TACACS server If no response is received from the server in the allowed number of seconds the connection attempt fails The following parameters are accepted e timeout_value Defines how long in seconds Al296 will wait for a response from a TACACS server when a connection attempt is made Valid values are 1 to 120 e defaul t Resets the timeout value to its default Command Defaults Disabled TACACS accounting authenitcation and authorization Examp
246. must set the Packet Window Size to 1 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide TID Multiplexing TID Multiplexing Configuration TID Multiplexing Configuration Establish TID multiplexing by configuring aliases for calls that will go through Al296 Configure a parent alias to accept the incoming call from the OSS After doing this configure children aliases to route calls to the various network elements For more information about aliases refer to Chapter 8 Alias and Call Routing Configuration Configuring the Parent Alias Note Kentrox recommends that you do not use connect on activity PVCs to establish a parent connection Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Log into Al198 2 Atthe prompt enter menu to access the Main Menu 3 Foros configure the alias translation table enter 8 The alias configuration menu appears gt 8 Menu 8 01 Alias name RR KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK 02 Simple alias translation 03 Destination 04 Called address 05 This alias is visible in the destination menu eee e NO 06 Link number is 1 16 07 Caller s address 08 Ca data 09 App string 10 Called protoco 11 Caller s protocol 12 Alternate routing alias 14 Test macros 15 Show entire alias 16 Show the first entry in the alias translation table 17 Show the previous entry in the alias translation table 18 Show the next entry in the alias tra
247. n off Specifies the option that turns the display of log messages off Examples This example displays the current status of the log message display 296 log Display of log messages is currently disabled 296 This example displays the activation of the log message display 296 log on Display of log messages is now enabled 296 This example displays the deactivation of log message display 296 log off Display of log messages is now disabled 296 J 9 64 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands logout logout Description This command closes a shell session Command Type shell Formats logout Examples This example displays the closing of a shell session 296 logout Writing Configuration Goodbye Disconnecting 9 65 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands Is Description This command displays a list of available files Command Type shell Formats Is I Parameters Displays a list of the available files and file information such as permission time date and size Note Entering s with this option is the same as entering di r Examples This example displays all available files 296 Is boot ini boot img log txt core txt primary cnf 296 This example displays all available files with associated permission levels times dates and sizes 296 ls l TW r T 10
248. n break id d_ number For the winslc command winslc baseport break ink_number connection_origin L winslc baseport break id d_number Parameters connection_origin Defines the IP address and port number of the device connection being terminated baseport Defines the baseport number for Al296 id_number Defines the ID number of the device connection being terminated ink_number Defines the link number for the connection being terminated 9 19 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands break Examples This example displays the termination of a shell connection for a device with IP address 10 10 5 11 and port number 1821 296 break 10 40 5 11 1821 Breaking connection 10 40 5 11 1821 296 This example displays the termination of a connection for a device with ID 65 296 break id 65 Breaking connection with ID 65 296 J 9 20 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands bridge bridge Description This command dumps a list of all the addresses in the bridge table or clears the bridge table Command Types shell Formats bridge dump clear Parameters dump Dumps a list of all the addresses in the bridge table clear Clears the bridge table Examples This example displays the dumping of the bridge table 296 bridge dump Hash table for Bridge Group 0 MAC Address Source Interface 00 00 92 90 CF 42 Ethernet 00 00 92 90
249. n 02 s Caller s The following options are available Ide time protocol e Async leave blank e Async TL1 TL1 Refer to TL1 on page 8 33 e Async packetized PKT P13 12 Refer to PKT on page 8 32 Called PAD Refer to PAD on page 8 30 protocol Async TCP with Alias name ASY ink_number telnet break Called ip_address tcp_ port number address Called TN Refer to TN on page 8 35 protocol J 8 22 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Source Destination Protocol Tables Table 8 11 X 25 SVC Source Without Breaks Al296 Source Destination Menu Item Information X 25 SVC X 25 SVC Alias name Call user data or called address or caller s address Called The following options are available address X25 ink_number called_address 6 X25 ink_number caller_address cal _user_data Note ca ed_address must be a valid X 121 address X 25 SVC X 25 PVC Alias name Call user data or called address or caller s address Called PVC address Call data X25 ink_ number lcn X 25 SVC TCP Alias name Call user data or called address or caller s address Called ip_address tcp_port_ number address X 25 SVC Al193 TX Alias name Call user data or called address or TCP with N caller s address protocol option Called ip_address tcp_port_number address Called AEP Refer to AEP on page 8 29 protocol X 25 SVC Async Alias name Call user data or
250. n There are three menu items available for configuring TID to Modem Mux port bits e Port Data Bits Defines the number of databits in a data byte e Port Stop Bits Defines the number of stop bits for TID to Modem Mux A stop bit is an extra bit at the end of an asynchronous character that helps the receiver recognize the end of the character e Port Parity Defines parity which is a process for detecting whether or not bits of data have been altered during data transmission Menu Item Types Toggle for all menu items Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 14 2 6 2 From Menu 4 2 14 2 6 enter a value from 2 to 11 Menu 4 2 14 2 6 1 appears 3 Foro2 Port Data Bits enter2 to select7 ors The default is n 4 For0o3 Port Stop Bits enter3 to select 1 or2 The default is 1 5 Foro4 port Parity enter 4 to select None Even Or Odd The default is None This example displays 02 Port Data Bits setto 7 03 Port Stop Bits setto 1 04 Port Parity Set to Even gt 4 Even Menu 4 2 14 2 6 1 01 TID to route e eee eee ee eee eee eee ee eee eee 02 Port Data Bits 7 8 2s eee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee eee eee 7 03 Port Stop Bits 1 2 eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee 1 04 Port Parity None Even Odd eee eee eee ee eee eee ee eee eee Even J 4 30 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide System Configuration TID to M
251. n 9 8x User s Guide System Configuration SNMP Configuration SNMP Configuration This section discusses SNMP configuration options The following configuration components are available e Authentication Traps e Community Names e Contact Persons e Node Information e SNMP Manager Authentication Traps Description This item enables or disables the generation of authentication failure traps by Al296 When a user enters faulty login information authentication traps are sent from an SNMP agent to inform the management station about the incorrect login attempt Menu Item Types Toggle Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 8 2 Foro4 Send authentication traps enter 4 to select on or orr The default is on The following example displays item 04 Send authentication traps Set to ON gt 4 Menu 4 2 11 8 01 Contact person for this node teen nee e eee ee ee eee ee 02 Node ees nae eee Ae ete aa R NN N RE K NE R Sok es dete dae ee 03 Node LOCATIONS AR ee eee RR ina 04 Send authentication traps x x e e C C K K K K eee te ee ee ee ee ee ON Al296 Local Menu Item Configuration 1 Access the SNMP Menu located under the System Menu 2 ForsSend authentication traps select on or off The default is on 4 21 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide System Configuration SNMP Configuration The following example displays the selection of on for menu item Send authenticat
252. n 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Alias Macros Table 8 20 Alias Macro Functions Continued Alias Macro Function Description of Operation mid string x Returns characters from string starting with the or xth character and continuing to the right most end m string x character If x is greater than the length of string the function returns a null string myi p n Returns a string representation of the nth IP address assigned to Al296 n must be greater than 0 pos string char n or p string char n Returns the position of the nth occurrence of char in string lf there are less than n occurrences of char instring the function returns the length of string right string n or r string n str n or d n Returns the right most n characters of string Returns the entire string if n is greater than the length of the string Returns n converted into a decimal string switch target_ exp default expl res ul tL exp2 result2 or s target exp default expl resultl exp2 result2 lftarget_exp matches exp1 the function returns resultl lftarget_exp matches exp2 the function returns resul t 2 This continues through all pairs of expressions and results If target_exp does not match any of the expressions then default is returned val string Converts a string to its decimal integer value For or example v 032 return
253. n Settings Number of PVCs Description This menu defines the number of PVCs being configured A PVC is a virtual circuit that is permanently available PVCs differ from SVCs in that an SVC must be reestablished each time data is to be sent Once the data has been sent the SVC disappears PVCs are more efficient for connections between hosts that communicate frequently Menu Item Type Data Link Type Availability X 25 Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 9 2 Forol Number of pvcs enter1 and the number of PVCs The default is 0 This example displays 01 Number of Pvcs Setto15 gt 1 15 Menu 1 7 11 12 9 01 Number of PVCs 0 1024 lt KKL 0015 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the X 25 Link Menu 2 Select Quick X 25 Menu The Quick X 25 Menu appears 3 ForNumber of Pvcs enter the number of PVCs The default is 0 6 85 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Virtual Circuit Configuration This example displays Number of PVC setto 12 Quick X 25 Menu Lik being Configured s s a p pop p ww Gee deck teh Gee a ee Aon 03 lntertiace MOd s s e c mts a e ee dot ee eee F E a DTE DCE Port speed O external clocking 0 0 0 0 a 4800 X25 Passive Link Mode Nor mal Passive Extended Passive Link with Clocking 0 0 Enabled Disabled Frame Level Disconnect
254. n be received in a single packet Maximum transmit unit MTU Defines the maximum number of bytes that can be transmitted in a single packet ioe During LCP negotiations on a PPP link Al296 will advertise the MRU configured by the user If the peer negotiates its MRU with Al296 then the MTU on the Al296 side will be set to the peer s MRU If the peer does not negotiate its MRU then the MTU on the Al296 side will be set to the value configured by the user Menu Item Type Data Link Type Availability AsyncPPP and SyncPPP Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Do one of the following e Foran asynchronous PPP link access Menu 4 2 11 12 2 2 e For asynchronous PPP link access Menu 4 2 11 12 8 2 Foros Maximum Receive Unit enter5 and the byte value The defaults are 1518 for network control protocol scr and 1500 for network control protocol Pc 3 Foro6 Maximum Transmit Unit enter p and the byte value The defaults are 1518 for network control protocol scr and 1500 for network control protocol pcp This example displays 05 Maxi mum Receive Unit setto 1000 and 06 Maximum Transmit Unit set to 900 gt 6 900 Menu 4 2 11 12 8 01 Network Control Protocol IPCP BOP L BCP 02 Local IP Address 25 eee rere eee eee ee eee eee eee eee 000 000 000 000 03 Remote IP Address 5 eee rere eee ee ee eee eee eee eee 000 000 000 000 04 Subnet Mask oo 255 255 255 240 05 Maximum Receiv
255. nables and disables bridge protocol modules on both ends of a PPP link IPCP configures enables and disables IP protocol modules on both ends of a PPP link Menu ltem Type Toggle Link Type Availability AsyncPPP and SyncPPP 6 45 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration General PPP Properties Configuration Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Do one of the following e Foran asynchronous PPP link access Menu 4 2 11 12 2 2 e For asynchronous PPP link access Menu 4 2 11 12 8 2 Foro1 Network Control Protocol enter 1 to select pce or ace The default is pcp This example displays 01 Net work Control Protocol for a synchronous PPP link set to BCP gt 1 Menu 4 2 11 12 8 01 Network Control Protocol IPCP BOP rr BCP Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the AsyncPPP Link Menu or SyncPPP Link Menu 2 Select ppp Configuration Menu The PPP Configuration Menu appears 3 ForNetwork Control Protocol select pce or scr The default is pce This example displays Net work Control Protocol setto pPcP PPP Configuration Menu Link being confi gutted s s s a s a as aao a xoa akama OP we ee we Hw 3 Network Control Protocol aoa a a aaa a a 0 a PCP BCP J 6 46 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration LAPB Parameters Configuration LAPB Parameters Configuration The following settings are used to configure LAPB para
256. nal emulation software press ENTER to request a login prompt Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands Commands Overview 5 At the login prompt enter your user name 6 At the password prompt enter your password Notes ai is the default user name and password Al296 allows only five logins using the default password On the sixth login Al296 will prompt you to change the default password to a new password 4 Keep a copy of your username and password in a safe place If you lose or forget your password on Al296 in standalone mode you must call Kentrox customer service for assistance in gaining access to the card The destination menu appears 7 Enterai Establishing a Remote Shell Connection Establish a remote shell connection to Al296 using Al198 command tel net or using another Telnet client To establish a Telnet session 1 Use a PC or laptop with terminal emulation software such as HyperTerminal to connect to Al296 For information on operating your particular terminal emulation software refer to the documentation provided with the program For user name enter ai For password enter ai The destination menu appears For destination enter ai The 296 prompt appears Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands winslc Commands winsic Commands The winslc commands let the user communicate with Al296 from Al198 Use these commands to enter data diagnose problems and retrieve informati
257. ncluded in an authorization set on the TACACS server 2401 pvclist aaa queue ai ip alarm link arp log break logout cat Is clear reset crash rm crc sel cnf creset sholog date show debug snmp del id delete sonic diag conn staela diag eth standalone diag info staslc diag line syncflash di ag tconn tacacs dir tail exit task head tcpoutconn help tftp me mor y tftpboot memt rack timezone menu type mo d mu x update more upti me passwd useradd ping userdel pppstatus users profile who The following keyword lets users access destinations dest Provides authorization at the destination menu Individual destination names can be used as arguments For example permit Al permit somedestination permit EXIT Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Commands for Al296 TACACS Server Enhancements Al296 Menu Aliases Al296 Menu Aliases The following Al296 menu aliases can be included in an authorization set on the TACACS server Authorization occurs when level 1 menu items are traversed menu Provides access to the menu menu_alias Provides read access to the Alias menu menu_alias write Provides write access to the Alias menu menu_link Provides read access to the Link menu menu_link write Provides write access to the Link menu menu_i px Provides read access to the IP Over X 25 Subnet menu menu_ipx write Provides write access to the IP Over X 25 Subnet menu menu_route Provides read access to the Static route menu
258. nd configured for login by default which allows access through the link Al296 may also be accessed through any asynchronous link that is enabled and configured for login 4 Press ENTER The login prompt appears 5 Enter your user ID The password prompt appears 6 Enter your password The destination menu appears You are now logged into Al296 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Local Menu System Logging Into Al296 The following message appears when Al296 is configured to contact a TACACS server during authentication login test Password Contacting TACACS server Please wait The following message appears when Al296 is configured to contact a TACACS server during authentication but the contact attempt fails login test Password Contacting TACACS server Please wait TACACS server s not responding Note Five consecutive failed login attempts generate an SNMP trap and a log message saying that login failed Also a new entry will appear in the log file with text stating Warning x consecutive failed login attempts where x is the number of consecutive failed login attempts Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Local Menu System Accessing the Local Menu System Accessing the Local Menu System To access the Al296 menu session 1 Log into Al296 Refer to section Logging Into Al296 on page 3 3 for more information At the destination menu enter ai The Al296 shell pr
259. nect when DCD is 0ND OFF 06 Connect when characters are erel yed L ON 07 Connect without DSR DCD or received characters OFF 08 Connect string eee eee eee ee ee eee lt b gt newstring lt 33 gt lt p 13 gt lt b gt Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the Async Link Menu 2 Select connect Options Menu The Connect Options Menu appears 3 Forconnect String enter the connect string This example displays Connect String setto lt b gt newstring lt 33 gt lt p 13 gt lt b gt Connect Options Menu Link being configured a 1 Link Application a Login Destination AppAlias Link Application Alias e s r ie a a wage RTA want R S die tito ada async 4 1 Call Retry Interval 0 32767s 0 disable 4 134 Dial Connect when DSR is on tte Sacty ut Gre Oh rar Ab tas OE Se te On Off Connect when DCD is on ww o On Of f Connect when characters are received ep a On off Connect without DSR DCD or received characters On Off Connect StPING s sos ora po p a a ee Og lt b gt newstring lt 33 gt lt p 13 gt lt b gt 6 13 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Connect Options Configuration Connection Settings Description The connection settings are configured using three menu items e Connect when DCD is on Enables or disables link connec
260. ng E ETHERNET 0 Rx LG frame length violation 0 Rx NO nonoctet aligned frame 0 Rx SH short frame runt 0 Rx CR CRC error 0 Rx OV overrun o o 0 Rx CL collision 0 Rx BSY buffers exhausted 0 Rx frames missed 0 Rx frames received 0 Rx bytes received 0 Tx RL retry limit exceeded 0 Tx RC collisions 0 Tx UN underruns 0 Tx LC late collisions 0 Tx CSL carrier sense lost 2451095 Tx queued buffers 0 Tx frames sent 2451095 Tx bytes sent corro 233814304 Unexpected interrupts 0 Enter M emory A sync E thernet T cp or Q uit Display Item Description Rx LG frame length violation Displays the number of frame length violations in received packets Rx NO nonoctet aligned frame Displays the number of misaligned received frames Rx SH short frame runt Displays the number of short received frames Rx CR CRC error Displays the number of packets received that have had CRC errors Rx OV overrun Displays the number of packets not received by the interface because of a receiver overrun Rx CL collision Displays the transmit collisions on received frames This is the number of times the Ethernet device goes to transmit but cannot because someone else is already transmitting
261. nitoring diagnostics are available from the shell connection Refer to command diag line on page 9 46 for more details Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Product Description Features Link to Link Call Routing Link to link call routing lets users route all SVC calls coming in on one X 25 link to another X 25 link By using X 25 link to link call routing it is now possible to create a default route for all calls from a specified X 25 link The alias for the default link to link route can route all calls destined for the same link On previous versions of Al296 users had to create an alias for each unique called address Performance Monitoring Maintenance Troubleshooting Shell and winslc commands let users handle performance monitoring maintenance and troubleshooting for Al296 Remote and Local Configuration Al296 can be configured from Al198 by accessing the Al198 menu system Al198 is accessible using a Telnet session or by plugging a terminal into the Al198 Craft port Simultaneous Connections Al296 supports up to 1024 simultaneous X 25 to IP and or IP to X 25 virtual connections It supports 512 simultaneous X 25 to X 25 virtual connections or child connections These connections may be distributed in any combination across the 16 available serial ports on Al296 Single Alias Translation Single alias translation allows routing a call from an incoming link on one Al296 to an outgoing link on a second Al296 Al232 Alscout
262. nk Auto Disable Menu appears 3 ForErrors second limit for auto disable enter the error limit value The default is 0 This example displays Errors second limit for auto disable setto 25000 Link Auto Disable Menu Link Deine configured a a snm oe we Bee A A oe Oe A a a 03 Errors second limit for auto disable 25000 Flow Control Description This menu item enables a receiving device to tell a sending device to stop sending data when data is coming too fast and to start sending data when the receiver is ready There are two available flow control options for Al296 6 None Specifies no flow control e xonxoff Specifies the flow control option that uses standard ASCII control characters to tell a sending device to stop or resume data transmission Menu ltem Type Toggle Link Type Availability Async and AsyncPPP JJ 6 24 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration General Link Properties Configuration Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 2 Foro9 Flow Control enter 9 to select None Or XonXoff The default is None This async link example displays 09 Fi ow Control Set to XonXoff gt 9 Menu 4 2 11 12 01 Link Number 1 16 eee ee eee eee eee ee ee eee eee eee ee eee 01 02 Link Type Async X25 HDLC SyncPPP AsyncPPP MLT Async 03 Link Description Async link 1 04 L
263. no idle packetizing timer Sets no filter characters Passes the break upstream Passes the break downstream Discards unpacketized data when passing the break upstream Optional Parameters Td Sets the packetizing timer to d hundredths of a second It packetizes d hundredths of a second after the last time it was packetized By setting d to zero this option is turned off ld Sets the idle packetizing timer to d hundredths of a second It packetizes after d hundredths of a second after not receiving any new characters Pd d d Sets the packetizing characters to the numbers entered in each d option Specify up to 16 characters Fd d d Sets the filter characters to the numbers entered in each option Specify up to 16 characters It is possible to packetize on a filtered character U Prevents the passing of breaks upstream D Prevents the passing of breaks downstream S Packetizes on a specific sequence of characters Enter up to 16 characters The packet module accepts only one S parameter E Activates local echo back to the original Telnet session It behaves like an X 25 when X 3 parameter 3 is set to 1 J 8 34 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Protocol Processing Modules Examples TL1 T6 Provides TL1 packetizing and sets the packetizing timer to 06 seconds TL1 F10 127 Provides TL1 packetizing and filters out the characters for line feed and delete TL1 U Provide
264. nslation table 19 Delete the above alias translation entry 20 Save the changes made 20b to the beginning 20e to the end 21 Exit this menu with no changes Enter item number and optional value then push lt CR gt key gt 4 Foro Alias name enter the alias name for the call coming from the OSS Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide TID Multiplexing TID Multiplexing Configuration For 02 Simple alias translation enter 2 Menu 8 2 appears with the available translation options gt 2 Menu 8 2 01 Simple alias translation 02 Multiplexed connection 03 Multiplexed only translation 04 SLC routing translation 21 Exit this menu with no changes Enter item number and optional value then push lt CR gt key gt For 04 SLC routing translation enter 4 Menu 8 reappears with SLC routing ranslation Selected for menu item 2 If you are using single alias translation for 03 Destination enter 3 and the IP address of Al296 Foros Call data enter 8 and the parent name Note When creating the parent name note that you use the parent name to make the children alias names For example if a parent is named PARENT valid child names would be PARENT1 1 and PARENT1 2 For 09 App string enter TMUXn TID tid for Al296 n Defines the maximum number of children connections Valid values are 1 to 128 tid_for_Al296 Defines the terminal identifier for Al296 10 Forio Called protocol enter 10
265. nu 2 From the System Menu select Ti me Menu The Time Menu appears 3 For Daylight Saving Time on this host is SelectEnabled Or Disabled 4 Forstart on select the day number in the month that Daylight Savings Time will start 5 Forstart Day select the day that Daylight Savings Time will start 6 Forstart month Select the month that Daylight Savings Time will start 4 33 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide System Configuration Time Configuration 7 Forstart Hour select the hour that Daylight Savings Time will start 8 Forend on select the day number in the month that Daylight Savings Time will end 9 ForEnd Day select the day that Daylight Savings Time will end 10 For End Month select the month that Daylight Savings Time will end 11 For End Hour select the hour that Daylight Savings Time will end This following example displays Daylight Saving Time on this host is S ttO Enabled Start On Set to Second Start Day Setto Sun Start month Set to 3 Start Hour setto 2 End On Set IO First End Day Setto Sun End month Set to 11 End Hour Set to2 Time Menu Current Time Zone hh mm 2 40 poe ee ew ow oo 0000 Daylight Saving Time on this host is Enabled Disabled Start OMS a EE E Ge First Second Third Fourth Last Start Day Sun Mon Tue Wed Thur Fri Sat Start Month 1 12 l Jan 12 Dec 2 a 3 Start Hour 0 23 4 v atom aw cs E e de
266. nu System 1 Access the System Menu 2 Enter a character sequence for Destination Menu Break Sequence Maximum length is 44 characters The default is lt c gt 1 5 x The following example displays item Destination Menu Break Sequence Set tO lt c gt lt 33 gt System Menu SYSTEM Propi e aa viaa mare tobe ett EAA a dido oa ok ER on Helge pd 232 Destination Menu Break Sequence 0 cece eee eee lt c gt lt 33 gt Ethernet Port Settings Description The Ethernet port settings are configured using two menu items e 10BaseT Ethernet Enables or disables the 10BaseT Ethernet port on the front panel of Al296 e Dual Ethernet Enables or disables simultaneous operation of the faceplate mounted 10BaseT Ethernet port and the IRB 4 Note When the dual Ethernet setting is enabled the 10BaseT Ethernet setting has no effect on Al296 operation Menu Item Type Toggle for both menu items Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 pg 2 2 Foro01 10 Base T Ethernet enter 1 to select off or on The default is off 3 For07 Dual Ethernet enter 7 to select orf or on The default is off This example displays 01 10 Base T Ethernet setto ON and 07 Dual Ethernet Set tO OFF gt 7 Menu 4 2 11 pg 2 01 10 Base T Ethernet e ON 02 Radius Configuration Menu 03 Destination Menu Break Sequence rere reer eee eee eee lt c gt 1 5 x 04 TACACS Configuration Menu 05 TCP
267. o be transmitted 14 idle ti mer Defines the maximum time allowed without the exchange of frames on a data link Menu Item Type Data Link Type Availability MLT and X 25 Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access menu 4 2 11 12 7 for MLT or menu 4 2 11 12 8 for X 25 2 Foro05 T1 ack timer enter 5 and the timer value The default is 3000 3 Foro06 T2 ack delay timer enter 6 and the timer value The default is 4000 4 For 07 T4 idle timer enter 7 and the timer value The default is 25000 6 49 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration LAPB Parameters Configuration This example displays e 05 Tl ack timer Set to 19000 e 06 T2 ack delay timer Set to 20000 O 07 T4 idle timer Set to 50000 gt 7 50000 Menu 4 2 11 12 8 01 Interface mode DTE or DCE o 2 eee eee ee eee ee eee ee ee eee eee eee DCE 02 Frame level disconnect Active Passive Other Active 03 Frame Window size 1 T eee rere eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 7 04 N2 retry count 0 2551 eee eee ee ee ee eee ee ee eee eee eee 150 05 T1 ack timer 100 25500 MS 19000 06 T2 ack delay timer 100 25500 mel eee eee ee eee eee eeee 20000 07 T4 idle timer 0 200000 ms e eee reenter eee ete ee ete eee eee 050000 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the MLT or X 25 Link Menu 2 Select LapB Menu Or X 25 LAPB Menu The MLT LAPB Menu
268. o save If an error message appears check your work and make changes as necessary Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Local Menu System Accessing the Help Menu Accessing the Help Menu The Al296 help menu lists all available keyboard codes and function keys with their associated purposes The help menu can be accessed by doing one of the following things e Pressing F1 and ENTER e Selecting Help on the menu and ENTER e Pressing ESC 1 and ENTER The following example displays the first page of the local menu system help screen Navigation Help Page 1 of 4 This screen displays when you press the lt Fl gt key or if you enter an invalid key stroke fromthe Main Menu The following keyboard function keys are programmed to allow you to enter or change data in menus lt Fl gt lt F2 gt lt F4 gt UP Arrow DOWN Arrow LEFT Arrow RIGHT Arrow If you can not locate these keys on your keyboard use the following keyboard equivalent codes to provide the same functionality Keyboard Code Function Key Purpose Esc 1 lt F1 gt HELP displays this help screen from any menu Esc 2 lt F2 gt SEND transmits the currently displayed data You are given a confirmation prompt before the actua transmittal of data occurs When you press the lt F2 gt key the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys can then be used to access the other commands Press SPACE BAR to continue or q to quit 3 9 fj Al296 Version 9 8x Us
269. ocol settings See Also e BX 25 Configuration e General Link Properties Configuration e LAPB Parameters Configuration e Quick X 25 Configuration e X 25 Parameters Configuration Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration BX 25 Configuration BX 25 Configuration Al296 is BX 25 compatible and implements passive links Passive links are not a part of the BX 25 protocol Once a passive link is active it uses the BX 25 protocol TAA BX 25 is supported on only one link per Al296 4 Some BX 25 parameters may vary based on the Al296 installation The following configuration components are available e BX 25 Configuration Values Usage e BX 25 Modulo e BX 25 Support e BX 25 Timer Settings BX 25 Configuration Values Usage Description This menu item enables or disables the use of the values configured in the BX 25 menu Menu ltem Type Toggle Link Type Availability X 25 Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 11 2 Foro2 use these configuration values enter 2 to select Enabled Or Disabled The default is Enabled This example displays 02 Use these configuration values Set IO Enabled gt 2 Menu 4 2 11 12 11 01 BX25 Support Enabled Disabled e eee eres Enabled 02 Use these configuration values Enabled Disabled Enabled Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration BX 25 Configuration Configuration in the A
270. ode setto DTE MLT Link Menu LORO CONT ERT 0 oaia aaa a a OR a e E a 1 LINES Cate ah aaa a a e de he he th ok pe Up Down Link Type Async X 25 HDLC Bridge SyncPPP AsyncPPP MLT Interface Type o aua aaa RS 232 RS 530 V 35 Link Description s R R A e ASE EL Interface Mode o DTE DCE 6 27 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration General Link Properties Configuration For X 25 links 1 Access the X 25 Link Menu 2 From the X 25 Link Menu select Quick X 25 Menu The Quick X 25 Menu appears 3 Forinterface Mode Select pce or oTE The default is prt This example displays Interface Mode Set to DTE Quick X 25 Menu Link being configured lt acicate AAA 01 Imterfice Mode os ona dc aa a DTE DCE Link Description Description This menu item defines a description for a link Menu Item Type Data Link Type Availability Async AsyncPPP HDLC Bridge MLT SyncPPP and X 25 Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 2 Foro3 Link Description enter 3 and a description associated with the link Maximum length is 30 characters This example displays 03 Link Description Set tO New X 25 Link gt 3 New X 25 Link Menu 4 2 11 12 01 Link number 1 16 ee ee eee ee eee eee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee 03 02 Link Type Async X25 HDLC SyncPPP AsyncPPP MLT X 25 03 Link Description
271. odem Mux Configuration Al296 Local Menu Item Configuration 1 Access the TID to Modem Mux Menu located under the System Menu 2 From the System Menu select Tid to Modem mux The TID to Modem Mux Summary Menu appears 3 From the TID to Modem Mux Summary Menu select Add TiD The TID To Modem Mux Edit Menu appears 4 ForPort Data Bits select7 ors The default iss 5 ForPort Stop Bits selecti or2 The default is 1 6 ForPort Parity select None Even Or Odd The default is None This example displays e Port Data Bits setto 7 e Port Stop Bits setto 1 e Port Parity Setto Even TID To Modem Mux Edit Menu tR Hs c TOUTE HHHH Port Data BIES R a R E GO ee ae a EL E a Seven Ei ght Port Stop BIES s a i g a One Two Port Parity s dara A a ay A None Even Odd TID to Route Description This menu item defines the string that represents the TID to be routed to the Modem Mux link Menu Item Type Data Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 14 2 6 2 From Menu 4 2 14 2 6 enter a value from 2 to 11 Menu 4 2 14 2 6 1 appears 3 Foro1 TID to route enter 1 and the desired TID Maximum length is 20 characters This example displays the TID configured as coLUMBUS 0H gt 1 columbus oh Menu 4 2 14 2 6 1 01 TID to router COLUMBUS OH 4 31 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide System Configuration TID to Modem Mux Configuration Al296 Local M
272. ommand is used to disconnect a serial link all calls are torn down The serial link does not come back online until command i nk start is issued Important If you are connected to the Al296 shell using a serial port remember not to disable that port or else loss of connectivity will result e Restart a link which is a stop followed by a start e Show a configuration summary for a link or range of links Command Types shell and winslc Formats For the shell command link ink_range restart start stop For the winslc command winslc baseport link ink_range start stop restart Parameters Specifies all links baseport Defines the baseport number for Al296 link_range Defines a link or range of links Valid values are 1 to 32 Individual values are separated by commas and hyphens For example 1 4 6 Specifies links 1 4 5 and 6 Note This parameter applies to any action the user is trying perform start stop restart or show information restart Restarts the serial links start Enables the serial links stop Disables the serial links 9 59 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands link Examples This example displays the starting of links 1 through 4 and 6 296 link 1 4 6 start 296 This example displays the stopping of links 6 and s 296 l ink 6 8 stop 296 J 2 60 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Command
273. ompt appears Enter menu The Al296 Main Menu appears Al296 Main Menu Link Menu Alias Menu System Menu Static Route Menu Select the desired menu option using the UP or DOWN arrow key Then press ENTER or RETURN to continue lt Fl gt Help lt F4 gt Close Note The Alias Menu is only available when you log into Al296 in standalone mode Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Local Menu System Navigating the Local Menu System Navigating the Local Menu System Arrow keys and keyboard short cuts can be used to navigate through the local menu system Refer to Table 3 1 for a list of arrow key movements and keyboard shortcuts Note To use the arrow keys in the menu system make sure the VT100 arrow keys are enabled in either your Telnet settings or your terminal emulation program Table 3 1 Direction Keys Direction Keys Up Use the up arrow key or Press lt Ctrl p gt Down Use the down arrow key or Press lt Ctrl n gt Right Use the right arrow key or Press lt Ctrl f gt Left Use the left arrow key or Press lt Ctrl b gt Identifying Types of Menu Items The Al296 local menu system contains data items that let you input information or toggle between available selections Data Entry Items The following screen shot displays an example of a data entry menu item Link Gor CONTIGUA a Ok Ok ek ke Ge He we a 1 To enter information for a data entry menu item 1
274. on This command synchronizes the Al296 configuration with the configuration information stored on Al198 Enabling this feature ensures that if Al296 is placed in standalone mode it will operate as it did in switch mode Command Type shell Formats syncflash true false Parameters true Enables the update configuration functionality false Disables the update configuration functionality Note When running in standalone mode Al296 always writes to its file system when configuration changes are made When running in switch mode the running configuration on Al296 is always kept current with Al198 s configuration Examples This example displays the Al296 configuration being synchronized with the configuration information stored on Al198 296 syncflash true 296 J 9 94 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands sz SZ Description This command sends files from Al296 to a receiving PC using the Zmodem file transfer protocol This command can be executed from any asynchronous port or Telnet connection Note Before attempting to send files Al296 sends a signal to the receiving PC If your emulation program does not support this feature you may have to start the receiving PC manually Command Type shell Formats sz filename Parameters filename Specifies the file to send from Al296 to the receiving PC Examples This example displays file user og txt being sent from Al296 to t
275. on General System Properties Configuration This example displays Tel net Port setto 55 System Menu SUSTCEMIPPROMPE doc a ii A lia NewPrompt Destination Menu Break Sequence 0 0 vette lt c gt 1 5 x TCP Default Window Size eu 200 512 1024 2048 TCP Send Ahead 0 REN doron K a Enabled Disabled Telnet Port A ar ie 55 4 13 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide System Configuration RADIUS Configuration RADIUS Configuration RADIUS authentication verifies user login information against valid user information in a database on a centralized RADIUS authentication server A primary and secondary RADIUS server are configurable to provide secure access for an entire Al296 network Al296 RADIUS authentication is available for Telnet asynchronous and synchronous ports The following menu items can be configured for RADIUS e Server Settings e Shell FTP Options Server Settings Description The RADIUS server settings are configured using four menu items for the primary and secondary server The configurable values are Primary secondary server status Enables or disables the primary or secondary server Primary secondary server P address Defines an IP address for the primary or secondary server Primary secondary server port Defines the port number for the primary or secondary server Primary secondary server secret Defines a password for the primary or seconda
276. on from Al296 Displaying winslc Command Logging To monitor winslc commands press CTRL I when logged into Al198 to turn on logging Using winslc Commands To use winslc commands the user must be logged into Al198 to receive output from Al296 Al198 relays the command to Al296 which processes the command and sends the result to the system log port as configured in Al198 Menu 1 1 Valid winslc commands are e arp e pvcedit e break e pvclist e creset e show e diag tconn e staeia e help e stasic e link e tcpoutconn e linkstat e trace e panic e update e ping e xvc From the Al198 you can view the available winslc commands by entering the following command winslc baseport help where baseport specifies the baseport number of Al296 Log Alarm Message Header To obtain output from winslc commands enable the activity alarm log Al198 Menu 1 1 menu item 01 The activity and alarm log is turned The first line of the response for most winslc commands shows the following standard log alarm message header gt 0A1 19807 42 26 081104 Sev F Base 016 Msg Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands winslc Commands Table 9 1 describes the Log Alarm message header elements Table 9 1 Log Alarm Message Header Elements Header Element Description AI 198 Specifies the node name for the device that is producing the log alarm message in this case Al198 7 42 26 Specifies the curr
277. on goaa we 8 DTE DCE Port speed O external clocking 0 0 0 aa a 4800 X25 Passive Link Mode Nor mal Passive Extended Link Number Description This menu item defines the number of the link being configured Menu ltem Type Data Link Type Availability Async AsyncPPP HDLC Bridge MLT SyncPPP and X 25 Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 2 Foro01 Link number enter 1 and the link number The default is 1 J 6 30 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration General Link Properties Configuration This example displays 01 Link number set to 3 sig Menu 4 2 11 12 01 Link number 1 16 eee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee 03 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the Link Menu 2 ForlLink to configure enter the link number The default is 1 This example displays Link to configure set to3 Async Link Menu Linkto COMET GUTE sae 5 Gla de ok oe uk eR Ge a a a ke a ww de ee Link State Description This menu item enables or disables a link Menu Item Type Toggle Link Type Availability Async AsyncPPP HDLC Bridge MLT SyncPPP and X 25 Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 2 For04 Link state enter 4 to select Enabled Or Disabled The default is Enabled This example displays 04 Link state Set tO Disabled gt 4 Menu 4 2 11 12 01 Link
278. or mal 06 Port speed 0 128000 bps 0 is external clocking 009600 07 X25 LAPB Parameters 08 X25 Parameters 09 Virtual Circuits 10 Hardware Interface RS232 RS530 V 35 eee eee ee eee eee ee eee eee RS 232 11 BX25 Configuration 12 Auto Disable Error Limit 0 1000000 0000000 13 Passive Link with Clocking Enabled Disabled Enabled Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the X 25 Link Menu 2 From the X 25 Link Menu select Quick X 25 Menu The Quick X 25 Menu appears 3 ForPassive Link with Clocking Select Enabled Or Disabled The default is Disabled 6 33 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration General Link Properties Configuration This example displays Passive Link with Clocking Setto Enabled Quick X 25 Menu Lik being Configured s s a p pop ERA deck teh Gee a ee on 05 Interface Mode Ka DTE DCE Port speed O external clocking Lm aa 4 bee 9600 X25 Passive Link Mode cN Nor mal Passive Extended Passive Link with Clocking Enabled Disabled Port Data Bits Description This menu item defines the number of databits in a data byte Menu ltem Type Toggle Link Type Availability Async and AsyncPPP Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 2 Foro06 Port Data Bits enter 6 to select 7 ors The default is 8 This example displays 0
279. osite to the sense specified for the connected state 4 Note The RTS DTR lead control options only take effect when the link is configured as a destination link Menu Item Type Toggle Link Type Availability Async and AsyncPPP and SyncPPP Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Foran asynchronous or asynchronous PPP link access Menu 4 2 11 12 13 2 Foro1 dTR connect state enter 1 to select on or orf The default is on 3 For02 DTR disconnect state enter 2 to select on 0FF or TOGGLE The default is off 6 71 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration RTS DTR Lead Control Configuration This example displays 01 DTR connect state Set to OFF and 02 DTR disconnect state Set tO TOGGLE gt 2 Menu 4 2 11 12 13 O1 DTR connect State ON 02 DTR disconnect state On Off Toggle eee ee eee TOGGLE Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu 2 SelectRTS DTR Lead Control Options Menu The RTS DTR Lead Control Options Menu appears 3 FOFrDTR connect state select on or off The default is on 4 FOrDTR disconnect state Select On Off OF Toggle The default is off This example displays DTR connect state Set to Off and DTR disconnect state Set to Toggle RTS DTR Control Options Menu LINK DEDO Configured wos o pa he Gee See he e a a A 3 DIR connect state oo Se 8 sono r E we ee ee On off DTR disconnect State On Of f Toggle
280. ostic Codes Table A 5 Standard Clear Indication Cause Codes Continued Cause Code Description 0x30 Timer expired 0x31 Timer expired for incoming call 0x32 Timer expired for clear indication 0x33 Timer expired for reset indication 0x34 Timer expired for restart indication 0x40 Call set up call clearing or registration problem 0x41 Facility registration code not allowed 0x42 Facility parameter not allowed 0x43 Invalid called address 0x44 Invalid calling address 0x45 Invalid facility registration length 0x46 Incoming call barred 0x47 No logical channel available 0x48 Call collision 0x49 Duplicate facility request 0x4A Non zero address length 0x4B Non zero facility length 0x4C Facility not provided when expected 0x4D Invalid CCITT specified DTE facility 0x50 Miscellaneous 0x51 Improper cause code from DTE 0x52 Not aligned octet 0x53 Inconsistent Q bit setting Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 System Codes X 25 Cause Codes and Diagnostic Codes Kentrox Specific Diagnostic Codes Kentrox specific diagnostic codes provide tips about the nature of a specific problem Table A 6 lists the Kentrox specific diagnostic codes and their meanings Table A 6 Kentrox specific Diagnostic Codes Cause Code Description 0x85 PVC attach error 0x86 Connection listen error 0x87 Not used 0x88 Internal connection ID not foun
281. peed O external clocking 0 a 0 a 9600 X25 Passive Link Mode Nor mal Passive Extended Passive Link with Clocking 0 0 Enabled Disabled Frame Level Disconnect Active Passive Other Frame Window SIZE s cc Ra a ds aa a el Max Packet SIZE s deceo ce em ee Om e e e 128 256 512 Packet Window Size we hy hae ae dy A et Re et a ns ge wn Ane XIZI Local T Ha SS tri Bek tice ak Oe Ge Gn WP a ha Ho adi s a 59274 J 6 70 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration RTS DTR Lead Control Configuration RTS DTR Lead Control Configuration The following configuration items are available for RTS and DTR lead control configuration e DTR State Configuration e RTS State Configuration DTR State Configuration Description DTR is an RS 232 signal sent from a computer or terminal to a modem that indicates that it the computer or terminal is able to accept data DTR lead control is configured using two menu items e DTR connect state Sets the DTR connect state to on or ofr on sets DTR to on while the link is connecting and while it is connected off turns this functionality off e DTR disconnect state Sets the DTR disconnect state to one of the following options e ox Sets DTR to on when the link disconnects e orf Sets DTR to off when the link disconnects e 10GcLE Makes DTR pulse when the link disconnects The pulse polarity is opp
282. r Active 03 Frame Window size 1 T eee rere eee eee eee eee ee eee eee ee 7 04 N2 retry count 0 255 eee e eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 150 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the MLT Link Menu 2 Select Laps Menu The MLT LAPB Menu appears 3 Forn2 Retry Counter enter the retry count The default is 20 This example displays N2 Retry Counter Set to 150 MLT LAPB Menu TKS De A A O s s R p a p a a ae oh Gh Ha CB a a A Ry on 03 Frame Level Disconnect Active Passive Other Frame Window Size aa a AA AAA al N2 Retry Counter cs a ck io e A 11 6 51 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Modem Option Configuration Modem Option Configuration The following menu items are used for modem option configuration They are available for asynchronous and asynchronous PPP links e Modem String e Dialing Time out Interval e Number of Dial Attempts Modem String Description This menu item configures the modem string which can be any of the following e The text sent to a port when an associated link starts or restarts following the termination of a call e The dial string the link to uses to dial the modem automatically once it is enabled e Acommand that places the modem in auto answer mode so that it is set to receive calls Menu Item Type Data Link Type Availability Async and AsyncPPP Configuration in the
283. r ER dete ado Wiad A aa AOE Mate ROURE oo a aopa piunga aiai Pak AAA mada ab e noe do A a Aad elaine DESCOMPEROM de a oa a cama wh Rae eek ae ae OE Oe ee ea a doh arin gaara Display Alias in Destination Menu a 0 Yes No Alias Locarn ami a a a eg chap a a RW SW Be ye ae Beginning End Alias Test Menu lt Fl gt Help lt F2 gt Send lt F4 gt Close lt Ctrl R gt Return to Main Menu Alias Edit Menu A aise NMG ke iR R R es Sees ee be baa eee X25 3 SVC DESTINAT IMOM e aa ide de De a dieses na a e aA A A A E Ei Caller s AddTT ESS G i io dat ih sual aa aa dad a Wed das Cal lada e a aa hy ua aaa a a Wy wears A de ee a re a RE Da ashi X25LL 4 Ca Data 2 pe RER a a cee ele R ar TR TE a wea we TAR Calker S PRO ECO nr A Aaa E ai Cal lid PO T 1 c aia ad daa a AD PCat HT SEEING a aa da Ata as Al ter ate ROUTE e A A A a DESCPIEPEIOM de ci in AA A AR e dea de de a de e E o DS Display Alias in Destination Menu 0 Yes No A EI in Re RTE ae Ge RRR R R Beginning End Alias Test Menu lt Fl gt Help lt F2 gt Send lt F4 gt Close lt Ctrl R gt Return to Main Menu J 8 54 KENT Al296 Commands This chapter provides information about each Al296 shell command and all Al198 winslc commands that are supported by Al296 These commands perform Al296 system tasks Guide to this Chapter Commands Overview Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide A
284. range from 01 to 32 Direction indicator Displays the direction indicator for the line One of the following appears e gt for transmitted frames e lt for received frames Frame type indicator Displays the frame type indicator for the line One of the following appears e d for asynchronous links e Blank for other frames or packets Data If the data field byte count is disabled it gets displayed as ct lt of bytes in data field gt If the data display is enabled and only present in data packets then the data byte count is displayed as lt ASCI STRING gt J 0 48 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands diag tconn diag tconn Description This command displays a list of enabled links along with connection information for each link It displays all connections on Al296 in the same format as command diag conn on page 9 27 but it is not interactive Command Types shell and winslc Formats For the shell command diag tconn For the winslc command winslc baseport diag tconn Parameters baseport Defines the baseport number for Al296 Examples This example displays active connections on Al296 This is a partial display The rest of the response follows the pattern below for the remaining connections 296 diag tconn TI DMUXs w 1 13 26 30 040900 Sev F Base 032 Msg Al 232 Complete Connections Dump 1 PARENT2 Sere gt 32 ASY 2 1 3 TCP 172 16 31 45 500
285. re necessary to correct the interference Information is available from the FCC describing possible corrective actions To maintain low EMI levels we suggest that you use only metal connectors and shielded cable grounded to the frame Specifications are subject to change without notice Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide About this Document Customer Assistance Customer Assistance Kentrox offers technical support 24 hours a day seven days a week Before you contact Kentrox for assistance please have the following information available e The type of hardware and software you are using e The error number and exact wording of any messages that appeared on your screen e What happened and what you were doing when the problem occurred e How you tried to solve the problem Web Site Support Support is available 24 hours a day using our Web site at htto www kentrox com Email Support Email support is available 24 hours a day When you use email support please be sure to include the details of your problem within the email To contact Technical Support send email to techsupport aiinet com Phone Support Phone support is available When you call Kentrox for support please be sure you are at your computer and have the details of your problem available To contact Technical Support call 866 480 3571 Kentrox Product Documentation To order documentation please contact your sales representative at 800 24
286. remote IP Address for this Subnet enter the remote IP address value The default is 0 0 0 0 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide IP Over X 25 Subnet Configuration Remote Settings This example displays Remote IP Address for this Subnet setto 93 67 158 56 IP Over X 25 Subnet Edit Menu Local P Address for this Subnet RRR RAER 0 0 0 0 Local P Mask for this Subnet c s s a boi r b oa g eo 255 255 255 252 Local X25 nk AUMDET oo ee ew a Re a 1 Remote IP Address for this Subnet 1 0 0 eee 93 67 1158 56 Remote X 121 Address Description This menu item configures the IXE remote X 121 address Each IXE connection must have a unique local remote X 121 address pair This means there cannot be two separate IXE connections in the same Al296 with the same local X 121 address and the same remote X 121 address 4 Note X 121 addresses are assigned per link on Al296 not per SVC Menu Item Type Data Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 13 This menu displays a list of all the configured IP over X 25 subnets 2 From Menu 4 2 11 13 enter a value 02 through 11 associated with the IP over X 25 subnet to be configure Menu 4 2 11 13 1 appears 3 Foro5 Remote X121 address enter 5 and the remote address value Maximum length is 15 characters This example displays 05 Remote X121 address Set tO 6505550043 gt 5 6505550043 Menu 4 2 11 13 1 01 Local IP address for thi
287. represents a pause control sequence is the number of tenths of seconds to pause Valid values are 1 to 20 for 0 1 seconds to 2 seconds For example string lt b gt ogi n lt 13 gt lt p 10 gt lt b gt Sends A break signal The text login A carriage return A one second pause Another break signal Menu ltem Type Data Link Type Availability Async Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 12 2 For07 Disconnect string enter7 and the disconnect string Maximum length is 80 characters 6 21 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Disconnect Options Configuration This example displays 07 Disconnect string Set tO lt b gt newString lt 33 gt lt p 15 gt lt b gt gt 7 lt b gt newString lt 33 gt lt p 15 gt lt b gt Menu 4 2 11 12 12 01 Disconnect when DSR off ere ee eee ee eee ee eee eee eee N A 02 Disconnect when DCD off rere eee eee ee eee ee eee eee eee ON 03 Disconnect when a break character is ferglVed 2 nens OFF 04 Disconnect inactivity timer 0 32767 s 0 disabled 00000 O5 Ilnactivity Timer enabled when link receives Call o ooorrrrn OF F 06 I nactivity Timer resets on incoming characters from destination ON 07 Disconnect string eee eee eee lt b gt newString lt 33 gt lt p 15 gt lt b gt Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the Async Link
288. ress errr eee ee ee eee ee eee eee eee eee MLT 6 08 Call data 09 App string 10 Called protoco 11 Caller s protocol AEPN L 12 Alternate routing alias 14 Test macros 15 Show entire alias 16 Show the first entry in the alias translation table 17 Show the previous entry in the alias translation table 18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table 19 Delete the above alias translation entry 20 Save the changes made 20b to the beginning 20e to the end 21 Exit this menu with no changes Enter item number and optional value then push lt CR gt key gt J 8 52 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Alias Configuration Examples Link to Link Call Routing Link to link call routing lets users route all SVC calls coming in on one X 25 link to another X 25 link By using X 25 link to link call routing it is now possible to create a default route for all calls from a specified X 25 link The alias for the default link to link route can route all calls destined for the same link On previous versions of Al296 users had to create an alias for each unique called address In Figure 8 6 NE and Ne2 place calls to NE3 NE4 and other elements on the x 25 network Aliases route calls from ne1 and ne2 to the network elements A link to link call route exists between links 1 and 2 and between links 3 and 4 An incoming X 25 SVC call from ne1 that does not match an alias
289. rm Group Num Sev Date Time Message inks 4 06 13 14 40 Link 1 is enabled but has not come up inks 5 4 06 13 14 40 Link 5 is enabled but has not come up inks 0 4 06 13 14 40 Link 10 is enabled but has not come up inks 4 06 13 14 40 Link 12 is enabled but has not come up general 1 6 06 13 14 40 Unable to find auto ID name of 222 board masked 296 This example displays the clearing of all non self clearing alarm groups 296 alarm clear Alarm groups cleared Overall alarm severity set to 0 296 This example displays the clearing of non self clearing alarm group general 296 alarm clear general Alarm group cleared 296 This example displays the prevention of alarm group i nks from affecting the overall alarm severity 296 alarm mask links Alarm group masked 296 This example displays the unmasking of alarm group i nks 296 alarm unmask links Alarm group unmasked 296 9 15 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands arp arp Description This command displays deletes or adds entries in the ARP cache Command Types shell and winslc Formats For the shell arp a p_address d Ip address S ID address mac_address For the winslc command winslc baseport arp a p_address d jp address S ip address mac_address Parameters a Displays all entries in the ARP cache table or just the p_address entry
290. rmats winslc baseport panic Parameters baseport Defines the Al296 baseport number 9 71 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands passwd passwd Description This command changes an existing user s password Command Type shell Formats passwd Note After the initial command is entered Al296 prompts the user for information needed to configure the new password Examples This example displays the configuration of a new password for existing user pubs 296 passwd Please enter the login name of the user whose password is being changed pubs Please enter the OLD password for user pubs ease enter the NEW password asswords are truncated at 10 characters 09 ease retype NEW password Password successfully changed 296 J 9 72 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands ping ping Description This command sends an ICMP echo request to the specified IP address If the IP device responds to the echo request a reply receipt message appears If a reply is not received within 5 seconds a no reply message appears This command can be used to troubleshoot network level problems Command Types shell and winslc Formats For the shell command ping p_ address For the winslc command winslc baseport ping jp address Parameters ip_address Defines the IP address of the destination device in dotted decimal format baseport Defines th
291. rotocols TCP IP PC or asynchronous terminal configuration Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide About this Document Document Conventions Document Conventions Table 1 describes the text conventions used in this document Table 1 Document Conventions Convention Meaning Screen Text Menu Items System Prompts Messages and Reports This style indicates Kentrox configuration screen text menu items system prompts messages and reports Static Command Text In a command statement this style indicates text that should be entered exactly as shown at a command line Variable Command Text In a command statement this style indicates user specified text In a command statement ellipses signify that the preceding parameter can be repeated a number of times In a command statement square brackets indicate an optional parameter Two or more parameters in square brackets with a vertical bar between them indicate a choice of optional parameters In acommand statement two or more parameters in braces with a vertical bar between them indicate a choice of required parameters Variable Field Text This style indicates variable information you type ina dialog box field KEYS Uppercase body text indicates keys on a keyboard such as the TAB or ENTER keys Keys used in combination are connected with a plus symbol Labels This style designates physical components on
292. rts Individual ports are derived by using a cable assembly or a distribution panel Protocol changes to a single port can be made without interrupting communications on the other ports Each port operates at speeds up to 115 kilobits per second asynchronous or 128 kilobits per second synchronous Al296 supports both X 25 and TCP IP protocols and provides concurrent X 25 TCP IP HDLC Bridging and asynchronous functionality An Ethernet port is available on the front panel or on the backplane interface IRB Al296 uses the IRB to transfer data to and from other cards in the system and network Al296 can be used in an Al shelf with other Al network interface cards to provide single multiple and redundant trunk lines with a variety of physical port and protocol types including e EIA 232 e EIA 530 e X 25 e V35 e IP e Asynchronous e PPP e HDLC Bridge When combined with other Al network interface cards typical applications include collection concentration and trunking of alarm and event messages from many NEs to one or more OSSs and operations centers Al296 meets Bellcore Network Equipment Building Standards NEBS to ensure reliable operations in Central Offices and other telecommunications facilities CAUTION Alswitch and its peripherals contain electrostatic sensitive components Exercise proper handling shipping and storage precautions Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Product Description Al296 Hardware Components
293. rver Menu Item Types Toggle for primary secondary server status Data for primary secondary server IP address server port and server secret Configuration in the Al198 Menu System To configure the TACACS server settings 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 2 4 2 Foroi Primary Server Status enter 1 to select ENABLED Or DISABLED The default is DISABLED J 4 13 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide System Configuration TACACS Configuration 3 For02 Primary Server IP Address enter2 and the IP address The default is 0 0 0 0 4 Foro3 Primary Server Port enter 3 and the port number The default is 49 5 For04 Primary Server Secret enter4 and the password The default is applied 6 Repeat steps 2 through 5 for the secondary server settings This example displays e 01 Primary Server Status Set tO ENABLED e 02 Primary Server IP Address Set tO 050 023 156 011 e 03 Primary Server Port Set to 122 O 04 Primary Server Secret Set tO hilltop gt 4 hilltop Menu 4 2 11 2 4 01 Primary Server Status Enabled Disabled ENABLED 02 Primary Server IP Address e eee ee eee eee ee 050 023 156 012 03 Primary Server Port 1 65535 2 eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 00122 04 Primary Server Secret eee eee eee eee ee hilltop Shell FTP Options Description This item sets the Shell FTP option for TACACS as one of the following e amp nabl ed
294. ry server Menu Item Types Toggle for primary secondary server status Data for primary secondary server IP address server port and server secret Configuration in the Al198 Menu System Note RADIUS and TACACS cannot both be configured at the same time Attempting to do this generates an error To configure the RADIUS server settings 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 2 2 2 Foroi Primary Server Status enter 1 to select ENABLED Or DISABLED The default is DISABLED 3 For02 Primary Server IP Address enter2 and the desired IP address The default iS 0 0 0 0 B Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide System Configuration RADIUS Configuration 4 For03 Primary Server Port enter 3 and the desired port number The default is 1812 5 Foro4 Primary Server Secret enter 4 and the desired password The default is applied 6 If desired repeat steps 2 through 5 for the secondary server settings This example displays O 01 Primary Server Status Set tO ENABLED e 02 Primary Server IP Address Setto050 023 156 012 e 03 Primary Server Port setto 122 04 Primary Server Secret Settohilltop gt 4 hilltop Menu 4 2 11 2 2 01 Primary Server Status Enabled Disabled ENABLED 02 Primary Server IP AQdTesS nr 050 023 156 012 03 Primary Server Port 1 65535 e ee eee ee eee ee eee ee eee 00122 04 Primary Server Secret eee eee eee eee hilltop
295. s linkstat linkstat Description This command displays link statistic information Command Types shell and winslc Formats For the Al296 system command linkstat For the winslc command winslc baseport linkstat Parameters baseport Indicates the baseport number of Al296 9 61 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands linkstat Examples This example displays the link statistic information for Al296 296 linkstat E D hC DE P Link N T TTC R K Speed Conn Rx Pkt Rx Bytes Tx Pkt Tx Bytes Rx ICRC Rx Abt Rx Ovr Tx Und Intf A SS DMT l ASy 9600 n 8 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RS 232 2 DCE 9600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RS 232 3 DCE 9600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RS 232 4 DCE 9600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RS 232 5 DCE 9600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RS 232 6 DCE 9600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RS 232 7 DCE 9600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RS 232 8 DCE 9600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RS 232 9 DCE 9600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RS 232 10 DCE 9600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RS 232 11 DCE 9600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RS 232 12 DCE 9600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RS 232 13 DCE 9600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RS 232 14 DCE 9600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RS 232 15 DCE 9600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RS 232 16 DCE 9600 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 RS 232 296 J 9 62 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands linkstat This example displays link statistic information for the device at
296. s SUDNet lt enorme 000 000 000 000 02 Local IP Mask for this Subnet L 255 255 255 252 03 Local X 25 link number e eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee 01 04 Remote IP address for this Subnet 036 082 234 054 05 Remote X121 address momen 6505550043 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide IP Over X 25 Subnet Configuration Remote Settings Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the IP Over X 25 Subnet Menu 2 From the IP Over X 25 Subnet Menu select add The IP Over X 25 Subnet Edit Menu appears 3 ForRemote X121 Address enter the remote address value This example displays Remote X121 Address Set to 6505550043 IP Over X 25 Subnet Edit Menu Local 1P Address for this Subnet o RER eee eee 0 0 0 0 Local P Mask for this Subnet 0 ao ao a a eee eee 25 5 255 255 25 2 Local 25 CERK lt UL soma me i E R ce ce ch ee ak a H Remote IP Address for this Subnet 0 0 eee 93 67 158 56 Remote X121 Address 2 we ee eee 6505550043 KENT Link Configuration This chapter provides information on configuring Al296 links in the Al198 and Al296 local menu systems Guide to this Chapter Al296 Link Types BX 25 Configuration Connect Options Configuration Disconnect Options Configuration General Link Properties Configuration General PPP Properties Configuration LAPB Parameters Configuration
297. s TL1 packetizing and prevents breaks from passing upstream TL1 120 D Provides TL1 packetizing on TL1 delimiters for 20 seconds of idle time Prevents breaks from passing downstream TN The Telnet module filters Telnet commands out of the data stream and processes them appropriately It also adds commands as necessary to data as it travels downstream When a Telnet break is received it is converted to an X 25 or asynchronous break as required When an X 25 or asynchronous break is received from upstream it is converted to a Telnet break and passed downstream Defaults Passes breaks upstream Passes breaks downstream Initiates Telnet negotiation for WILL Echo and WILL SGA Optional Parameters U Prevents passing break upstream D Prevents passing break downstream Ed d Initiates Telnet negotiation for WILL Echo and WILL Suppress Go Ahead SGA This is useful when a Telnet connection is made to a remote device that provides an echo If d d is specified then the Telnet negotiation string is modified The Telnet negotiation string can be up to 32 characters 8 35 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Protocol Processing Modules Examples TN U Provides Telnet handling but prevents breaks from being propagated upstream TN E Provides Telnet handling and initiates Telnet negotiation for WILL Echo and WILL SGA TN E255 1 Provides Telnet handling and causes the Telnet session
298. s information from the BOOTP server and completely restart the BOOTP process elf at any time the local configuration file stored on flash is changed by a user Al296 will stop attempting to contact the TFTP server e Ifa valid configuration is successfully downloaded from the TFTP server Al296 will update the current configuration with the downloaded file Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Standalone Mode and Switch Mode Switch Mode Switch Mode Switch mode refers to the mode where Al296 is managed by the CLC When Al296 is in switch mode the Al198 menu system must be used to configure IP addresses aliases IP static routes and SNMP traps Al296 must be located in the Al130 or Al180 chassis to operate in switch mode The following characteristics apply when Al296 is operating in switch mode e Al296 gets its configuration from the CLC at boot time instead of locally or by TFTP e The CLC is used to route calls and maintain alias configuration information e The IRB is the default port rather than the front panel Ethernet port e Al296 cards are hot swappable the card configuration does not have to be set up manually e The banner must be less than 1024 characters Note Switch mode may also be referred to as CLC mode Downloading Software for Al296 in Switch Mode To download software for Al296 when it is in switch mode 1 Open a command prompt window 2 Atthe command prompt start the FTP utility ftp
299. s integer 32 v string n Returns the nth wildcard string from the alias match Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Alias Macros Alias Macro Configuration Often there are several ways to write a macro and get the same result One programmer will likely design macros differently than another Note From the Alias Menu you can input a string with in it and the search will break apart the string using as a delimiter The search checks the alias list for an alias name that contains the components It does not limit the search to the beginning and end of text of the alias as in Al198 Configuration Examples This example displays an alias where Alias name 172 16 32 237 30 matches source address 172 16 32 237 with a port number of 30 followed by zero or more characters The caller s address is pvc Call data asy D V 1 6 1 creates strings from asY 1 to ASY 6 Alias Edit Menu Alias Names ky Ges NA 172 16 32 237 30 DESTINATION a oa he gt A AA A A A a Gales 0 e ca a ridad cit id e a Baa ie PVC Called AddHeSS 2 2 aaa oe a d e R ER AR a A da RR Call Data aca e wras aiae Sak oh ns Sh gach arin en a bra ASY D V 1 6 1 This example displays an alias where Alias name 43042 matches source addresses that start with 43042 and may end with zero or more characters Called Address Asy D0 V 1 6 1 creates a called address
300. s or reveals all LCNs from 0 to a specified LCN y ona specified line x FilterL2 Toggles the filtering of level 2 frames without packet information on or off JJ 0 46 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands diag line Table 9 2 Line Monitor Mode Options Continued Option Function interpret a x Toggles the display of decoded packet data on the line monitor on or off and optionally selects the format of the data in the data portion of the packet a or x e a displays the data in the data portion of the packet in ASCIll hexadecimal format Unprintable data hexadecimal values 0x00 to 0x20 and 0x7F to OxFF appears as two digit hexadecimal numbers separated by a space Printable data appears as printable characters This option only applies to data e x displays all the data in the data portion of the packet in hexadecimal format All data appears as two digit hexadecimal numbers separated by a space This option only applies to data print Prints the range of revealed LCNs for all lines CTRL s Pauses the line monitor go Or CTRL q Reactivates the line monitor after displaying the line monitor options ESC or q Quits monitoring traffic exits from the line monitor and returns to the prompt Displays a list of the options available for line monitoring diagnostics Tip Press ENTER to execute a command and press ESC to end the diagnostic session CA
301. s the password for local PAP CHAP authentication Menu ltem Type Toggle for local authentication method Data for local PAP CHAP identity and local PAP password CHAP secret Link Type Availability AsyncPPP and SyncPPP Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Doone of the following e For an asynchronous PPP link access Menu 4 2 11 12 2 1 e For asynchronous PPP link access Menu 4 2 11 12 7 J 6 56 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration PPP Authentication Configuration 2 For02 Local Authentication Method enter 2 to select None PAP Or chaP The default is None 3 Foro3 Local PAP CHAP identity enter 3 and the user name Maximum length is 24 characters The default is applied 4 Foro4 Local PAP Password CHAP Secret enter 4 and the password Maximum length is 24 characters The default is applied This example displays e 02 Local Authentication Method Set to PAP 03 Local PAP CHAP identity Set to bri24 e 04 Local PAP Password CHAP Secret Set IO documentation gt 4 documentation Menu 4 2 11 12 7 01 RAS Option DISABLED RADI US RADI US tB TACACS TACACS FB TACACS 02 Local Authentication Method None PAP CHHABI lt gt lt gt gt gt gt K lt PAP 03 Local PAP CHAP identity bri24 04 Local PAP Password CHAP Secret documentation Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the As
302. s the string that is sent upon indication that there is a device connected to the port DSR asserted Menu Item Types Data Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 14 2 6 2 From Menu 4 2 14 2 6 enter a value from 2 to 11 Menu 4 2 14 2 6 1 appears 3 Foros Init String enter5 and an initialization string value Maximum length is 30 characters This example displays 05 Init String setto conn23 gt 5 conn23 Menu 4 2 14 2 6 1 01 TID to route e eee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 02 Port Data Bits 7 Bjorn 8 03 Port Stop Bits 1 2 eee ee ee rere eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 1 04 Port Parity None Even Odd None 05 Init Str Ing lt gt gt KKK conn23 AI296 Local Menu Item Configuration 1 Access the TID to Modem Mux Menu located under the System Menu 2 From the TID to Modem Mux Summary Menu select Add 11D The TID To Modem Mux Edit Menu appears 3 Forinit String enter a string value Maximum length is 30 characters 4 20 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide System Configuration TID to Modem Mux Configuration This example displays init String setto conn23 TID To Modem Mux Edit Menu TID to route Prot Data BIES s mo w wouw a o o A e SO De Seven Eight Port Stop Bits E EEE One Two Pott 5 0 e a e em ee a A None Even Odd ENTES EROS ai ak REER ew 9 EN L na ace conn23 Port Bit Settings Descriptio
303. sers diag info Is staeia who diag line menu standalone XVC 296 9 53 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands help This example displays help information for command show 296 help show Usage show perf comments conn data mem tcp wan tconn pvc eth ip router version log crash inventory ports 296 J 9 54 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands id Description This command displays the current user name and profile Command Type shell Formats id Examples This example displays the current user name and profile 296 id Username pubs Profile supervisor 296 9 55 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands ip Description This command displays the following system settings IP address Subnet mask High IP address Primary router IP address Backup router IP address Command Type shell Formats ip Examples This example displays the configured IP address information 296 ip IP Address Subnet Mask High IP Address 010 040 057 015 255 255 000 000 010 040 057 015 Router P Address 010 040 000 001 Default No backup router 296 JJ 9 56 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands ip init ip init Note This command is only valid when Al296 is in standalone mode Description This command configures the following settings for A
304. settings Al296 Local Menu Item Configuration 1 Access the Time Menu located under the System Menu 2 FOrsSNTP client on this host is SelectEnabled Or Disabled The default is Enabled 3 ForPrimary SNTP Server enter the primary server IP address The default is 0 0 0 0 4 ForsSecondary SNTP Server enter the secondary server IP address The default is 0 0 0 0 5 FOrsSNTP Poll interval minutes enter the time in minutes for the SNTP servers to be polled The default is 10 This following example displays SNTP client on this host is SettO Enabled Primary SNTP Server S EttO12 43 167 59 e Secondary SNTP Server Setto 12 43 167 60 SNTP Poll Interval minutes Setto7 Time Menu Current Time Zone hh mm s s so s sou woe doa oaa a a a a aa a 000 00 Daylight Saving Time on this host iS a aaa Enabled Disabled SNTP client on this host 15 Enabled Disabled Primary SNTP Server 2 ee ee ee eee eee 12 43 167 59 Secondary SNTP Server 2 ee ee ee ee ee ee ew ee 12 43 167 60 SNTP Poll Interval minutes 2 aa 7 4 35 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide System Configuration Time Configuration Time Zone Description This menu item configures the time zone for Al296 to use The configured value represents the number of hours you are from UTC Menu Item Types Data Al296 Local Menu Item Configuration 1 Access the Time Menu located under the System Menu 2
305. severity levels to display Valid values are 1 to 32 Individual values in the range are separated by hyphens 9 12 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands alarm clear Clears all non self clearing alarm groups or a specified non self clearing alarm group Note Only non self clearing alarm groups can be manually cleared Self clearing alarms clear themselves when the problem that caused the alarm is resolved The following parameter is accepted gr oup Defines the group of alarms to display clear mask or unmask Valid values are existing alarm groups mask Prevents a specified alarm group from affecting overall alarm severity The following parameter is accepted group Defines the group of alarms to display clear mask or unmask Valid values are existing alarm groups unmask Allows a specified alarm group to affect overall alarm severity The following parameter is accepted gr oup Defines the group of alarms to display clear mask or unmask Valid values are existing alarm groups Examples This example displays a list of the alarm groups and the overall alarm severity 296 alarm general 0 00 00 00 00 links 0 06 01 00 00 Link 1 up not self clearing masked Overall alarm severity 0 296 9 13 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands alarm This example displays all system alarms in group inks 296Jalarm links Num Sev Date
306. slation table 17 Show the previous entry in the alias translation table 18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table 19 Delete the above alias translation entry 20 Save the changes made 20b to the beginning 20e to the end 21 Exit this menu with no changes Enter item number and optional value then push lt CR gt key gt Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide TID Multiplexing TID Multiplexing Configuration This example displays the parent alias configuration in the Al296 menu system Note To configure aliases in the Al296 local menu system Al296 must be in standalone mode Alias Edit Menu IIS MaMe s 3 as at as oe RRR teins ab Bon eae EE hte A edn te Aceh yw fo 172 16 1 23 1000 DEST NAT OM 4 aw faa de Rea eee LO eRe eG we aw Oe a a eRe nea Cal Ferns Add TESS we oak ote ye wearer ws aiaa EA edee de ele tele a aa in ar athena anya r EEE wesw bas Caled AGOROSS s r i ERRER oa ee ea eee AALS be oe bares aul Ca o ye yy tp Wah RTL R R dy dened R op ete ted Oca BA Pa AMUN TL1DM Caller Proto Ol 2 aria AG A A a Ra TL1 Caked PROT OC Oke irie ie ia Se wave te arde dida a d ao i ee rate aretha ADDR CIELON 19 0 H a os ses eee Omak dei a a a dba d aa al ri al amp NAA TMUX2 Alternate Route Deseti DELON s momoa naran nanan Ben Mehr AES SS Sek ean Henan an age dae ebay wenn lace Display Alias in Destination Menu 0 Yes No Alias Location r e m veom we OR RR ORR we a oe
307. smit errors that have occurred 9 43 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands diag info Display Item Description LC errors Displays the number of packets received that have had CRC errors alignment_errors Displays the number of alignment errors mi ssed_packets Displays the number of missed packets rx_buffers exhausted Displays the number of times all receive buffers were used but more were required heartbeatlost Displays if there is an error between the Ethernet interface and the Ethernet transceiver rx_overruns Displays the number of packets not received by the interface because of a receiver overrun rba_exceeded Displays the number of times that the maximum number of receive buffers have been exceeded current_tda Displays the current data area being transmitted ex_defers ex_col Displays the number of times that the maximum limit on the excessive deferral timer is exceeded An excessive deferral error is recorded when the following events occur e A transmission attempt is made while another node is transmitting e The transmit period is longer than the excessive deferral timer limit Displays the number of times an excessive collision has been recorded An excessive collision is recorded when a transmit attempt occurs 16 times and a collision occurs each time tx_underruns Displays the number of times the tr
308. ss the Link Menu 2 For ink Type Select Async X25 HDLC SyncPPP AsyncPPP Or MLT The default is Async This example displays Link Type Set to HDLC Bridge HDLC Bridge Link Menu LLAK Tp Coni igure s wom wor egag RA ww Be wR Gow Pw em woe aod Link state ie Aun fae fas E E Je Se wo Sha Le Up Down Link Type Async X 25 HDLC Bridge SyncPPP AsyncPPP MLT J 6 32 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration General Link Properties Configuration Passive Link with Clocking Description This menu item enables or disables an X 25 passive link from supplying a clock value while the link is in the inactive state Note Old AT amp T 5ESS interface cards TN983 require clocking with the passive link set up Menu Item Type Toggle Link Type Availability X 25 Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 2 For13 Passive Link with Clocking enter 13 to select Enabled Or Disabled The default is Disabled This example displays 13 Passive Link with Clocking Setto Enabled gt 13 Menu 4 2 11 12 01 Link number 1 16 eee eee eee ee eee ee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee 05 02 Link Type Async X25 HDLC SyncPPP AsyncPPP MLT X 25 03 Link Description X 25 link 5 04 Link state Enabled Disabled eee eee eee eee Disabled 05 Link mode Normal Passive EvLend ejl eee ee eee N
309. start Timer Set to 1750000 e 121 Call Timer Set to 1000000 122 Reset Timer Set to 20000 e 123 Clear Timer Set to 180000 124 Window Timer Set tO 2356000 O 125 Data Retransmission Timer S ttO 1650000 e 126 Interrupt Timer Set to 2300000 128 Registration Timer Setto 90000 X 25 Parameters Menu Link being configured s s a r p m ae WU wh eh ee Ee oe he eA 03 X25 Facilities Negotiation 0 Enabled Disabled Max Packet Sipe s o m m a na a We alow amp A aes 128 256 512 Packet Window Size bond ia Wes E A Ee ee eo ee X121 Local Address a cae a e ee dE ea eared T20 RESTA 0 TIMET a eon ee ae Rs ae cae A has dO Ade w te ca oo 000 0 T21 Call Timer 1 we a a 1000000000 T22 Reset 1 H i nr a ke oh ag Rt wk He ak a Se ace Se a a eed A ve 2100000 T23 Clear TEMMET ce soue we ew aaa we Gd ERL T24 Window Timer c e e mo a ag g a a ee 235600000 T25 Data Retransmission Timer o a a aa a a ee ee we 1650000 T26 Interrupt Timer ooa a aaa 230000000 T28 Registration Timer oo aaa aa ee ee 900000 6 83 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration X 25 Parameters Configuration X 121 Local Address Description This menu item defines the X 121 address used in the X 25 network The X 121 address consists of a three digit Data Country Code DCC plus a network digit together forming the four digit Data Network Identification Code DNIC followed by the Network Terminal Number NTN of at
310. string of Asy 1 through asy 6 Alias Edit Menu Alias NaMe s a Se a wa Phebe RR bd OY LE LR RR a RR ewe ee TREE TE 43042 Dest Maer OW e r r a ra a tana da wee Ae twee ew bee de ee dead Galler s b l e Ss ecu ha Rin scn taaten k awd ov kak Gh AO as 2 Daaa i aa ee Caled AC OF CSS L ri dete aot ASY D V 1 6 1 Gael Dita e e coe Yee Pee dee aa a e eat ied ee TOSUN 8 43 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Alias Macros This example displays an alias where e Alias name L A P A 1 1 M P 1 matches the base IP address of Al296 with any port number e Called address 10 9 8 7 R A LEN A P A 1 redirects the call to 10 9 8 7 with the same port number e Called protocol tn specifies that the Telnet protocol is used for the connection to the called address Alias Edit Menu Alias Name o eo uv Sow averia aa L A P A 1 1 MYIP 1 DESTINATION 4 cg auc e a de dad aaa Caller s SAM OTE S e ia anata ia ba Rae alae ta aa aa eee We ek ba Called Address 10 9 8 7 R A LEN A P A 1 Call Dita aos a av rara AN da as Caller PROTO ON ui rar a dde ito dae Cal led Protocol a aia dadas saree aaa dada data e TN J 64 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Alias Configuration Examples Alias Configuration Examples Examples are given for the following connections e SVC to S
311. sulates the TCP IP calls within X 25 SVC calls and sends them through the X 25 packet network e The X 25 packet network sends the X 25 calls to a remote Alswitch A1296 e The remote Al296 returns the X 25 calls to TCP IP calls based on its static routing tables e Al296 sends the TCP IP calls over the IP Ethernet network to the SNMP managed device for example Al198 1 13 ff Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Product Description Typical Applications Mixed Asynchronous and X 25 Networks Figure 1 7 illustrates both X 25 network elements and asynchronous network elements connected to a remote OSS using a single X 25 trunk DDM 2000 X 25 Packet Network FLM 150 Operating Support System EEN E EENEN Al296 Titan DACS s Een AA DDM 2000 s Ben Ana FLM 150 A OOOO Titan DACS A DOMO Asynchronous NE Figure 1 7 Mixed Asynchronous and X 25 Network J 104 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Product Description Typical Applications Figure 1 7 illustrates the following events e The OSS sends X 25 calls through an X 25 packet network to Al296 e Al296 makes call routing decisions based on the Al198 routing alias e Al296 sends local X 25 calls directly to the attached NEs e The local Al296 converts local X 25 calls
312. symbol indicates that the lead is negated J 9 00 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands standalone standalone Description This command enables or disables standalone mode For more information about the difference between standalone mode and switch mode refer to Appendix B Standalone Mode and Switch Mode Command Type shell Formats standalone true false L Parameters true Puts Al296 in standalone mode false Takes Al296 out of standalone mode Examples This example displays the current standalone mode status 296 standalone Currently forced standalone mode is OFF Currently running in switch mode 296 This example displays the configuration of standalone mode for Al296 296 standalone true 296 9 91 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands staslc staslc Description This command displays the status of the links and the DP232 cable Command Types shell and winslc Formats For the shell command staslc ink_range For the winslc command winslc baseport staslc ink_range Parameters link_range Defines a link or range of links Valid values are 1 to 32 Individual values are separated by commas and hyphens For example 1 4 6 specifies links 1 4 5 and 6 Specifies all links baseport Defines the baseport number for Al296 J 9 92 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands staslc
313. sync Alias name X25 ink_number cn Called PVC address Call data ASY ink_ number Table 8 6 X 25 PVC Source With Breaks Al198 Source Destination Menu Item Information X 25 PVC TCP with Alias name X25 ink_number cn X 25 PVC telnet break and reply to Called ip_address tcp_ port number X 29 break address Caller s PAD Refer to PAD on page 8 30 protocol Called TN Refer to TN on page 8 35 protocol 8 17 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Source Destination Protocol Tables Table 8 6 X 25 PVC Source With Breaks Al198 Continued Source Destination Menu Item Information X 25 PVC Async with Alias name X25 nk_number Icn X 25 PVC async break with TL1 Async TL1 Called PVC packetizing with async address and X 29 break Async break packetized on Call data ASY ink_number a CR Caller s The following options are available a 4 sidle protocol e X 25 PVC PAD ime Refer to PAD on page 8 30 e X 25 PVC TL1 PAD TL1 Refer to PAD on page 8 30 and TL1 on page 8 33 Called The following options are available protocol e Async leave blank e Async TL1 TL1 Refer to TL1 on page 8 33 e Async packetized PKT P13 12 Refer to PKT on page 8 32 Table 8 7 TCP IP Source Without Telnet Breaks Al198 Source Destination Menu Item Information TCP X 25 SVC Alias name p_address tcp_ port numb
314. sync break with TL1 Async TL1 Called PVC packetizing with async address and X 29 break Async break packetized on Call data ASY ink_number a CR Caller s The following options are available a 4 sidle protocol e X 25 PVC PAD ime Refer to PAD on page 8 30 e X 25 PVC TL1 PAD TL1 Refer to PAD on page 8 30 and TL1 on page 8 33 Called The following options are available protocol e Async leave blank e Async TL1 TL1 Refer to TL1 on page 8 33 e Async packetized PKT P13 12 Refer to PKT on page 8 32 Table 8 15 TCP IP Source Without Telnet Breaks Al296 Source Destination Menu Item Information TCP X 25 SVC Alias name p_address tcp_ port number Called The following options are available address e X25 ink_number called_address e X25 ink_number caller_address call_user_data Note ca ed address must be a valid X 121 address TCP X 25 PVC Alias name ip_address tcp_port_ number Called PVC address Call data X25 ink_number cn J 8 26 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Source Destination Protocol Tables Table 8 15 TCP IP Source Without Telnet Breaks Al296 Continued Source Destination Menu item Information TCP TCP Alias name p_address tcp_port_number Called ip_address tcp_ port_number address
315. t e P Settings e Passive Link Settings e System Prompt e TCP Settings e Telnet Port Destination Menu Break Sequence Description This menu item sets the character sequence that lets the user exit a connection from the destination menu Format Destination menu break sequences take the following format attention keystroke delay start delay end next character attention_keystroke Defines the keystroke that indicates that a break sequence is coming Valid values are e lt x gt where x represents the decimal ASCII value of the keystroke For example enter lt 9 gt to represent the TAB key e lt c gt x where lt c gt represents the CTRL key and x represents the actual key name For example enter lt c gt to represent CTRL SHIFT 6 e lt c gt lt x gt where lt c gt represents the CTRL key and x represents the decimal ASCII value of the actual key name For example enter lt c gt lt 9 gt to represent CTRL TAB delay_start Defines the amount of time in seconds you must wait before entering the next character Valid values are integers from 0 to 8 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide System Configuration General System Properties Configuration delay_end Defines the amount of time in seconds before which you must enter the next character Valid values are integers from 1 to 9 Note If you do not enter the next character within the configured time frame then both the attention keystroke and next
316. t Modem Setup Menu The Modem Setup Menu appears 3 For Dialing time out enter the time out value The default is 30 6 53 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Modem Option Configuration This example displays Dialing time out setto 10 Modem Setup Menu Li Der TOC ON PE s a i pri a Wh Ghee te R te Bea a ee A 3 Modems 0 R sx Bo eo Bay ae toa a cad dita Od 55520002 Dialing time out 5 300 sl 10 Number of Dial Attempts Description This menu item configures the number of times the modem redials before terminating a call Menu Item Type Data Link Type Availability Async and AsyncPPP Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 14 2 For03 Number of dial attempts enter3 and the number of redial attempts The default is 3 This example displays 03 Number of dial attempts setto 15 gt 3 15 Menu 4 2 11 12 14 01 Modem String 6145553003 02 Dialing time out 5 300 Sl ee ee eee eee eee ee ee eee eee eee 010 03 Number of dial attempts 0 100 0 continuous retry 015 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu 2 Select Modem Setup Menu The Modem Setup Menu appears 3 ForNumber of dial attempts enter the number of redial attempts The default is 3 J 6 54 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Modem Option Configuration This e
317. t tO documentation gt 7 documentation Menu 4 2 11 12 7 01 RAS Option DISABLED RADI US RADI US_FB TACACS TACACS FB TACACS 02 Local Authentication Method None PAP CHAP PAP 03 Local PAP CHAP identity bri24 04 Local PAP Password CHAP Secret documentation 05 Remote Authentication Method None PAP CHAP CHAP 06 Remote PAP CHAP identity bri24 07 Remote PAP Password CHAP Secret documentation Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the AsyncPPP or SyncPPP Link Menu 2 Select ppp Authentication Menu The PPP Authentication Menu appears 3 ForkRemote Authentication Method Select None PAP Or CHAP The default is None 4 ForRemote PAP CHAP Identity enter the user name The default is applied 5 ForRemote PAP Password CHAP Secret enter the password The default is applied This example displays O Remote Authentication Method Set to CHAP O Remote PAP CHAP Identity Set to bri 24 O Remote PAP Password CHAP Secret Set tO documentation PPP Authentication Menu LT being configured e a nc Go ae Re aoa Re ae lar oo a A 3 Authentication Options Local Authentication Method 2 None PAP CHAP RAS Option Disabled RADI US RADI US Fal back TACACS TACACS Fall back Local PAP CHAP Identity E OG O Se e Me ieee er e
318. t the asynchronous protocol does PAD converts X 25 Q bits into asynchronous breaks and vice versa Note This protocol processing module can be put on an X 25 data stream J 8 30 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Protocol Processing Modules Defaults Passes breaks upstream Passes breaks downstream Sends no reply to breaks Optional Parameters U Prevents the PAD protocol from passing breaks upstream D Prevents the PAD protocol from passing breaks downstream R Causes the PAD protocol to reply to X 25 breaks 7 21 Causes the X 3 parameter to behave like X 25 This option sends an interrupt packet an indication of a break PAD message and discards data to the terminal M Enables Macstar compatibility Example PAD U Provides PAD break handling but prevents the break from being propagated upstream XXX PAD The packet assembler disassembler is a device that collects data from a group of terminals and outputs the data in packets data organized in a special format It can also take the data packets from a host and turn them into a character stream that can be transmitted to the terminals The XXX PAD is defined by the following values e X 3 Specifies the parameter for terminal handling functions such as baud rate flow control character echoing and other functions for a connection to an X 25 host e X 28 Specifies the user interface for locally controlling a PAD
319. tact person for this managed node John Doe Node Information Description There are two menu items available for configuring node information e Node Name Defines the name of a location on a network e Node Location Defines a location on a network Menu ltem Types Data J 4 24 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide System Configuration SNMP Configuration Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 8 2 For02 Node name enter 2 and the node name The maximum length is 40 characters 3 For03 Node location enter 3 and a node location description The maximum length is 40 characters The following example displays the configuration of node name newNode and node location office B gt 3 Office B Menu 4 2 11 8 01 Contact person for this noise ee eee eee eee ee ee eee John Doe 02 Node dame newNode 03 Node location ee eee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee Office B Al296 Local Menu Item Configuration 1 Access the SNMP Menu located under the System Menu 2 ForNode name enter the node name The maximum length is 40 characters 3 ForNode location enter a node location description The maximum length is 40 characters The following example displays the configuration of node name newNode and node location office B SNMP Menu Contact person for this managed node 0hn Doe Node NAME ain R de he ie ah deed db OR ded oy o
320. tate Enabled Disabled LL Enabled A e eee ee ee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee 9600 06 Port Data Bits 7 Bjorn 8 O7 Port Stop Bits 1 2 eee eee eee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 1 08 Port Parity None Odd EvVen None 09 Flow Control None XonXoff e ee ee eee eee eee eee eee None 10 Xon Repeat interval 0 120s with 0 no repeat 030 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the Async Link Menu or AsyncPPP Link Menu 2 ForxoN Repeat Interval enter a interval value The default is 0 This example displays XON Repeat Interval Set to 30 Async Link Menu klnk T MOM TIO UT 6 2 i a e A Ra a Rae g Link state NE E A ho A Up Down Link Type Async X 25 HDLC Bridge SyncPPP AsyncPPP MLT Interface Type oof ELE A a a RS 232 RS 530 V 35 Port speed in bits per second 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 57 6K 115 2K Autobaud Port data bits Seven Eight Port stop bits One Two Port parity None Even Odd SW FLOW Cont iON o cs o Ra e a was None XonXof f XON Repeat Interval 0 120s with 0 no repeat 30 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration General PPP Properties Configuration General PPP Properties Configuration The following menu items are available for PPP configuration e IPCP Address Settings e Maximum Unit Settings e Network Control Protocol IPCP Address Settings Des
321. te Settings Remote Settings IXE can be configured using either one local and one remote Al296 or one local Al296 and a router that supports IP over X 25 The following configuration components are available e Remote IP Address for this Subnet e Remote X 121 Address Remote IP Address for this Subnet Description This menu item configures the remote IXE IP address for the subnet Note This address is not the same as the remote Al296 or router IP address Menu Item Type Data Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 13 This menu displays a list of all the configured IP over X 25 subnets 2 From Menu 4 2 11 13 enter a value 02 through 11 associated with the IP over X 25 subnet to be configured Menu 4 2 11 13 1 appears 3 Foro4 Remote IP address for this subnet enter the remote IP address value The default is 0 0 0 0 This example displays 04 Remote IP address for this subnet S ttO 36 82 234 54 gt 4 36 82 234 54 Menu 4 2 11 13 1 01 Local IP address for this subnet 000 000 000 000 02 Local IP Mask for this Subnet netamente 255 255 255 252 03 Local X 25 link number 01 04 Remote IP address for this subnet 036 082 234 054 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the IP Over X 25 Subnet Menu 2 From the IP Over X 25 Subnet Menu select add The IP Over X 25 Subnet Edit Menu appears 3 For
322. tely after you remove a card from the chassis you must insert it into its antistatic bag When the cards are not in use keep them in their antistatic plastic bags Do nat ship or store cards near strong electrostatic electromagnetic or radioactive fields CAUTION For Kentrox equipment to operate safely and correctly there must be a safety ground strap between the equipment ground bolts and the office ground Proper Cooling Caution A CAUTION ENSURE PROPER COOLING When Al296 is installed into an Al180 Alswitch series 180 chassis the chassis must be equipped with the Alcool chassis cooling and Baffle HS heat baffle with sensor assemblies The Al1801 Alswitch series 180 integrated chassis has a built in fan and baffle assembly and does not require additional assemblies Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide About this Document Cautions and Warnings FCC Warning The Federal Communications Commission has set limits for emitted radio interference and Al296 is constructed with this electromagnetic interference EMI limitation in mind Al296 is classified under FCC regulations as a Class A device that is a device for use in commercial environments and not in residential areas This device has been tested and shown to comply with the following FCC rule Part 15 Subpart J Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference to radio and TV reception requiring the user to take whatever steps a
323. temo06 MIB2 Read Community Name Set to MI B2 6 liem 07 Write Community Name Set to writ eComm gt 7 Writ eComm Menu 4 2 11 8 01 Contact person for this n0d ee ee ee eee eee eee eee 00 Node Mam s oia ia es ore Soe Sie eer es Se be A TTT 03 Node OCd T sect sees et eE EE plaa a need ad ee Rie Rie me mines im eon EUEAEO ET aeuence Etla dE E 04 Send authentication trapsS eee eee ee ee eee ee eee eee eee ee eee ON 05 Read Community Name e ee eee eee ee eee eee ee eee eee ReadComm 06 MIB2 Read Community Name o MI B2 07 Write Community NamMe o WriteComm Al296 Local Menu Item Configuration 1 Access the SNMP Menu located under the System Menu 2 For menu item Read Community Name enter the community name value The maximum length is 32 characters The default value iS readon y 3 For menu item NI 87 Read Community Name enter the community name value The maximum length is 32 characters The default value is public 4 For menu item write Community Name enter the community name value The maximum length is 32 characters The default value is administrator The following example displays 6 liem Read Community Name Set tO ReadComm e tem mp2 Read Community Name Set to MI B2 e liem write Community Name Set to Writ eComm SNMP Menu Contact person for this managed node NOE TMG aoe ee ge ve he a A RR tht itn eatery Node location S
324. ter 7 to select ON or OFF The default is oFF J s4 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Connect Options Configuration This example displays 05 Connect when DCD is on Set to ON e 06 Connect when characters are received Set tO OFF 07 Connect without DSR DCD or received characters Set tO OFF gt 5 Menu 4 2 11 12 11 01 Link Application Login Destination Alias ALIAS 02 Alias eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee eee async 4 1 03 Call retry interval 0 32767 s 0 disabled 00030 04 Dial Connect when DSR is on 2 2 eee eee eee eee eee eee eee N A 05 Connect when DCD is 0NM 22 eee eee ee eee eee eee eee ON 06 Connect when characters are received ee ee eee eee eee OFF 07 Connect without DSR DCD or received characters OFF Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the Async Link Menu 2 Select connect Options Menu The Connect Options Menu appears 3 ForConnect when DCD is on Select on or orff The default is or F 4 Forconnect when characters are received Select on or ofr The default is on 5 For Connect without DSR DCD or received characters Select on or off The default is OFF This example displays e Connect when DCD is on Setto On e Connect when characters are received Set to Off e Connect without DSR DCD or received
325. ter Settings e X 25 Facilities Negotiation e X 25 Timer Settings e X 121 Local Address Maximum Packet Size Description This menu item defines the maximum number of bytes permitted for an X 25 packet This limit governs both transmit and receive packets Menu Item Type Toggle Link Type Availability X 25 Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 8 2 Foro2 max packet size enter 2 to select 128 256 or512 The default is 128 This example displays 02 Max packet size setto 512 gt 2 Menu 4 2 11 12 8 01 X25 Facilities negotl ati on x rs ON 02 Max packet size 128 256 512 seer ee erence eee eee eee eee 512 Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the X 25 Link Menu 2 Select x 25 Parameters Menu The X 25 Parameters Menu appears 3 ForMax Packet Size selecti28 256 0r 512 The default is 128 6 75 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration X 25 Parameters Configuration This example displays Max Packet Size Set to 256 X 25 Parameters Menu Link being configured eee Ra 03 X25 Facilities Negotiation sR Enabled Disabled Max Packet Size e 128 256 512 Packet Window Size Description This menu item defines the packet window size which specifies the number of packets that can be sent before receiving confirmation that the first packet was received correctly Menu
326. ter item number and optional value then push lt CR gt key Note Refer to Alias Configuration Examples on page 8 45 for a descriptions of all menu items in this example J 8 43 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Alias Configuration Examples PVC to SVC Connection In Figure 8 4 the incoming X 25 data on the incoming Al296 is On baseport 16 link 2 with the alias of 16 x25 2 3 The call then continues out the outgoing Al296 on baseport 32 and called address 6145553897 Alias 16 X25 2 3 Called Protocol IP Address 172 16 1 111 TCP IP Network Al296 Incoming Al296 Outgoing SI E i B ec 5 D o IHI SNES aneze 01298 Baseport 16 Baseport 32 Link 2 Link 4 Called Address 6145553897 Figure 8 4 PVC to SVC Connection Diagram 8 49 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Alias Configuration Examples This example displays the menu items used to configure a PVC to SVC connection gt 10 TL1 Menu 8 01 Alias name 25 eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 16 X25 2 3 02 SLC Routing 03 Destination 172 16 1 111 04 Called address lt lt o ocomorrrrr ete eee ete ee ee eee eee eee X25 4 6145553897 05 This alias is visible in the destination menu NO 06 Link number is 1 16 07 Caller s address 08 Call data 09 App string 10 Called protocol TL
327. termines the number of children in this case it is noted by Tmux2 The children have the following names TL1Dm 1 and TL1pM 2 These names are established through 08 Cal data in the parent alias configuration The calls to the first child will be X 25 through link 1 with X 121 address 123456789012 X25 1 123456789012 The call to the second child will be X 25 through link 2 with X 121 address 987654321098 x25 2 987654321098 J 7 10 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide TID Multiplexing TID Multiplexing Configuration 3 Al296 forwards all TL1 commands with TIDS NE OH COLUMBUS 1 NE OH COLUMBUS 2 and NE 0H coLUMBUS 3 through the first child connection It forwards all TL1 commands with TIDS NE OH WORTHI NGTON 1 and NE OH WORTHI NGTON 2 through the second child connection This example displays the parent alias configuration in the Al198 menu system gt 11 TL1 Menu 8 01 Alias name LLL 172 16 1 23 1000 02 Simple alias translation 03 Destination 04 Called address 05 This alias is visible in the destination menu YES 06 Link number is 1 16 07 Caller s address 08 Ca dafa ne ee ree TL1DM 09 App String 2 22 rere eee ee eee eee eee ee eee eee TMUX2 10 Called protocol 2 25 eee eee eee ee ee ee eee lt n H 11 Caller s protocol TL1 12 Alternate routing alias 14 Test macros 15 Show entire alias 16 Show the first entry in the alias tran
328. th is 14 characters ip_address Defines the IP address in dotted decimal format The symbol must be entered as a field separator between the p_ address field and the tcp_port_ number field len Defines the logical channel number link_number Defines the number of the serial link tcp_port_number Defines the TCP port number Valid values are from 1 to 65535 Source Destination Protocol Tables for the Al198 Menu System The following tables are organized according to source protocols Match the destination protocol with the source protocol to find the appropriate menu item entries e Asynchronous Source Without Breaks Al198 e Asynchronous Source With Breaks Al198 e X 25 SVC Source Without Breaks Al198 e X 25 SVC Source With Breaks Al198 e X 25 PVC Source Without Breaks Al198 e X 25 PVC Source With Breaks Al198 e TCP IP Source Without Telnet Breaks Al198 e TCP IP Source With Telnet Breaks Al198 J 8 12 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Source Destination Protocol Tables Table 8 1 Asynchronous Source Without Breaks Al198 Source Destination Menu Item Information Async Async 01 ASY ink_number 04 PVC 08 ASY ink_number Async X 25 SVC 01 ASY ink_number 04 The following options are available e X25 ink_number called address e X25 ink_number caller_address call_user_data Note ca ed address must be a valid X 121 address
329. that either SCCOA or SCC1A will be up but not simultaneously and will temporarily take down the corresponding link if connections fail or cannot be placed because the corresponding remote link is down Menu ltem Type Toggle Link Type Availability X 25 Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 1114 12 2 For05 Link mode enter 5 to select Normal Passive OF Extended The default is Normal 6 29 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration General Link Properties Configuration This example displays 05 Link mode Set to Passive gt 5 Menu 4 2 11 12 01 Link number 1 16 ee ee eee eee ee eee ee eee eee ee eee eee 01 02 Link Type Async X25 HDLC SyncPPP AsyncPPP MLT X 25 03 Link Description Async link 1 04 Link state Enabled Disabled ee Enabled 05 Link mode Normal Passive Extended lt lt lt n Passive Configuration in the Al296 Local Menu System 1 Access the X 25 Link Menu 2 From the X 25 Link Menu select Quick X 25 Menu The Quick X 25 Menu appears 3 Forx25 Passive Link Mode Select Normal Passive Or Extended The default is normal This example displays x25 Passive Link Mode Set tO Passive Quick X 25 Menu Link Deine CONTTOUTEd a aai ck ar a ae ce ee a cic um Th on om AA Om 03 Lntiertiaice Mod aeoe t e ye e ee ao
330. the same time Command Type shell Formats profile n profile name c existing profile new profile a profile name commands w d profile name commands remove profile name Parameters a Adds commands to a profile and optionally adds write permission The following parameters are accepted e profile_name Defines the name of a user profile e command Defines the name of a command to associate with a user profile e w Adds write permission for a command that otherwise would not have write permission J 9 76 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands profile c Creates a new profile from an existing user profile The following parameters are accepted e existing profi e Specifies the name of an existing user profile e new profi e Defines the name of a new user profile d Deletes commands from a profile The following parameters are accepted e profile_name Defines the name of a user profile e command Defines the name of a command to associate with a user profile Lists all commands associated with a specific user profile The following parameter is accepted profil e_name Defines the name of a user profile n Lists all user profile names remove Removes a user profile The following parameter is accepted profile_name Defines the name of a user profile Examples This example displays each of the profile parameter options with associated functionality
331. through the AEPN protocol option to preserve packetization 7 The data packet is converted travels downstream and is transmitted out Al296 using an X 25 protocol with the original packetizing characteristics preserved This is an example configuration in the Al198 menu system for Al296 A gt 8 Menu 8 01 Alias name eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee ee eee ee ee eee TOCARDB 02 Simple alias translation 03 Destination 04 Called address LLL 172 16 30 200 5000 05 This alias is visible in the destination menu NO 06 Link number is 1 16 07 Caller s address 08 Ca data 09 App string 10 Called protocol e eee eee ee eee eee ee ee eee ee ee eee AEPN 11 Caller s protocol 12 Alternate routing alias 14 Test macros 15 Show entire alias 16 Show the first entry in the alias translation table 17 Show the previous entry in the alias translation table 18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table 19 Delete the above alias translation entry 20 Save the changes made 20b to the beginning 20e to the end 21 Exit this menu with no changes Enter item number and optional value then push lt CR gt key gt 8 3 fj Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Overview This is an example configuration in the Al198 menu system for Al296 B gt 8 01 Alias name 172 16 02 Simple alias translation 03 Destination 04 Call
332. tination menu rre NO 06 Link number is 1 16 07 Caller s address 08 Ca data 09 App string 10 Called protoco 11 Caller s protocol 12 Alternate routing alias 14 Test macros 15 Show entire alias 16 Show the first entry in the alias translation table 17 Show the previous entry in the alias translation table 18 Show the next entry in the alias translation table 19 Delete the above alias translation entry 20 Save the changes made 20b to the beginning 20e to the end 21 Exit this menu with no changes Enter item number and optional value then push lt CR gt key gt 7 7 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide TID Multiplexing TID Multiplexing Configuration 4 5 10 Foro1 Alias name enter parent name m parent_name Defines the name you entered for 08 cal data during the parent alias configuration m Defines the child number Valid values are 1 to n specified during the parent alias configuration For 02 Simple alias translation enter 2 Menu 8 2 appears with the available translation options gt 2 Menu 8 2 01 Simple alias translation 02 Multiplexed connection 03 Multiplexed only translation 04 SLC routing translation 21 Exit this menu with no changes Enter item number and optional value then push lt CR gt key gt For 04 SLC routing translation enter 4 Menu 8 re appears with SLC routing rans ation selected for menu item 2 If you
333. tion entries take effect only after every screen has been saved going back to the main menu 21 Exits a menu without saving changes All items on the menu return to the previously configured values Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Using the Al198 Menu System Exiting the Menu System Exiting the Menu System To exit the menu system 1 Access the Main Menu 2 Enter 21 The command prompt appears KENT Al296 Local Menu System This chapter provides information on the configuration and navigation of the Al296 menu system This system offers on board configuration capabilities similar to those available in the Al198 menu system The Al296 menu system is available when the card is operating in both switch mode and standalone mode Guide to this Chapter Identifying Al296 Menu System Security Options Logging Into Al296 Accessing the Local Menu System Navigating the Local Menu System Accessing the Help Menu Exiting the Local Menu System Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Local Menu System Identifying Al296 Menu System Security Options Identifying Al296 Menu System Security Options Al296 has a variety of security options including e Multilevel User Name and Password Security e RADIUS Authentication e TACACS Authentication e PPP Authentication Protocols PAP and CHAP Multilevel User Name and Password Security Up to 10 configurable user account profiles can be assigned to an Al
334. tion field 7 optional For Called Address enter the called destination address The called destination address defines the phone number being called Maximum length is 14 characters The actual address or an alias macro can be entered here les 10 11 12 13 14 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Call Routing optional For cali Data enter the call user data Call data is dependent on the type of SLC being used It may be directly entered as an alias macro optional For caller s Protocol enter the caller s protocol type For more information about protocol types refer to Protocol Processing Modules on page 8 29 optional For called Protocol enter the called protocol type For more information about protocol types refer to Protocol Processing Modules on page 8 29 For Display Alias in Destination Menu Select Yes Or No This setting specifies if the alias will appear in the welcome screen For Alias Location Select Beginning Or end to place the alias at the beginning or end of the alias table Select lt F2 gt Send to save the changes Repeat this procedure for additional alias configurations Arranging Aliases in the Alias Table To arrange aliases in the alias table 1 From the Al296 Main Menu access the Alias Menu The Alias Summary Menu appears Alias Summary Menu Find alias Add Alias Sort
335. tion when DCD is asserted If connect when characters are received iS also enabled and is satisfied first then Connect when DCD is on has no effect on the link connection e Connect when characters are recei ved Enables or disables the link connection when incoming characters are received If connect when DCD is on iS also enabled and is satisfied first then connect when characters are received has no effect on the link connection e Connect without DSR DCD or received characters When this menu item is enabled Connect when DCD is on ANd Connect when characters are received are forced off and the retry interval is set to 30 If the link application type is set to LOGI N or ALIAS connection will occur as soon as the link is enabled completely independent from the DCD and incoming character status If the link application type is set to DESTI NATI ON the link will connect immediately when an outgoing call is placed to the destination also completely independent from DCD and incoming character status 4 Note Dial Connect when DSR is on has no effect on Al296 operation Menu Item Type Toggle Link Type Availability Async Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 11 2 Foro5 Connect when DCD is on enter 5 to select on or orf The default is off 3 Foro6 Connect when characters are received enter 6 to select on or off The default iS ON 4 For07 Connect without DSR DCD or received characters en
336. ty Timer resets on incoming characters from destination Set to Off Disconnect Options Menu Link Being comfigured s s bee Boum d Mk a Bow BOW ws 3 Disconnect when DCD is off 2 ee On Off Disconnect when a Break character is received On Of f Disconnect inactivity timer 0 32767s 0 disabled far 367 Inactivity Timer enabled when link receives call On Of f Inactivity Timer resets on incoming characters from destination On Off Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Disconnect Options Configuration Disconnect Settings Description The disconnect settings are configured using two menu items Disconnect when a break character is recei ved Enables or disables link disconnection when a break character is received Disconnect when DCD of f Enables or disables link disconnection when DCD is not asserted Note Al296 does not consider the DSR state when disconnecting calls Menu ltem Type Toggle Link Type Availability Both menu items are available for async links Menu item Disconnect when DCD off is available for asyncPPP links Configuration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 12 2 Foro02 Disconnect when DCD off enter 2 to select on or off The default is off 3 Foro03 Disconnect when a break character is received enter 3 to select on or OFF The default is on This example displays 02 Disconnect when DCD off setto on and 03
337. uration in the Al198 Menu System 1 Access Menu 4 2 11 12 8 For05 120 restart timer enter5 and the timer value The default is 180000 For 06 T21 call timer enter 6 and the timer value The default is 200000 For 07 122 reset timer enter7 and the timer value The default is 10000 For 08 123 clear timer enter 8 and the timer value The default is 180000 For 09 T24 window timer enter 9 and the timer value The default is 75000 ADM E HM M For 10 125 data retransmission timer enter 10 and the timer value The default is 150000 8 For11 126 interrupt timer enter 11 and the timer value The default is 180000 9 Fori2 128 registration timer enter 12 and the timer value The default is 180000 This example displays e 05 720 restart timer setto 1750000 e 06 T21 call timer Set to 1000000 07 T22 reset timer Set to 20000 e 08 723 clear timer Set to 180000 09 724 window timer Set to 2356000 e 10 725 data retransmission timer setto 1650000 e 11 T26 interrupt timer Set to 2300000 e 12 728 registration timer Set to 90000 gt 12 90000 Menu 1 7 11 172 8 01 X25 Facilities nheggtl atl 0n LLL OFF 02 Max packet size 128 256 512 reno 128 03 Packet window size 1 7 eee ee eee eee ee eee eee ee eee eee eee 002 04 X121 local address 0 15 decimal digits eee eee ee eee 05 T20 restart timer 0 3200000ms e eee ee eee ee eee 1750000 06 T21 call timer
338. ure and verify the X 25 SVC links Refer to section SVC Configuration Settings on page 6 90 for information about configuring X 25 SVC links e Create IP subnets and IP over X 25 remote pairs e Create IP static routing table entries optional e Reset Al296 Before Configuration In order for the TCP IP stack to know where to route incoming packets an appropriate subnet must be configured IP addresses and subnets must be assigned to the local and remote sides of the X 25 link also called doorway X 121 addresses are then assigned to the local and remote sides After this a static route can be setup through the IXE link to the remote doorway IP address Refer to the example in Figure 5 1 on page 5 2 for an illustration of how to configure IP over X 25 Local Al296 Remote Al296 IP address 198 127 1 196 IP address 198 30 2 196 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Link Numbers Local IXE doorway Remote IXE doorway 11 address 20 0 0 1 K address 20 0 0 2 8 Local IXE doorway Remote IXE doorway X 121 address X 121 address 3035550005 6065550008 IXE subnet mask IXE subnet mask 255 255 255 0 IP Tunnel 255 255 255 0 within X 25 Figure 5 1 IXE Example Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide IP Over X 25 Subnet Configuration Local Settings Local Settings IXE can be configured using either one local and one remote Al296 or one local Al296 and a router that supports IP over
339. vide clocking or synchronize with an external clock See Also General Link Properties Configuration MLT MLT links are designed for interfacing with the metallic loop testing switch application found in telephone switch networks This application consists of proprietary messages transported using LAPB The MLT link type enables the transporting of proprietary messages across an IP network LAPB is terminated on Al296 and the data is transported to a remote end point using another transport protocol such as TCP IP See Also e General Link Properties Configuration e LAPB Parameters Configuration e General PPP Properties Configuration e PPP Authentication Configuration Synchronous PPP Synchronous PPP links use PPP point to point protocol and synchronized transmission They can provide clocking or synchronize with an external clock Synchronous PPP links support PAP and CHAP for authentication and can be set as bridged BCP or routed IPCP interfaces See Also e General Link Properties Configuration e General PPP Properties Configuration e PPP Authentication Configuration X 25 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration Al296 Link Types X 25 links provide a synchronous connection to a packet switched X 25 network X 25 links can behave as DTE or DCE and can provide clocking or synchronize with an external clock X 25 links support both PVC and SVC calls and allow configuration of a variety of LAPB and X 25 prot
340. wing topics are covered in this section e Module Types e Module Properties Module Types The following module types are available e Applied Innovation encapsulation protocol AEP e Applied Innovation encapsulation protocol with network option AEPN e Applied Innovation encapsulation protocol extension AEPX e Asynchronous protocol processing module ASY e BX 25 network module BX25NM e BX 25 session layer module BX25S e End to end reset ETER e Packet assembler disassembler PAD and XXX PAD e Packetizing module PKT e Record boundary preservation RBP e Translation language one TL1 e Telnet module IN AEP The Applied Innovation encapsulation protocol works with messages traveling between X 25 and TCP IP protocols AEP allows for packet preservation of X 25 data when transport is over a TCP IP network This protocol keeps packet boundaries intact which is useful for X 25 applications that are highly sensitive to packet integrity AEPN The Applied Innovation encapsulation protocol with the network option is used for messages traveling between X 25 and TCP IP protocols In addition to the services provided by the AEP protocol the AEPN also passes X 25 Q bit information over a TCP IP connection AEPN also handles special information such as break signals 8 29 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Alias and Call Routing Configuration Protocol Processing Modules AEPX Applied Innovation encapsulation extension
341. xample displays O 13 R20 restart count Setto 150 O 14 R22 reset transmission count Setto 25 15 R23 clear retransmission count Setto 34 O 16 R28 registration retransmission count Setto 52 gt 16 52 Menu 4 2 11 12 8 01 X25 Facilities negotiation eee rere eee eee eee eee eee eee OFF 02 Max packet size 128 256 512 eee eee ee eee eee ee eee ee ee 128 03 Packet window size 1 7 eee ee ee ee ee eee eee ee ee eee eee eee eee 002 04 X121 local address 0 15 decimal digits eee eee eee 05 T20 restart timer 0 3200000ms eee ee eee ee eee eee 1750000 06 T21 call timer 0 3200000ms eee ee eee eee eee ee eee 1000000 07 T22 reset timer 0 3200000ms eee ee eee eee eee ee eee 0020000 08 T23 clear timer 0 3200000ms eee eee eee eee eee eee 0180000 09 T24 window timer 0 3200000ms eee eee ee eee ee ee eee eee 2356000 10 T25 data retransmission timer 0 3200000ms 1650000 11 726 interrupt timer 0 3200000ms eee eee eee eee 2300000 12 728 registration timer 0 3200000ms 0090000 13 R20 restart count 0 255 eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 150 14 R22 reset transmission count 0 255 eee eee eee eee ee eeee 025 15 R23 clear retransmission count 0 255
342. xample displays Number of dial attempts set to 15 Modem Setup Menu LK beim configured s s a m ob Oh wah A te fama ko le ee 3 Modem string KT Gir a or ween ae EA 6145552002 Dialing time out 5 300 Ss sos 6 3 0 we we ee ew ee ew we we hw 40 Number of dial attempts 0 100 0 continuous retry 15 6 55 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration PPP Authentication Configuration PPP Authentication Configuration The following menu items are available for PPP authentication configuration e Local Authentication Settings e RAS Option e Remote Authentication Settings Local Authentication Settings Description The local authentication settings are configured using three menu items e Local authentication method Defines the local authentication method as one of the following options e Prr Specifies the method that uses a two way handshake that is done only upon initial link establishment e cHhAP Specifies the method that verifies the identity of the peer using a three way handshake that is done upon initial link establishment Verification may be repeated any time after the link has been established CHAP also encrypts the user s password over the PPP link to provide added security e None Specifies no authentication will be used e Local PAP CHAP identity Defines the user name for local PAP CHAP authentication e Local PAP password CHAP secret Define
343. xing Troubleshooting ss cositas 7 15 A a rn eo E EE A 7 15 Diagnostics for TID Multiplexing socio il 7 17 Chapter 8 Alias and Call Routing Configuration sss eee eee e 8 1 Beg lei LE 8 2 PA RP QA E E 8 5 Configuring an Alias in the Al198 Menu System see eee eee eee eee 8 5 Configuring an Alias in the Al296 Menu System see eee eee eee eee 8 7 Configuring an Alias with X 25 Keep Alive sees eee eee 8 10 Source Destination Protocol Tables secciones eiii 8 12 Source Destination Protocol Tables for the Al198 Menu System eee 8 12 Source Destination Protocol Tables for the Al296 Menu System eee 8 20 Protocol Processing Modules cuna 8 29 Module el 8 29 Module Properties TTT 8 36 ALAS Macros aaea a A E A nee 8 38 Alias Macro Components esse eee eee eee 8 38 UN Table of Contents Alias Macro Configuration sse eee eee eee 8 43 Alias Configuration Examples seer een eee Ree ee eee ee ee eee er 8 45 SVC to SVC ee liae le 8 45 SVC to PVC ella eT 8 47 PVC to SVC Connection sss sss sese eee e eee eee eee 8 49 MLT lt ie 8 51 Link to Link Call Routing scsi 8 53 Chapter 9 Al296 Commands sica eee eee ri poa 9 1 Commands OVErview siii as 9 2 ShiellsCOMMAandS ninia a a a a 9 2 Shell Connections see eee eee eee 9 2 WINSIG COMMANGS arrire tec chietdie tga dd dec N a 9 4 TT 9 6 ANIM nailon odia 9 12 Mi A A AA ei a 9 16 Break O O 9 19 A aa Ea E EKA AA EEE EA N an EEA ETNEA EA A A EEE 9 21 ROS COU ea a O 9 22 dale ai atado Risso 9 23 ISG sisi 9 2
344. yncPPP Link Menu or SyncPPP Link Menu 2 Select ppp Authentication Menu The PPP Authentication Menu appears 3 Forlocal Authentication Method Select None PAP Or CHAP The default is None 4 Forlocal BARI CHAP Identity enter the user name The default is applied 5 ForlLocal PAP Password CHAP Secret enter the password The default is applied This example displays O Local Authentication Method Set tO CHAP e Local PAP CHAP Identity Setto bri 24 e Local PAP Password CHAP Secret S t tO documentation PPP Authentication Menu ie Der NG CONTOUR m a 2 amp amp aoe amp see A eck th thd PO a Aca ew g 3 Authentication Options Local Authentication Method 4 None PAP CHAP RAS Option Disabled RADI US RADI US Fal back TACACS TACACS Fall back Local PAP CHAP Identity 2 4 4 6 a woe ak Ge Oe eR eG eave dda bri24 Local PAP Password CHAP Secret S Se At de a ok Bd ARA documentation 6 57 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Link Configuration PPP Authentication Configuration RAS Option Description This menu item configures the method Al296 uses to obtain ID and password information for a link The following options are available Disabling RAS causes Al296 to use local ID and password information to validate the ID and password sent from a remote device Enabling RADIUS causes Al296 to use the ID and password information configured in the RADIUS server to validate the ID and p
345. ype shell Formats sholog p Parameters p Displays the content of the file one page at a time Note This option is not available with command show log Examples This example displays the contents of an Al296 log file one page at a time 296 sholog p 06 20 11 060600 06 20 20 060600 06 21 01 060600 06 21 04 060600 06 21 04 060600 06 21 07 060600 04 40 49 060700 04 40 51 060700 User pubs from 10 40 5 User pubs from 10 40 5 Configuration has chang Configuration has chang User pubs from 10 40 5 User pubs from 10 40 5 User pubs from 10 40 5 Sev F Sev F Sev 0 Sev 0 Sev F Sev F Sev F Sev F Configuration has changed sg 20 1436 sg 20 1436 sg ed sg ed sg 20 1436 sg 20 1436 sg 20 2729 sg has has has has has User pubs from 10 40 5 20 2729 has Press Space for more or q to quit exited the shell entered the shell exited the shell logged out of the Destination Menu logged into the Destination Menu entered the shell 9 85 Al296 Version 9 8x User s Guide Al296 Commands show show Description This command displays various types of information for Al296 Command Types shell and winslc Formats For the shell command show comments conn crash data ink_range eth inventory ip log mem perf ink_ range ports ink_ran

Kentrox AI296 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents